Manial Del Equipo de Comunicaciones OPLAT GRIDCOM T390

Gridcom T390
User’s Guide
Version: 9.0
T390/EN TG
Copyright and Proprietary Information
Copyright 2020 General Electric Company and/or its affiliates (“GE”). All Rights Reserved. This document is the
confidential and proprietary information of GE and may not be reproduced, transmitted, stored, or copied in
whole or in part, or used to furnish information to others, without the prior written permission of GE.
Gridcom T390
CONTENTS
Introduction
Safety
General Presentation
Installation
Commissioning
Human Machine Interface
Maintenance
Gridcom T390
Gridcom T390
Introduction
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Introduction
CONTENTS
1. Overview ........................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Safety Section ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 General Presentation ............................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Installation ............................................................................................................................ 3
1.4 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 Human machine Interface ..................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Maintenance and Measure .................................................................................................... 3
2. Definitions and standards ............................................................................... 4

2.1 Definitions.............................................................................................................................4
2.2 List of acronyms and abbreviations ......................................................................................4
2.3 Standards – References.........................................................................................................6
Gridcom T390 1 Introduction

1. Overview
The PLC user manual includes six sections:
▪ Safety section
▪ General Presentation
▪ Installation
▪ Commissioning
▪ Human Machine Interface
▪ Maintenance and Measures
1.1 Safety Section

The Safety Section provides full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this
equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
1.2 General Presentation

The General Presentation section provides full information on PLC T390 features, equipment
description, main characteristics and performances.
1.3 Installation
The Installation section provides full information on equipment description, shipment, environmental
conditions, boards installation, power supply boards and VDC range, equipment connection.
1.4 Commissioning
The Commissioning section provides full information on T390 commissioning, configuring hardware,
testing and fault isolation during commissioning, and checks.
1.5 Human machine Interface

The Human Machine Interface section provides full information on HMI software installation, system
requirement, HMI interface description, operating the HMI.
1.6 Maintenance and Measure

The Maintenance and Measures section provides full information on Maintenance, Monitoring, Testing
and Fault isolation, and provides also firmware upgrade instruction.

2. Definitions and standards
2.1 Definitions
The following list identifies some commonly used terms and defines their specific meaning in the
context of this manual:
Board: A board is an electronic card (PCB) and all its components and connectors. A board is always
assembled and tested.
Unit: A unit is a physical 19-inch rack containing boards and connectors offering distinct functionality
such as amplification, signal processing, services, and teleprotection. A unit includes the rack unit
casing, boards, internal cables, and modules.
System: A system is a rack assembly of units and must include at least one Amplifier (AMP) and one
Processing Unit (PRCS). For increased power up to 80W, an additional amplifier (AMPX) can be added.
Link: A link, sometimes “PLC system” or even just “PLC” refers to a complete configuration of
equipment at both ends of the physical link (the High Voltage Line), including the line itself. Provided
there is little risk of ambiguity, “System” can also be used loosely to cover this wider definition.
Interface: An interface is a connector that is accessible on the exterior of a unit. This connector can be
used for internal needs of the product such as LVDS connectivity or the power supply chain. It can also
be used for customer access, such as for speech or data.
2.2 List of acronyms and abbreviations
Acronyms Meaning
ADPCM Adaptation Digital Pulse Code Modulation
APP Application message
AREC Adaptive Reference Echo Cancellation
DAGC Digital Automatic Gain Control
BITST Bit stream
DTE/DCE Data Terminal/Communication Equipment
CR Carrier Recovery
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
EC Echo Canceller
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSE Fractional Space Equalizer
FSM Finite State Machine
FXO Foreign Exchange Office

Acronyms Meaning
FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber
HF High frequency
HMI Human Machine Interface
ID or IDP Identification Protocol
IDMP Identification protocol Master Protocol
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group B
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telephony
LAN Local Area Network
LAN to LAN IP-based system of connecting devices on separate LANs within a network
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signalling
MOS Mean Opinion Score
MTU Multipurpose Telegraph Unit (Built-in modem)
PEP Peak Envelope Power
PLC Power Line Carrier
PTM Point to Multipoint
PTP Point to Point
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SESR Severely Error Seconds Ratio
SSH Secure Shell
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SR Symbol Recovery
XPRG FPGA Xilinx program
Table 1: Acronyms and abbreviations

2.3 Standards – References
Name Comments
IEC 60495 1993 edition
IEC 60834-1 Edition 2.0 (1999-10)
Cigré report Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000
IEC 60663 Manual for planning of (SSB) PLC systems: Part 1 PLC systems
(1980)
IEC 62488-1 Planning of analogue and digital power line carrier systems
operating over EHV/HV/MV electricity grids (2012)
IEC TS 61000-6-5 Generic standards – immunity for power station and substation
environments
EN60950 Low voltage directive
IEC or EN 61000- Generic standards – Emission standard for industrial environments
6-4
EN 55011 Limits of conducted radio disturbance
EN 55022 Limits of radiated radio disturbance
ITU-T Standard Recommendation from the International
Telecommunication Union
Table 2: Applicable Standards

Gridcom T390
Safety
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Safety
CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 3
2. Health and Safety............................................................................................ 4
3. Symbols and labels on the equipment ............................................................. 5
4. Installing, commissioning and servicing........................................................... 6
5. De-commissioning and disposal ...................................................................... 9
6. Technical specifications for safety ................................................................. 10
6.1 Circuit breaker..................................................................................................................... 10
6.2 Protective class ................................................................................................................... 10
6.3 Installation category ........................................................................................................... 10
6.4 Environment ....................................................................................................................... 10
Gridcom T390 1 Safety

1. Introduction
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe
handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to
typical equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant
equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating
label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed,
commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2. Health and Safety
The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel
and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this
reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
▪ Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
▪ Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering
practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground,
and label it;
▪ Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
▪ Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all
topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office and request the necessary information.

3. Symbols and labels on the equipment
For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the
equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
NOTE: The term EARTH used throughout this technical manual is the direct equivalent
of the North American term GROUND.

4. Installing, commissioning and servicing
Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.
The equipment must be supplied over circuit breaker for the power supply.
Circuit breaker must be switched off.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during lightning storm.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge
(ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate
connection diagram.
Do not touch the high frequency 3 pin terminations or the inner core of the BNC
cable, when the T390 is energized.
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be
opened or disconnected.
Protection Class I Equipment:
▪ Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
▪ The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would
be lost.
▪ When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is flat braid
(section of 550x13x1mm provided with Equipment) unless otherwise stated in
the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise
required by local or country wiring regulations.

The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as
short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary
inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should
be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
▪ Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
▪ Protective fuse rating;
▪ Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
▪ Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the
application.
It is important that this instruction manual is read and fully understood by all
people involved including personnel that has already undergone training and is
otherwise qualified before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance.
Otherwise no warranty will be applied.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank
plugs.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
If the link gets disturbed while using tuning, testing, simulating alarms,
measurement and loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be
taken to prevent the protection signal transmission being used.
Before switching on the circuit breaker check that the equipment/cabinet is
securely connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and
value of the power supply.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At
the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero,
to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.

Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean
water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are
normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. De-commissioning and disposal
De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
RoHS directive
This product is excluded from the scope of EU RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
according to the Article 2, Par 4(c). This product may contain substances listed
in the RoHS directive in concentration exceeding 1000ppm.
Safe handling instructions
No special handling precautions are required unless products are serviced or
recycled. All listed substances if present in articles (components) are firmly
embedded in these articles and will not be released under normal conditions of
use.

6. Technical specifications for safety
Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Circuit breaker

The recommended maximum rating of the circuit breaker for equipments is 6A, high rupture capacity
(HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The circuit breaker should be located as close to the unit
as possible.
6.2 Protective class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth)
connection to ensure user safety.
6.3 Installation category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested
at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 , 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.
6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor
environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will enable it to meet the
requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water
protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
standards.
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005

Gridcom T390
General Presentation
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Presentation
CONTENTS
1. Foreword ........................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Precaution ............................................................................................................................. 5
1.3 System Modularity ................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 Hardware description ............................................................................................................6
1.5 Config table: Functions description ....................................................................................... 7
1.5.1 Mode full analog ............................................................................................................................. 7
1.5.2 Mode full digital with bandwidth ≤ 16kHz ....................................................................................... 8
1.5.3 Mode mixte with bandwidth ≤ 16kHz .............................................................................................. 8
1.5.4 Mode digital with bandwidth > 16kHz............................................................................................. 9
1.5.5 Mode mixte with bandwidth > 16kHz .............................................................................................. 9
1.6 Release Content ....................................................................................................................9
1.6.1 Firmware Packages......................................................................................................................... 9
1.6.2 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) .................................................................................................. 10
1.6.3 Documentation............................................................................................................................. 10
2. Feature list .................................................................................................... 11

2.1 HF Line transmission power and bandwidth occupation ..................................................... 11
2.2 Digital or Mixed mode feature list ....................................................................................... 11
2.3 Analogue mode feature list ................................................................................................. 12
2.4 External Teleprotection support ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Internal Teleprotection support .......................................................................................... 13
2.6 Commissionning Tools........................................................................................................ 13
2.7 Monitoring Features ............................................................................................................ 13
2.8 System security and supervision features ........................................................................... 14
2.9 Feature licence key list ........................................................................................................ 14
3. Transmission medium ................................................................................... 16

3.1 R.F Bandwidth ..................................................................................................................... 16
3.1.1 Bandwidth sharing ........................................................................................................................ 16
3.1.2 Interband ...................................................................................................................................... 16
3.1.3 Hardware filters ............................................................................................................................. 17
3.2 R.F amplifier and Output power .......................................................................................... 17
3.3 Line coupling mode ............................................................................................................. 17
3.4 Connecting mode and RF impedance options ..................................................................... 18
3.5 Correction of transmission medium .................................................................................... 18
3.5.1 R.F load. ........................................................................................................................................ 18
3.5.2 Power distribution ........................................................................................................................ 18
3.5.3 AGC .............................................................................................................................................. 18
3.5.4 Equalization.................................................................................................................................. 18
3.6 Digital transmission ............................................................................................................ 19
3.6.1 Recovering time............................................................................................................................ 19
Gridcom T390 1 General Presentation

3.6.2 Performance according Bandwidth .............................................................................................. 19
3.6.3 Multiplexer ................................................................................................................................... 20
3.6.4 Rates ............................................................................................................................................ 21
4. Digital services .............................................................................................. 22

4.1 Data service specifications .................................................................................................. 22
4.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 V11 service description ................................................................................................................. 22
4.1.3 RS232 data service ........................................................................................................................ 24
4.2 Speech & Signaling service specifications ........................................................................... 25
4.2.1 Speech ......................................................................................................................................... 25
4.2.2 Signaling service .......................................................................................................................... 25
4.2.3 Universal telephone Unit feature .................................................................................................. 26
4.2.4 Maintenance phone handset feature ............................................................................................ 26
4.2.5 Warning on transit mode .............................................................................................................. 26
4.3 LAN to LAN function (optional) ..........................................................................................26
4.4 Configuration and Monitoring via Lan2lan .......................................................................... 27
4.5 Smart Fallback Feature (optional) .......................................................................................28
5. Analogue services ......................................................................................... 29

5.1 Data service (Built-in modem or MTU) ................................................................................29
5.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 29
5.1.2 Point to Multi Point (optional) ...................................................................................................... 29
5.1.3 Transmission delays ...................................................................................................................... 29
5.2 Speech interface (Telephony T0) ........................................................................................ 30
5.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 30
5.2.2 Transmission delays ......................................................................................................................31
5.3 Telegraph interfaces (TG) .................................................................................................... 31
5.3.1 Description ....................................................................................................................................31
5.3.2 Transmission delays ..................................................................................................................... 32
6. External Teleprotection service ..................................................................... 33

6.1 Interfacing........................................................................................................................... 33
6.2 Latency ............................................................................................................................... 33
6.3 Power distribution............................................................................................................... 33
6.4 Safety aspects..................................................................................................................... 34
6.5 Working modes ................................................................................................................... 34
7. Integrated teleprotection functional description........................................... 35

7.1 Forewords ........................................................................................................................... 35
7.2 Transmission options .......................................................................................................... 35
7.2.1 Analogue transmission through T390 ........................................................................................... 36
7.2.2 Digital path ................................................................................................................................... 36
7.2.3 Dual path ...................................................................................................................................... 36
7.3 Analog path : teleprotection command coding methods .................................................... 36
7.3.1 TP In Band ..................................................................................................................................... 36
7.3.2 TP over speech............................................................................................................................... 37

7.3.3 Mixed dual and single tone mode (mode 2+2 and mode 3+1) ......................................................... 37
7.3.4 TP over QAM ................................................................................................................................ 38
7.4 Digital transmission (optional) ............................................................................................ 39
7.4.1 Optical path .................................................................................................................................. 39
7.4.2 G.703.1 and G.703.6 ...................................................................................................................... 42
7.4.3 V.11 ............................................................................................................................................... 42
7.4.4 Factory Codes ............................................................................................................................... 42
8. Integrated Teleprotection functionalities ...................................................... 43

8.1 Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................. 43
8.2 Analog modes .....................................................................................................................44
8.3 Digital modes ...................................................................................................................... 47
8.4 Alarms ................................................................................................................................48
8.5 Maintenance and monitoring ..............................................................................................48
9. System Security and supervision features ..................................................... 50

9.1 Security Pack (optional) ...................................................................................................... 50
9.2 Management using SNMP protocol (optional) .................................................................... 50
9.3 IRIG-B/SNTP (optional) ....................................................................................................... 50
10. Mechanical issues - Design .......................................................................... 51

10.1 Mechanical constraints ...................................................................................................... 51
10.2 Mechanical Size................................................................................................................. 51
10.2.1 Amplifier modules ...................................................................................................................... 51
10.2.2 Processing module ..................................................................................................................... 52
10.2.3 TPI module ................................................................................................................................. 52
10.3 Power supply ..................................................................................................................... 53
10.3.1 Standard voltage ........................................................................................................................ 53
10.3.2 Ground Reference ....................................................................................................................... 53
10.3.3 ON/OFF supply ........................................................................................................................... 53
11. Characteristics............................................................................................. 54
11.1 T390-AMP/AMPX .............................................................................................................. 54
11.2 Processing units ................................................................................................................ 57
11.3 Teleprotection Unit ...........................................................................................................60
11.4 Other General Information ................................................................................................66

1. Foreword
1.1 Overview
The T390 is a Power Line Carrier (PLC) designed to cover the power utilitie’s needs. The equipment is
suitable for conventional analogue transmission & services as well as digital services as noted in the
Cigré PLC report, Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000.
It operates in the frequency range 20 to 700 kHz.
The system can be used for different applications:
▪ Digital transmission up to 327kbit/s
▪ Analogue transmission
▪ Mixed transmission (1 digital channel and 1 analogue channel)
The available services are:
▪ Digital Data transmission across standard interfaces such as V11, V24, etc
▪ Lan to Lan communication using built in Ethernet interfaces
▪ Full featured digital speech services with signalling
▪ Full featured analogue telegraph and speech services with signalling
▪ External Teleprotection support
▪ Internal Teleprotection
This document aims at describing first the hardware of the system, each item and possible
combinations. Then, the common features of firmware are described. Finally, each transmission mode
is detailed separately.
1.2 Precaution
The T390 equipment should be properly installed and configured to make all described features
working, and to reach expected performance.
Installation procedure and rules are given in the Installation user guide.
General configuration of T390 equipment is given in the Commissioning manual, and recommendations
are also given to help users configuring and using properly the T390 equipment in order to reach
optimal performances.
1.3 System Modularity

A T390 system offers comprehensive transmission capabilities over power lines using Power Line
Carrier (PLC) technologies. It allows for voice and data transmission and can integrate a teleprotection
system in order to react to problems in the electrical network.

A T390 PLC Link employs two T390 systems, communicating along the power line, with each system
located on a distribution or transmission substation. The two sites may well be several hundred
kilometers apart.
The two T390 systems are arranged in a master/slave configuration. The combination of equipment
making up each of the two systems must be identical.
T390 units are modular and can be adapted to the customer’s needs in terms of services, such as a mix
of speech and data channels, or data rates. The minimum configuration for a T390 system is one AMP
Unit and one PRCS Unit, but this can be expanded by the addition of a second amplifier (AMPX) and
one Internal Teleprotection (TPI) unit. The TPI can be analogue, ie it uses the HF line as propagation
channel or digital, using specific cable or fiber, or both analogue and digital.
1.4 Hardware description

The T390 hardware is split into 3 units groups:
▪ The medium access (amplifier units)
▪ The processing units
▪ The internal teleprotection units
All units are interoperable and compatible. They are automatically recognized by the HMI upon
connection and configured accordingly.
Code Included
AMP 40 Watts amplifier, 20~700kHz
AMPX Auxiliary amplifier unit to double the output power.
PRCS QAM modulation & TDM 16 channels multiplexer.
Quad RS232, V11 interfaces
IRIG-B for time synchronization
3 full featured speech channels including a maintenance handset input
External Teleprotection and/or analogue 4W service
Dual dry-contact relay for user programmable alarms

Code Included
PRCS- PRCS-B can be used instead of PRCS in case of specific needs in term of phone
B ringing voltage. PRCS-B ringing voltage is between 70VRMS and 90VRMS on high
impedance load, and is higher than 35VRMS on load 820Ω+6.8μF.
All other features are similar to PRCS.
TPI Internal teleprotection with digital and/or analog path
TABLE 1: Available unit list
1.5 Config table: Functions description

The following tables give the maximum number of services, taking into account the available
bandwidth and the desired mode: digital, analog or mixte.
1.5.1 Mode full analog

Total
BW repartition Services
Bandwidth
Speech Speech
Digital Analog Telegraph MTU Data V11 Lan2lan
Digital Analog
2 2 3
3 – number
2.5 2.5 1 4
of speeches
3 – number
4 4 1 4
of speeches
3 – number
5 5 2 4
of speeches
3 – number
8 8 3 4
of speeches

1.5.2 Mode full digital with bandwidth ≤ 16kHz
Total
Bandwidth
Speech Speech
Digital Analog
2.5 2 3 4 YES YES
4 4 3 4 YES YES
8 8 3 4 YES YES
16 16 3 4 YES YES
1.5.3 Mode mixte with bandwidth ≤ 16kHz

Total
Bandwidth
Speech Speech
Digital Analog
3 – number
4 1 2.5 1 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
6.5 4 2.5 1 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
8 4 4 1 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
8 2 5 2 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
12 8 4 1 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
12 4 8 3 4 YES YES
of speeches
3 – number
16 8 8 3 4 YES YES
of speeches

1.5.4 Mode digital with bandwidth > 16kHz
Total
Bandwidth
Speech Speech
Digital Analog
32 32 3 4 YES YES
40 40 3 4 YES YES
48 48 3 4 YES YES
50 50 3 4 YES YES
1.5.5 Mode mixte with bandwidth > 16kHz

Total
Bandwidth
Speech Speech
Digital Analog
3 – number
36 32 4 1 YES YES
of speeches 4
3 – number
40 32 8 3 YES YES
of speeches 4
3 – number
44 40 4 1 YES YES
of speeches 4
1.6 Release Content

The content of a release, provided to customer on a CD is the following: HMI package, Firmware
Package, Documentation.
1.6.1 Firmware Packages

All units are delivered with the latest kernel (T390 operating system), and can be upgraded on-site
using the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
Each unit must be loaded with a dedicated firmware set, properly configured for correct system
operation. Firmware sets consist of the main software for the particular unit, plus specific add-ons
according to the required feature (see the table below for the available add-ons for each unit).

Coherency checks are made by the hardware and firmware at boot time. A second check is made by the
connected HMI during the configuration process.
1.6.2 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI)

The firmware upgrade and the configuration of the T390 system are made through dedicated HMI
software.
In addition this HMI offers several facilities, such as:
▪ Measures retrieval
▪ Maintenance mode
▪ Unconnected mode configuration and/or measures analysis
▪ Advanced logging features
The HMI is available for Microsoft Windows 7 operating systems.
Always use the version of HMI delivered with your firmware package to avoid compatibility issues.
1.6.3 Documentation
Complete Technical Guide and Release Note are provided.

2. Feature list
2.1 HF Line transmission power and bandwidth occupation
Features Description
Transmission power (PEP) 1 to 40W
2 to 80W with AMP/AMPX
Adaptation to line Balanced or unbalanced 50, 75, 125, 150 Ohms
impedance
Ability to operate in a wide 20 to 700kHz, depending on the bandwidth

range of HF frequencies
Occupied bandwidth TX and RX bands can be:
reduction Separated, Adjacent or Superimposed, to reduce bandwidth
occupation
2.2 Digital or Mixed mode feature list

1
Full Digital bands 4, 8 and 16kHz bandwidths available for bit rate until 128kbit/s
Full Highrate bands 32,40,48 and 50kHz bandwidths are available for bitrate until
(optional) 327kbit/s
Highrate bands allows increasing the bitrate
Mixte modes2 A wide range of mixte mode: digital band + analog is available, both
in low-rate (digital until 16kHz) and highrate (digital 32 or 40kHz)
QAM differential encoding QAM4, QAM16, QAM64, QAM256, QAM1024
maps The QAM differential encoding map matches in any situation
Trellis encoding maps TCM 32, TCM 128.
The Trellis encoding map may be chosen to increase BER
performances under some line conditions, with propagation time
degradations.
V11 Support of V11 internal or external clk
Digital speech 3 digital speeches available
RS232 data 4 RS232 ports supporting 200 to 38400 bit/s
1
Some configurations are optional
2
Some configurations are optional

Lan2lan Ethernet interface able to transmit LAN, WAN information from one
(optional) side to the other
Smart Fallback Adapt bitrate to line condition

(optional)
Point to Multi Point Point to Multipoint (PTM) is used when access is required to remote
(optional) and/or local RTU devices.
2.3 Analogue mode feature list

Several analog bandwidths The following analog bandwidths are available : 2kHz, 2.5kHz, 4kHz,
available 8kHz
Band 5kHz is also available in mixte mode, with ana additional 2kHz
digital band.
MTU 4 MTU channel through RS232 asynchronous interfaces
Built-in FSK modem for MTU 200/300/600/1200bps
3 speeches available 300-2000, 300-2200, 300-2400, 300-3400
50 bit/s signaling channel E&M signalling available for every speech channel
for telephony
3 Telegraphs Programmable within 300-3720 bandwidth (see complete table for
details)
Compressor expander and Enable/disable for each access (Telephony or Telegraphy)
limiter
Cable equalizer for each Up to 8 pre-programmed curves
speech access
External Teleprotection Support of external teleptotection, with dedicated access on PRCS
interface unit
Point to Multi Point Point to Multipoint (PTM) is used when access is required to remote
(optional) and/or local RTU devices
2.4 External Teleprotection support

External teleprotection support The Teleprotection uses an analogue channel distinct from
digital channel.
External Silent teleprotection The teleprotection shares the channel with one speech. The
(TPX over speech) guard is sent by the PLC

2.5 Internal Teleprotection support
In band teleprotection The Teleprotection uses an analogue channel distinct from digital
support channel. However, the channel could be shared with analogue
services
Silent teleprotection (TPI The teleprotection shares the channel with one speech. The guard is
over speech) sent by the PLC
TP over QAM The teleprotection shares the channel with QAM.
Set/reset On analog teleprotection, the set/reset option offers the possibility
(Optional) to send permanent commands, without occupying permanently the
band. A short pulse is sent to mean the command start and another
pulse to mean the command end
Digital Teleprotection Teleprotection supports optical, G703-1, G703-6, V11
2.6 Commissionning Tools

Jumper setting User friendly configurator for TXF/RXF board jumper settings,
Configurator accessible from HMI and opening with any web browser installed on
the computer.
AGC initialization feature Special pre-settings for synchronization time improvement of
Amplifier
FSE pre-equalization Special pre-settings for synchronization time improvement of PRCS
in digital mode
2.7 Monitoring Features

On-line & Off-line For hardware & line verifications
maintenance module or commissioning purpose
Dual Full programmable Thresholds and delays are programmable for AGC, SNR, TXPEP,
alarm module with Leds BER).
and dry contact relays Logical matrix table for local and/or remote alarms conditions
Safety presence Safety presence check and lock condition for TPX

Advanced real time Internal measures like AGC, SNR, BER are monitored and displayed
measures in HMI
System diagnosis System diagnosis module & training progress status
Spectrum analyzer Full featured spectrum analyser on RX bandwidth
Events recording Default events queue (non-volatile events)
Data recorder with Data Recorder of Amp and PRCS values, up to 5 tracks of 5000
advanced triggering points each
modes
QAM/Trellis map display Up to 100ms constellation refreshing (digital mode)
module
Data Collection Collection of data of the system for assistance
2.8 System security and supervision features

Security Pack Security Pack provides :
(optional) A secure authentication by means of a RADIUS server or PLC
authentication
A secure communication using a SSH protocol
SNMP (optional) SNMP agent, allowing monitoring of alarms and measurement
IRIGB – SNTP IRIG-B input interface allows synchronization of the PRCS unit real
(optional) time clock with an external time generator device, such as a GPS
clock device
2.9 Feature licence key list

Keys Features
KEY-ANALOG- 2 or 4kHz Analogue mode Bandwidth Analogue
4KHZ
KEY-ANALOG- 2.5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
2.5KHZ
KEY-ANALOG- 5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
5KHZ
KEY-ANALOG- 8kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
8KHZ
KEY-SNMP SNMP supervision module ALL

KEY-SecurityPack Security pack module (SSH encryption, PLC ALL
Authentication, RADIUS Authentication)
KEY-SET/RESET SET/RESET command Type ALL
KEY-16KHZ-QAM QAM/TCM on 16 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-1KHZ-QAM QAM/TCM 1 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY- Wide band QAM/TCM on 32 to 50 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-FAX FAX G3 relay for compressed speech channel Digital
KEY-ADPCM ADPCM 16/24/32/40 (not available anymore) Digital
KEY-IMPOSED Superimposed mode Digital
PTM Point to Multipoint function All
KEY-Fallback Enable the Fallback mode Digital
KEY-L2L Allow LAN to LAN communication on a PLC link Digital
KEY-IRIGB IRIG-B synchronization ALL

3. Transmission medium
3.1 R.F Bandwidth
3.1.1 Bandwidth sharing
The PLC bandwidth is in relation with the number and the type of user services.
In order to satisfy the various situations and to increase our ability for adapting to various line
properties the product will provide adaptation with respect to the HV lines, by offering several
optimized pairings.
The system can share the available bandwidth as follows:
▪ Superimposed mode
In this mode the RX & TX channels share the same bandwidth. Note that this mode is available
only for digital band.
▪ Separated band mode
In this mode, RX and TX channels are separated by at least an empty channel of the same
bandwidth with a minimum of 8 kHz (e.g. for 16kHz channels, a 16kHz interband is required
between RX&TX).
▪ Adjacent mode
In this mode, TX&TX should be put side by side without any interband, and the TX filter of each
transmitter should be programmed to cover the complete RX+TX channels.
The RX/TX complete channel is then used in various combination:

▪ Whole bandwidth is assigned to full digital transmission (QAM modulation)
▪ Whole bandwidth is assigned to analogue transmission (mono or dual channel)
▪ Whole bandwidth is assigned to mixed digital and analogue (1 slot for QAM, 1 or 2 slots for
analogue)
From the user side, a choice is made during the configuration (commissioning) by the use of pre-
selected configurations.
3.1.2 Interband
The system must respect a minimal interband space in order to work correctly.
Between two PLC system in parallel (using the same couplig box)
The PLC was design in order to fit with IEC60495 requirements. Nevertheless, for narrow bandwidth
when central frequency is above 400 kHz, there can be some restrictions: limitation on output power or
bandwidth increasing.
Between TX and RX transmission

When inter-band is greater than the bandwidth, we are in separated mode, when the interband is null,
we are in adjacent mode. Other combinations are forbidden.
Caution: In order to ensure the best performances of the equipment, we recommend using a
minimum spacing of 8 Khz and above 8 Khz of at least 1 band when using the separate mode.
Note: For adjacent mode, refer to commissioning recommendation.
3.1.3 Hardware filters

The TX hardware filters aims at inserting the PLC in an assigned frequency slot without disturbing the
others equipment on the line. Its function is more the line matching than filtering the TX signal that is
already properly shaped by the digital processing. For adjacent modes, we recommend configuring the
TX filter bandwidth to cover both TX&RX bandwidth.
The RX filter aims at filtering the suited bandwidth in order not to saturate the receiver. The following
filters are configurable:
Filters 4 kHz 5kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz 32 kHz 40kHz 48kHz 50kHz
TX Side x x x x x x x x
RX Side x x x x x x x x
3.2 R.F amplifier and Output power

The system is able to provide user RF power from 1 W to 40 W. on the entire frequency band.
As a matter of fact, the amplifier module itself is able to deliver more power at the input of the TX filter
to compensate the loss of the TX filter, hybrid transformer and impedance matching transformer.
The RF output power can easily be changed on site, through the HMI.
Note: By adding an AMPX amplifier, it is possible to double the output power. Resulting power
depends on TX filter insertion loss, frequency and RF Bandwidth.
3.3 Line coupling mode

The PLC uses the coupling system defined in IEC 60481 and IEC 60663 standards.
When a digital modulation is to be be used with T390, we strongly recommend the use of LMU Line
Matching unit in balanced mode.
The system is able of supporting several equipments connected in parallel without any deterioration.

3.4 Connecting mode and RF impedance options
Balanced or unbalanced connection is done through a shielded heavy duty sub-D connector (Phoenix
contact model).
The system provides the following RF impedance options:

150 ohms, balanced or unbalanced
3.5 Correction of transmission medium

3.5.1 R.F load.
The PLC is able to withstand wide R.F impedance variation and is protected against extreme R.F line
conditions: R.F output “Open” and “Short-circuit”.
3.5.2 Power distribution

The PLC is able to share the Output R.F. power flexibly over the signals for the QAM, analogue &
TPI/TPX services and then provide the optimized SNR
The power distribution is adjusted through:
FSK level
Manual channel allocation
TPI/TPX guard signal or average analogue power
Each analogue service Phone, TG, MTU
3.5.3 AGC
This function, as specified in IEC standard 495, regulates the level of effective signals recovered within a
dynamic range of:
72 dB for T390-AMP
A turbo mode is automatically enabled when no Teleprotection is configured, allowing to speed up the
AGC conversion algorithm.
When external Teleprotection is enabled in the system, the AGC slew rate is limited to 0.5dB/s to not
conflict with external Teleprotection internal algorithms.
The initialization value of the AGC could be overridden by the user through the HMI.
3.5.4 Equalization
The imperfections in the transmission channel response (amplitude distortion and group delay
distortion) are corrected by mean of an “Equalizer” system. Two kinds of equalizer exist in the system
depending on the transmission mode used.

Digital mode equalizer
The digital mode equalizer is an auto-adapted filter, also called FSE (fractional space equalizer) that
works continuously in order to compensate automatically the phase rotation, small line attenuation
changes and distortions.
Caution : The equalizer starts automatically, without user intervention. However “pre-equalization”
is MANDATORY, in order to force the start conditions of the algorithm.
Analogue mode equalizer

The analogue mode equalizer is able to compensate the line attenuation within the speech and
telegraph band. Each analogue channel has it own line equalizer (available only for speech and
telegraph as said before). The equalizer is programmable through the HMI, with 2 methods: automatic
adjustment or manual setting.
The external teleprotection is not affected by this equalization. The equalized signals are only speeches
and telegraphs.
3.6 Digital transmission

3.6.1 Recovering time
The system is particularly strengthened to reduce recovery time in case of High noise levels on the
transmission medium.
For instance, a line drop of few seconds (line breaks or large attenuation change) is recovered in less
than 10s in separated mode. This feature is deeply used with teleprotection in order to transmit the
commands without QAM loss of synchronization.
3.6.2 Performance according Bandwidth

Measurement Method
Programmable Hybrid PLC B

PLC A
line attenuator transformer
Noise
Generator
+
Ampli
RMS Multimeter
The SNR is measured by external means, that is to say calibrated instruments connected directly to the
line. The SNR measured within the PLC uses a different approach and is intended to be used only for
information purpose and fallback condition switching.
The SNR is computed as follow: the signal is assumed to be the QAM within the band measured, the
noise is assumed to be the same band when QAM is switched off. In this figure, no band translation is

required, and the SNR is the simple ratio of Psignal / Pnoise, whatever the bandwidth chosen for the
measure (we used the bandwidth offered by the instrument, i.e. 3.74kHz)
The BER is measured by a data tester (PFA30) connected to the V11 interface of PRCS-e unit. Time for
measurement of BER is taken in order to have a number of received bits 10 times the inverse of BER
(e.g: a BER of 1E-8 is measured with more than 1E9 bits)
Results (16 KHz / Separated mode)
14,00 19,00 24,00 29,00 34,00

1,00E+00
BER-QAM4
1,00E-01 BER-
QAM16
1,00E-02 BER-
QAM64
BER-
1,00E-03
QAM256
BER-
1,00E-04 TCM32
1,00E-05
1,00E-06
1,00E-07
1,00E-08
1,00E-09
1,00E-10
Figure 1: QAM vs SNR curves

SNR measurement method within HMI
The signal is assumed to be the RX FSK signal (70Hz band), means that for all configurations, the
measure is always the same. The Noise is assumed to be the mirrored 70Hz besides the QAM channel.
For superimposed band mode, the noise is measured outside the band, assuming that an interband of 8
kHz is left besides the channel.
3.6.3 Multiplexer
The processing firmware has in standard a built-in 15 channels, fully programmable multiplexer, called
TDM.
The multiplexer offers following features:
Minimal slot width: 200 bits/s
Maximal slot width: max digital bandwidth (e.g 324 bits/s for QAM256 on 50kHz band)
Up to 15 channels with automatic stuffing for rate regulation
Automatic or manual channel assignment

3.6.4 Rates
The achievable gross and user bitrates are given in the table hereafter.
Note that some constellations are not available in highrate modes: TCM are available up to 16 kHz
included, QAM1024 is available up to 40kHz included.
QAM256 and QAM1024 both require good line condition (see SNR vs BER figure) and proper
configuration and settings (Cross talk between TX/RX filter and hybrid balancing).
Bandwidth (kHz)
1 2 4 8 16 32 40 48 50
GR (kbit/s) 1,60 3,20 6,40 12,80 25,60 51,20 64,00 80,00 81,92
QAM4
UR (kbit/s) 1,24 2,49 4,88 9,43 21,94 47,72 60,67 76,67 78,58
GR (kbit/s) 3,20 6,40 12,80 25,60 51,20 102,40 128,00 160,00 163,84
QAM16
UR (kbit/s) 2,49 4,88 9,43 21,94 47,72 99,02 124,62 156,67 160,50
GR (kbit/s) 3,20 6,40 12,80 25,60 51,20
TCM32
UR (kbit/s) 2,49 4,88 9,43 21,94 47,72
GR (kbit/s) 4,80 9,60 19,20 38,40 76,80 153,60 192,00 240,00 245,76
QAM64
UR (kbit/s) 3,30 8,00 15,83 35,06 73,26 150,26 188,67 236,67 242,43
GR (kbit/s) 4,80 9,60 19,20 38,40 76,80
TCM128
UR (kbit/s) 3,30 8,00 15,83 35,06 73,26
GR (kbit/s) 6,40 12,80 25,60 51,20 102,40 204,80 256,00 320,00 327,68
QAM256
UR (kbit/s) 4,88 9,43 21,94 47,72 99,02 201,46 252,67 316,67 324,35
GR (kbit/s) 8,00 16,00 32,00 64,00 128,00 256,00 320,00
QAM1024
UR (kbit/s) 6,46 12,67 28,67 60,67 124,62 252,67 316,67
Table 2: Gross and User Rates

4. Digital services
4.1 Data service specifications
4.1.1 Overview
2 types of data services are available on PLC systems:
▪ V11 interface up to max available user rate (e.g. 73.5kbit/s for QAM64)
▪ RS232 Sub-D9 interface (limited by max user rate) for asynchronous mode only
RS232 data offers rate from 200 bps to 38400 bps, with 1 start, 1 or 2 stop and 1 to 9 data bits without
parity or to 8 bit with parity.
PLC is always in DCE mode.
Point to multipoint function (double interface on one channel) is also provided and suits for RTU polling
application.
4.1.2 V11 service description

4.1.2.1 V11 internal clock mode scheme (synchronous mode)
Substation A Substation B
Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE
Tx Clock PLC PLC Link
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
Rx Clock GEN Rx Clock
RECOVER
DCE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data
MASTER SLAVE
DTE A DTE B

4.1.2.2 V11 from device clock ‘on master’ mode (synchronous mode)
Tx Data Tx Data
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
RECOVER
DTE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data
MASTER SLAVE
DCE A DTE B
4.1.2.3 V11 from device clock ‘on slave’ mode (synchronous mode)
Tx Data Tx Data
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
RECOVER
DTE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data
SLAVE MASTER
DCE A DTE B
4.1.2.4 V11 propagation delay

From V11 interface to V11 interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and measure equipment
internal delays
76,8 kb/s 6.4 kb/s Max
Rate 16k/QAM64 4k/QAM4
(Typical) (Typical)
72 Kbit/s ~30 ms N/A 35 ms

(3Kb/s) 50 ms
4 Kbit/s ~43 ms
~44 ms
2 Kbit/s ~55 ms 45 ms 60 ms
TABLE 3: V11 propagation delays
4.1.3 RS232 data service

4.1.3.1 Characteristics
Same characteristics as V24/28 interface except the following features:
Only asynchronous mode supported
The PLC is always DCE.
4.1.3.2 Point to Multipoint (optional)

A Point to Multipoint option is provided to connect a single device to multiple ones without increasing
the used band. It is it particularly useful to connect a SCADA to several RTU located in different
substations in pooling mode (Master Slave protocol).
RTU1
PLCs + HF Lines SCADA
RTU2
RTU3
Figure 2 Point to Multipoint
4.1.3.3 Transmission delays

The following table lists the typical latency for each speed available for RS232 data.
Rate Latency
200 bit/s 39 ms
300 bit/s 30 ms
600 bit/s 28 ms
1200 bit/s 28 ms
2400 bit/s 24 ms
4800 bit/s 19 ms

9600 bit/s 19 ms
14400 bit/s 19 ms
19200 bit/s 17 ms
28800 bit/s 16 ms
38400 bit/s 16 ms
Table 4: RS232 propagation delays
4.2 Speech & Signaling service specifications

4.2.1 Speech
4.2.1.1 Level adjustment
The speech level setting (Tx & Rx) is made through HMI. The speech input level range is -30 dBm to
7dBm. The speech output level is -30 dBm to 7dBm.
4.2.1.2 Echo canceller

A voice echo canceller could be enabled by HMI to recover the echo generated by digital transmission
of compressed channels.
4.2.1.3 Voice coding

Five Vocoders are provided to compress the speech channels:
Vocoder2400, Vocoder4800, Vocoder6400, Vocoder8000, Vocoder9600. Their compression rate is
respectively 2400 bit/s, 4800 bits bit/s, 6400 bits bit/s, 8000 bits bit/s, 9600 bit/s.
Occupation in TDM is higher due to the transmission of signaling and possible single tones or dual-tone
multi-frequency (DTMF).
4.2.1.4 Call Progress

Ring back tone frequencies are 440Hz and 480 Hz.
Busy tone frequencies are 480Hz and 620Hz.
4.2.1.5 Interfacing
The interface is a Basic 4W with the possibility to switch in a 2W mode by HMI during commissioning.
4.2.2 Signaling service

This service is directly associated with the speech service. It provides transmission and reception of the
busy state of the speech channel (hence the term signaling) and if necessary transmission of dial pulses.

4.2.2.1 Type of signaling
Pulse signalling on E&M interface
DTMF signalling
4.2.2.2 Interfacing
The command interfaces usually called E & M (M wire for input, E wire for output), is referenced to
voltages that are taken from the "ref" connector of the service unit
Input closed to REFIN voltage
Output open in idle state, closed to REFOUT when active
Current flows from REFOUT to REFIN (usually, REFIN is -48V, REFOUT is Ground)
4.2.3 Universal telephone Unit feature

This device acts as a direct call telephone-terminating unit.
It carries out the call criteria conversion (off-hook/on-hook, dialling, current generation, ringing
generator) through the signalling circuit.
The unit is programmed to operate as follows:
Direct Phone to Phone Mode (with Central Battery (CB) supply).
Line Extension FXS mode (Connection to a telephone set).
Line extension FXO mode (Connection to a PABX) available on the Speech channel 2 and 3 only.
4.2.4 Maintenance phone handset feature

The first speech channel on each unit can act as a maintenance phone if enabled by HMI. The
maintenance handset is automatically detected by the hardware when unhooked, and in this case the
speech 1 main connector (and related channel) is disabled.
4.2.5 Warning on transit mode

For sufficient quality of the speech signals, not more than 2 compressed telephony links should be
connected in transit.
4.3 LAN to LAN function (optional)

The T390 is equipped with an Ethernet interface able to transmit LAN, WAN information from one side
to the other.
This feature implements a L2 bridge at network level (full transparent bridging) with advanced
capabilities, compliant with 802.1q for VLAN transport (without QoS).

HV power line medium
IP Traffic
Company network • Configuration
• Routing
• Synchronization
• Application
• Etc.
Voice
Power Line Power Line
Carrier Carrier
Data
Figure 3 - Lan2Lan Feature
WARNING: A router needs to be installed on the front of the T390 to limit the quantity of information
going through the PLC link.
4.4 Configuration and Monitoring via Lan2lan

The settings mechanism of the T390 uses the TC/IP protocol. Each PLC of a network is identified thanks
a unique IP address.
It is possible to address each PLC through the T390 HMI. Each PLC of a link is seen through its own
address and the HV link is considered as a part of the LAN network, as illustrated in the figure bellow:
Figure 4: Remote configuration
The Lan-to-Lan feature offers the possibility to monitor remote PLC:

Remote alarms and events retrieving
Remote measures (BER, spectrum analyzer, …)
The LAN-to-LAN feature offers also the possibility to configure services of remote PLC, using the
maintenance Lan2lan mode.

The maintenance Lan2lan mode allows switching temporarily the full digital bandwidth to the LAN
service, by cutting all other digital services. It is particularly useful during commissioning and
maintenance.
The maintenance lan2lan mode can be available even when no lan2lan is used in normal service mode,
by enabling the interface lan2lan without enabling the service.
Note : When used to monitor remote PLC, we recommend allocating at least 10kbits/s to the
Lan2Lan Service.
4.5 Smart Fallback Feature (optional)

The Fallback is an optional T390 feature, which allows switching to another encoder with lower rate
when line conditions are degraded. The PLC automatically choose the best encoder according to
Quality of Service (maximum guaranteed BER) required by user and automatically return to normal
encoder when line conditions are good enough.
A special feature is provided for the V11 & LAN2LAN interface, where it is possible to make it run at
different speed instead of enabling/disabling the services like other ones.

5. Analogue services
5.1 Data service (Built-in modem or MTU)
5.1.1 Description
Up to 3 built-in modems by channel provides the user with the following services:
Asynchronous mode from 200 bps to 1200 bps
1 start /1 or 2 stop / 5 to 9 data bits (inc parity)
The interface is Data I/O type – V24/V28 sub-D 25 points connector
The modulation is FSK (frequency shift key modulation)
This is the solution for low rate (200 bps to 1200 bps). It offers the simple solution for polling modem
network.
The number of MTU by channel should be only limited by the available bandwidth.
5.1.2 Point to Multi Point (optional)

A Point to Multipoint option is provided to connect a single device to multiple ones without increasing
the used band. It is it particularly useful to connect a SCADA to several RTU located in different
substations in pooling mode (Master Slave protocol).
RTU1
RTU2
RTU3
Figure 5 Point to Multipoint
5.1.3 Transmission delays

The following table give the typical and maximal measured for MTU in a 4hz analogue band.

Latency Latency
Rate
(typical) (Max)
1.2Kbit/s 23 ms 25 ms
600bit/s 24 ms 26 ms
TABLE 5: RS232 propagation delays
5.2 Speech interface (Telephony T0)

5.2.1 Description
The telephony uses a 600Ω 2W/4W interface with automatic changeover, BF analogue bandwidth with
programmable standard filters as depicted below:
Frequemcy(H 30 20 22 24 34 36 37
z) limit = 300 Hz
Low 0 00 00 00 00 00 20
Full Band
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Figure 6: Telephony band allocation
The 300-3400 is available for 4kHz bandwidth only. The signaling is not included in this picture and uses
an additional 120Hz bandwidth.
Levels adjustments are the same as for the digital speech channel (-30dBm to +7dBm).
The telephony supports the following features: Compressor-expander (IUT-T G162), limiter, cable
equalizer, power distribution, signalling
This signalling uses an IUT-T R35 50 baud channel (F0  30 Hz) placed immediately after the upper
telephone channel band edge.
Its position in the spectrum is linked both to the selected telephone band and the requirement to
optimize the remaining spectrum.
The E&M distortion is less than 3ms, the E&M latency is less than 20 ms.
The maintenance handset is shared with this service with an automatic detection.

The latency is computed with a frequency of 1 KHz and is equal to 13 ms +/- 3 ms for the full band, the
band 1, the band 2, the band 3 mode.
5.3 Telegraph interfaces (TG)

5.3.1 Description
The telegraph uses a 600 4W interface, BF analogue bandwidth with programmable filters. As for the
Telephony, the TG supports also the following features: Compander, limiter, cable equalizer, power
distribution.
The available filters are divided in two categories.
Standard filters:
36 48 60 72 84 96 10 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 36 37
Frequency (Hz) 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20
0 0 0 0 0 0
Low limit = 300
Full Band
Band 1
Share with
phone
Band 2
Band 3
1200 BDS
Transit
600 BDS 601 602 603
ITU-T R38 A 401 402 403 404 405 406
ITU-T R38 B 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
Figure 7: Telegraph standard band allocation
Custom filters:
In order to cover multiple situations, it is possible to use custom filters with the followings
specifications:
Starting point 360 Hz
End 3800 Hz
60 Hz steps
In this mode, the configurations allow to choose the input and output center frequencies of the
telegraph, as well as the inband transmission one.

Latency Latency
Mode
(Typical) (Max)
Full Band 8.7 ms 15 ms
Bandwidth 1500Hz 10.5 ms 15 ms
TABLE 6: Telegraph propagation delays (Analog mode)
Note: With signaling or a modem, the transmission time increase is about 1.5ms.

6. External Teleprotection service
This service allows the use of an external Teleprotection equipment.
6.1 Interfacing
4W, 600Ω standard BF analogue bandwidth.
A Blocking control circuit (On/Off command) with 2 commands inputs.
In accordance with IEC 60495, the blocking command given by the Teleprotection system is a loop.
The blocking control circuit enables, when activated by the Teleprotection equipment:
Interruption (transmission and reception) of all user services signals. The external Teleprotection
service is considered with no extra bandwidth in idle state
Boosting of the R.F. transmission signals (from the external Teleprotection equipment). This boost
is programmable (0, +6dB, or +12dB).
A safety presence input (Alive): If enabled by HMI, could generate an alarm when connector is
unplugged
6.2 Latency
Latency from TP interface to TP equipment includes transmission delays (100m line) and algorithm
internal delays.
The given latency are measured on the entire channel (i.e. 300-3800Hz for the 4 kHz bandwidth), but
keep in mind that the latency is not flat due to the filter response. For instance, we have a typical 2.5ms
latency within 500-3500Hz versus 4ms/8ms on the entire channel.
6.3 Power distribution

This input may be used for external Teleprotection connection or multi-purpose analog channel (e.g.
telegraph).
In both case, we distinguish 3 operating modes:
Complete silent mode
Guard only
Normal channel
In complete silent mode, no power is assigned to the channel, this mode is used for external
Teleprotection sharing the telephone signalling FSK for the guard detection.
In guard only mode, only the power of the guard tone provided by the external Teleprotection is
considered by the PLC and assigned to this channel.
For complete silent mode and Guard only, we assume that all PLC power will be assigned to this
channel on BLE assertion (QAM will be cut off).
In normal channel mode (multi-purpose analog input), the BLE signal is not more considered, and
requested power (st by HMI) is continuously assigned to this channel.

The power allocated for the guard signal of external Teleprotection & the power for the analog channel
are programmable through HMI.
See the service manuals or dedicated application note for details.
6.4 Safety aspects

For safety reasons, it is recommended to connect the user programmable Alarm1 to the external safety
input of the Teleprotection and program the PLC alarm1 as ‘TPX error’. In this figure, the Teleprotection
will be locked when PLC is out of service, for instance during booting process or abnormal cases. See
user manual T390_EN_Commissionning, section DIP connection to PLC for more details.
Moreover, the T390 offers a safety presence input to monitor the state of Teleprotection equipment.
This alarm is visible remotely and can be supervised by the SNMP agent.
The T390 firmware offers also 2 additional programmable alarms:
Active flag: ON when Teleprotection is sending a command
TP command too long: ON when duration of TP activation is more than 2s
6.5 Working modes

Two working modes are available for the Teleprotection:
Internal guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection provides its own guard signal.
External guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection uses the preconfigured signalling signal as guard.

7. Integrated teleprotection functional
description
7.1 Forewords
This chapter describes the TPI teleprotection unit for the T390.
The TPI module offers the unique advantage on the market to be an integrated teleprotection module,
with dual path communication feature (optional).
Teleprotection is used by power companies to protect their distribution medium: it is designed to

transfer protection commands coming usually from distance protection relay contacts to a remote
location through a point-to-point communication.
In short, a “protected section”, or “protected zone”, is a high voltage line between two substations, with
a circuit-breaker at each end. Teleprotection equipment monitors and constantly assesses the line for
problems and, when necessary, “trips” the circuit-breakers to isolate the high voltage line. Tripping of a
protected section can be initiated (or in some cases prevented) by the teleprotection at either end. The
signals that must be exchanged during this process, and their integrity and security, are the concern of
the TPI.
As a standard integrated teleprotection all functionalities can be adressed through the T390 HMI either
connected locally or remotely through a TCP /Ip network or even thanks to the SNMP V2 compatibility
accessible through an SNMP compatible network management software.
7.2 Transmission options

The TPI supports optical or electrical signalling solutions, as described below, in addition to the PLC
link, as an option.
TPI TPI
D 0652ENb
Figure 8: Overview of transmission options

7.2.1 Analogue transmission through T390
The analogue transmission option uses PLC technology to signal over the high voltage lines. For this
transmission method, the path between the two TPI units includes the LVDS (low-voltage differential
signalling) connection, which interconnects all units in a T390 system.
7.2.2 Digital path

The digital communication channel can be depending on customer choice among this different
possibilities:
Digital electrical interfaces
V11 / X21
G703 1 and 6
Optical Interfaces
C37.94
Single mode bifiber 1310 nm and 1550 nm
Single mode single fiber 1550 nm
7.2.3 Dual path

If a digital path is available, there is a possibility to increase dramatically the command dependability by
applying a combination on the command reception.
7.3 Analog path : teleprotection command coding methods

There are four coding options available with the TPI, allowing TP commands to be transmitted in the
absence of any other signals, or else occupying a part of the bandwidth used by speech or QAM
signalling, or both. In the latter two cases, in the event of a TP command transmission, the speech or
QAM signal is interrupted, and replaced by the TP command being transmitted. The user has control
over which signals are cut during command transmission. For example on a system transmitting Speech
along with TP over QAM, the user can choose to cut only QAM during command transmission, but has
also the option to cut both QAM and Speech, to maximise the power available to the TP.
7.3.1 TP In Band
The guard signal is transmitted, except when there is a command to be sent.

TPI
Analog channel
Pilot
Figure 9: TP In band
TPI inactive TPI active

FSK + guard (F8) FSK + 2 tones (command)
7.3.2 TP over speech
TPI
Speech band
Signaling Pilot
Figure 10: TP over speech
In the absence of any commands, the system transmits the signalling signal plus the user-defined
speech band. When a command is present, the speech signal is replaced by the TP dual frequencies.
FSK + signalling + speech FSK + 2 tones (command)
7.3.3 Mixed dual and single tone mode (mode 2+2 and mode 3+1)
The mixed mode works only if a speech is configured on the PLC. The command bandwidth is the
bandwidth of this speech. The guard is either the signalling of this speech, or, if no signalling has been
configured, a tone generated by the TPI whose frequency is chosen in a list by the user.
In the absence of any commands, the system transmits the guard tone plus the speech band. When a
command is present, the speech signal is replaced by either TP dual frequencies, or a TP single
frequency.

FSK + guard tone + speech FSK + 1 or 2 tone(s)
7.3.4 TP over QAM

In TP over QAM, the teleprotection signal space shares a part of the QAM bandwidth. The whole QAM
signal is suppressed in favour of TP commands that are to be transmitted.
Note: this configuration is only available in bands described in the table hereafter
Mode TPI inactive TPI active

Mode 1 (4kHz, 8kHz separate) FSK + QAM FSK + 2 tones (command)
Mode 2 (8kHz superimposed,
16kHz superimposed, and all bands
over 16kHz, separate and
superimposed) FSK + QAM + Guard FSK + 2 tones (command)
TPI Pilot
QAM
Tx Band
4 or 8 or 16 kHz
D0653ENa
Figure 11: TP over QAM, mode 1
D0669ENa
Figure 12 TP over QAM, Mode 2, case superimposed

7.4 Digital transmission (optional)
There are four available options for digital transmission:
7.4.1 Optical path

An optical interface for use between teleprotection and digital multiplexer equipment/or in direct that
can operate at a data rate of N times 64 kilobit per second (where N = 1, 2, 4).
This interface uses the frame structure defined in the IEEE C37.94 standard.
For testing purposes, the two TPI units can be connected back to back.
The different modes are available (separated SFP modules):
Single mode 1550nm long haul
1310nm short haul
1310/1550nm and 1510/1590 bidirectional
interface
Multimode 850 nm for C3794 compatible application
One type of multimode SFP is covered

Interface type Multimode fiber
Wavelength (nm) 830 to 860
Fiber type 62.5/125μm or 50/125μm
Average output power (dBm) -7 to -2
Sensibility (dBm) -16
Connector type LC
Theoretical max distance (km) 1
Table 7: Multimode SFP
Two types of single mode SFP are covered:

Unidirectional: One fiber is used for each direction. This is the standard type of SFP used in Power
Utility telecom network.
There are four ranges of unidirectional SFP depending on the distance covered:
Sx.x for Short Haul
Lx.x for Long Haul
Vx.x for Very Long Haul
Ux.x for Ultra Long Haul

Figure 13: Unidirectional SFP
Item Specification
Nominal Bit rate 155520 kbit/s / STM1
Line code NRZ
Optical interface type S1.1 L1.2e U1.2e
Working wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580
Fiber Type SM SM SM
Mean Launched optical power (dBm) -14 to -8 -3 to +2 +5 to +8
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -45
Max Input Power(dBm) -8 -8 -10
Connector Duplex LC Duplex LC Duplex LC
Max Distance (km) 30 100 240
Maximum Allowed Dispersion (ps/nm) NA NA 4800
TABLE 8: Single mode unidirectional SFP
Bidirectional: One fiber is used for both directions. Each direction is covered by one λ. This kind of
SFP is proposed to make fiber savings.
By combining the transmit and receive functions onto a single fiber without an external splitter or
combiner, single fiber bidirectional Small Form-Factor Pluggables (SFPs) provide a simple way to
deliver optical transmission by cutting fiber cabling needs in half.

Figure 14: Bidirectional SFP
Item Specification
Nominal Bit
rate 1-Fiber Bi-Directional 155520 kbit/s / STM1
Line code NRZ
Optical BIDI BIDI BIDI BIDI BIDI BIDI

interface type 180-1 180-2 1120-1 1120-2 1200-1 1200-2
Tx/Rx (nm) 1310/1550 1550/1310 1510/1590 1590/1510 1510/1590 1590/1510
Fiber Type SM SM SM SM SM SM
Mean
Launched
optical
power (dBm) -2 to 3 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 1 to 5 1 to 5
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm) -34 -34 -34 -34 -45 -45
Max Input
Power(dBm) -8 -8 -8 -8 -10 -10
Connector LC LC LC LC LC LC
Max Distance
(km) 80 80 120 120 200 200
Maximum
Allowed
Dispersion
(ps/nm) NA NA NA NA NA NA
TABLE 9: Single mode bidirectional SFP

7.4.2 G.703.1 and G.703.6
G.703 is an ITU/T standard originally for transmitting voice over digital carriers (such as T1 and E1).
Modern networks are working with voice and data and so is G.703.
G.703 provides specifications for pulse code modulation (PCM) at data rates from 64 Kbps (G.703.1) up
to 2.048 Mbps (G.703.6).
7.4.3 V.11
V.11 is an ITU-T recommendation for balanced electrical circuits for data communication. Speed is
selectable 32, 64, 128 or 256 kbps.
Note V11 and G703 digital communication are compatible with DIP equipped with such interface.
7.4.4 Factory Codes

The factory codes are given in the Table 10.
Board Factory code

V11/X24 Interface (ISO 4903) IR 179
G703.6 Interface 2Mbit/s IR 173
G703.1 Interface codirectional IR 180
Table 10: Factory codes

8. Integrated Teleprotection functionalities
In this chapter we describe as exhaustively as possible features of the TPI.
8.1 Inputs and Outputs

Feature Description
Protection schemes Four protection schemes are available for the best transfer
time/dependability/security compromise
▪ Type 1 (Blocking Mode)
▪ Type 2 (Permissive mode)
▪ Type 3 (Fast Direct Tripping Mode)
▪ Type 4 (Slow Direct Tripping mode)
Inputs
Inputs characteristics 8 opto-insulated inputs are available (4 for Light version).
4 input ranges are selectable by jumpers:
▪ 24V
▪ 48/60V
▪ 110/130V
▪ 220V
These inputs can be freely allocated by HMI to
▪ Command 1 to 8
▪ ”Start” input (dual tone mode only)
Operator An operator between inputs is available to drive the commands
Available operators are OR, AND and XOR
The input can be active if ON (normal mode) or OFF (inverted mode)
Start (dual tone mode It is possible to lock the command reception if a particular input is active.
only) This function must be combined to the “AND” operator of the Output
combination
Filtering A filter can be set to avoid bad operation on glitches on input (like
capacitive coupling)
The recommended value is minimum 1ms.
Holding Delay The holding delay is a function on command transmission to extend the
command duration in order to be sure it will be received correctly on the
receiver side.
Validation delay (dual A delay is configurable by HMI to trig the holding delay. This can be used
tone mode only) as soft filtering for analog mode only.

Outputs
Output characteristics 14 heavy duty outputs are available
They can combine Solid State Relay and electromechanical relays in order
to increase the making and breaking capacity while keeping a high
capacity permanent current.
The Solid State Relay can be bypassed but the global transmission time
will be increased by 7ms.
The output relays can be used to drive the position of
▪ Output commands
▪ Input commands
▪ Unblocking
▪ User Alarm 1 and 2
▪ Minor alarm/Major Alarm
State on alarm The state of the relay on alarm can be

▪ Idle : the relay is released when the alarm triggers
▪ Set: the relay is set when the alarm triggers
▪ Transparent: alarm does not affect the output relay
▪ Memory: keep the last state without alarm
In the case mixed tone mode, only the MAJOR alarms can trig the relays.
In the case dual tone mode, both MAJOR alarms and UNBLOCKING can
trig the relays.
Operator An operator between outputs is available to drive the relays.
Available operators are OR and AND
Holding Delay It is the minimum duration of relay closing in case of command reception.
Validation delay (dual It is defined as an optional delay for command detection.
tone mode only) This function is used to reinforce security on command reception.
The TPI offers the possibility to use dual path (digital and analog) in order to increase the transmission
dependability.
In that case, the commands are always transmitted on the both path. The device takes decision for
output commands on reception.
The number of commands must match on both paths.
8.2 Analog modes

Feature Description
Command Number The nominal command number is independent 4 commands per TPI
and per band

Coding mode Three modes are available:
▪ A “dual tone mode”, which means that for each command
combination two tones are sent on line
▪ A “2+2” mixed tone mode, which means that 2 commands
correspond to permissive tripping command and are sent on
single tone, with possibility to set full power on this tone and 2
commands correspond to direct tripping command and are sent
on two tones on line
▪ A “3+1” mixed tone mode, which means that 3 commands
correspond to permissive tripping commands and are sent on
single tone, with possibility to set full power on this tone and 1
command corresponds to a direct tripping command and is sent
on two tones on line
Command combination A special mode is available to increase the command number up to 6
(dual tone mode only by rack.
In this case the commands are not independent: priorities of some
commands on the others
Set/Reset (dual tone Set/reset is a special mode useful to transmit permanent commands.
mode only In this case, a pulse (whose duration is configurable by HMI) is
transmitted to mean the command start and another pulse to mean
the command end.
In case of default, an acknowledge between systems ensures the
command integrity
Available modes are
▪ 1 set/reset Command + 2 normal commands
▪ 2 set/reset Commands + 1 normal command
▪ 3 set/reset commands
Working modes Three working modes are available for the Teleprotection:
▪ Internal guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection provides its own
guard signal (application are TP in band and TP over QAM when
QAM is superimposed or QAM bandwidth≥16kHz)
▪ External guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection uses the
preconfigured signalling signal as guard (application TP over
Speech)
▪ TP on QAM separate mode (dual tone mode only): in case of
digital services configured, the Digital modulation can be used as
guard for the integrated teleprotection
Power repartition In Idle mode (guard mode), the power necessary for the Teleprotection
is:
▪ Either low
▪ Or null (the teleprotection does not need any extra guard signal
in case of TP over speech or TP over QAM)

The operator can choose by HMI which analog or/and digital channels
are cut to free power for the best compromise between service
integrity and power for commands.
▪ Cut all the services for maximum power dedicated to commands
(up to PEP minusthe level reserved for system pilot).
▪ Share the power between the services and the Teleprotection
commands
The band used by the TP is always cut.
Tone levels The tone levels in Transmission are configurable up to the maximum
power available.
The tone levels in Reception are configurable from -30dB to + 30dB
respect to the expected value.
Band used The bandwidth use for command transmission is the speech
bandwidth in the case of TP over speech and 1800Hz otherwise.
The band frequency can be configured by HMI within the used band
(dual tone mode in band only)
Extra functions and

Alarms
Maximun transmission Useful only with normal commands: it shall not be set with
time SET/RESET.
This function by cutting too long duration commands:
▪ Protects the amplifier from too long duration commands (High
power duration commands)
▪ Ensures a service availability rate, by reactivating the service
Unblocking Unblocking follows the Cigre Joint Working Group 34/35.11.
Furthermore:
▪ A relay can be freely allocated to this function.
▪ It is possible to allocate both commands and unblocking on the
same relay (dual tone mode only). In this case, the relay state on
alarm is trigged either by major alarm or by unblocking.
SNR In case of burst of noise, an alarm appears to inform the operator that
the link is not operating correctly.
Delays and levels are configurable by HMI for user alarm.
This alarm is minor and can trigger the communication alarm.
Signal Loss In case of attenuation drop, an alarm appears to inform the operator
that the link is not operating correctly.
Delays and levels are configurable by HMI for user alarm.
This alarm is minor and can trigger the communication alarm.

Guard loss In case where guard is not detected anymore and no command is seen
an alarm appears to inform the operator that the link is not operating
correctly.
Forbidden combination In case of reception of a not existing combination of frequencies, as
(mixed tone mode only) both guard and command tone, an alarm appears to inform the
operator the link is not operating correctly.
Loop test (mixed tone A loop test is available to check to ability of the system to send and
mode only) receive commands. This test can be ordered manually or can be
scheduled daily or hourly.
8.3 Digital modes

Feature Description
General characteristics ▪ Command number are 2, 4 or 8 commands
▪ A logical address is embedded to the communication message in
order to avoid any unwanted command in case of
communication path wrong switching.
Available alarms are:
▪ Minor BER on path
▪ Major BER on Path
▪ Alarm on propagation Time
▪ Synchronization Loss
These alarms are minor but can trigger the communication alarm
Electric path The use of daughter boards is necessary to communicate through
electrical channel
▪ IR179 for V11 communication (clock on receive or internal clock)
▪ IR180 for G703-1 communication (clock on receive or internal
clock)
▪ IR173 for G703-6 communication (clock on receive or internal
clock)
The interfaces used are those of the DIP with similar performances
(see digital characteristics).
Optical path The optical path is made through the use of SFP module, with LC
connector
The internal communication algorithm used is C3794 with selectable
number of slots (1/4/8)
The optical characteristics such as optical budget are guaranteed by
the SFP manufacturer.
For this version, validated optical modes are:
▪ Dual fiber Single mode 1310 nm

▪ Dual fiber Single mode 1550 nm
▪ Dual fiber Single mode 1310nm
8.4 Alarms
Feature Description
Communication Alarm The communication alarm monitors the communication path. In case
of impossibility to transmit commands, the LED switches ON.
▪ For Analog path, triggers are Signal Loss or SNR or Blocking
Alarm or LVDS link broken
▪ For digital path, triggers are Synchronization fails or BER Major
▪ In case of dual path, the communication alarm triggers only if
both path are broken
The major alarm is triggered and the output commands are released
according to the output configuration.
Minor and Major alarms Two kinds of alarms are available:

▪ Major alarm: alarm that does not lock the system and prevent
any command transmission
▪ Minor alarm: Minor default of the system that does not prevent
the command transmission (e.g. loss of one path in dual path
mode)
These alarms can be freely allocated to the outputs. Relays from 9 to
13 are recommended (Normally closed contact available).
Led indication in front panel is present for minor and major alarm.
User Alarms User alarm 1 and 2 are available for relay output and LED.
▪ User alarm1 copies the Major alarm with configurable delay in
HMI
▪ User alarm2 copies the Minor alarm with configurable delay in
HMI
Led indication in front panel is present for User Alarm 1 and 2.
These alarms can be freely allocated to the outputs. Relays from 9 to
13 are recommended (Normally closed contact available).
8.5 Maintenance and monitoring

Feature Description
Monitoring functions ▪ Double set of counters

▪ Status of input optocouplers
▪ Status of outputs relays
▪ Analog mode: Tone levels measures
▪ Digital mode: BER measures and propagation time
▪ Alarm table
▪ Events are recorded in a flash memory (inputs switching, outputs
and commands)
▪ Result of loop test (mixed mode)
Maintenance functions ▪ Forcing of input commands for commissioning
▪ Forcing of output relays for commissioning
▪ Release of output commands in case of SET/RESET (dual tone
mode)
▪ Reset of command counters
▪ Loop test (mixed mode)

9. System Security and supervision features
The T390 allows additional user-friendly features for security and supervision.
9.1 Security Pack (optional)

The PLC provides a secure authentication by means of a RADIUS server and a secure communication
using a SSH protocol.
When the RADIUS server is not available, the authentication is performed by the PLC itself. The
activation of the SSH encryption is proposed to secure the communication between the PLC and the
PC.
A local access bypassing the RADIUS authentication and secure communication is possible only by
connecting to the other units linked to the PRCS (amplifier or teleprotection).
Figure 15 - Security Management
9.2 Management using SNMP protocol (optional)

A SNMP (SNMP V2) agent is implemented within the T390, which allows a full monitoring of alarms,
real-time measures (SNR, AGC, etc) and complete configuration reading (frequencies, tx power,
services, etc).
Moreover, each alarm could generate a SNMP Trap sent to the network manager (up to 10 IP Trap
addresses are programmable). A MIB is supplied with the T390 system to interface to the management
system (ASN.1 format).
9.3 IRIG-B/SNTP (optional)

Purchase and installation of KEY-IRIGB enables options for time synchronization of the PLC.
Enabling the IRIG-B input interface allows synchronization of the PRCS unit real time clock with an
external time generator device, such as a GPS clock device.
If LAN to LAN is activated, then the IRIG B function can activate time synchronization from an SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol) server, accessed through the Ethernet interface.

10. Mechanical issues - Design
10.1 Mechanical constraints
Installation in cabinet or standard 19” rack
Maximal deep < 300 mm (connectors et wire plugs included)
Ingress Protection : IP 30
10.2 Mechanical Size

10.2.1 Amplifier modules
Figure 16: AMP-Amplifier FRONTview
Figure 17: AMPX-Amplifier Extension FRONTview

480 mm
480 mm
134mm
3U
260 mm
435 mm
Figure 18: Amp/AMPX mechanical size
10.2.2 Processing module
Figure 19: PRCS-processing front view
480 mm
480 mm
89mm
2U
260 mm
435 mm
Figure 20: PRCS mechanical size
10.2.3 TPI module
Figure21: TPI-TELEPROTECTION UNIT FRONT view

480 mm
480 mm
45m
1U
m
260 mm
435 mm
Figure 22: TPI mechanical size
10.3 Power supply

10.3.1 Standard voltage
Max consumption (at 48 VDC)< 102W for 3 Modules:
Amplifier: 72W (for 40W output power)
Processing: 15W
Teleprotection Unit: 19W Max
10.3.2 Ground Reference

The input voltage is grounding referenced with the 3 following possibilities:
Floating mode (no grounding)
+ Battery to Ground
- Battery to Ground
10.3.3 ON/OFF supply

On the PLC units no switch are provided in standard. A Circuit breaker should be installed to supply the
whole equipment and to offer the ON/OFF operation.
For maintenance operation, simply unplug the power supply connector.

11. Characteristics
11.1 T390-AMP/AMPX
Part Number Internal code Notes
T390-AMP MOD9002103 AMP
T390-AMPX MOD9002201 AMPX

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode
Operational characteristics
Frequency range 20 to 700 kHz
TX and RX band Separated, superimposed Separated Separated, superimposed
Choice of channel In 1 kHz steps
Choice of carrier
In 1 Hz steps
frequency
Transmitter power
1W to 40 W PEP 1W to 40 W PEP3
T390-AMP
Transmitter power
2W to 80 W PEP 1W to 40 W PEP1
AMP + AMPX
Line output Balanced or unbalanced, 50, 75, 125, 150 
Analog 4Khz + Digital 4,8
kHz
4 kHz, 8 kHz or 16 kHz 4 kHz or 2.5 kHz4 per Analog 2.5Khz + Digital
R.F Bandwidth 4,8 kHz
QAM or TCM channel
Analogue 4kHz * 2
Analogue 2.5kHz * 2
4kHz (from 20 to 500 kHz) (5)
TX/RX filter
programmability
16kHz (from 48 to 700 kHz)(6)
32kHz (from 96 to 700 kHz)(4)
3
With limitations on the output power for narrow filters in the upper part for the PLC band
4
2.5 kHz single channel available only in low part of PLC band (under 150 kHz). The normal operation is adjacent
Rx and Tx channel on 5kHz filters.
5
In the upper part of band, the real HF bandwidth of the narrow filters (4,5 and 8 kHz nominal bandwidth) must be
extended to avoid losses. Therefore, some restriction should be made regarding the paralleling of PLC
equipments (extension of IEC495 tapping loss requirements).
6
Lower frequency could not be lower than 5/2xBW (e.g. for 32kHz, lowfreq>80kHz)

Sensitivity
Absolute sensitivity of
-56dBm (typical) -50dBm (min)
receiver(5)
Sensitivity of FSK
channel for complete
-30dBm (typical) - 38dBm (min)
synchronization with
default parameters(3)
Analogue AGC
Dynamic range/set
72dB (range –21 to +60)
reference
Time constant 2 dB/sec rise or drop within out zone, 0.5dB/s within the capture zone
LF response <  0.5 dB
Power Supply
Input type DC voltage
Voltage 48V= typical (38 to 72V wide range)
Power 72W typical
9A (50μs<t<1.5ms )
Inrush current
About 1.2 A after operating system boot
Environmental (in operation)
Normal operational -5 °C / +50°C according to 721-3-3 class 3K5
temperature range
Max temperature -30°C / + 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
range
Max relative humidity 95 % at 23 °C non condensing
Environmental (Storage)
Temperature -40 °C < T < +70°C
Relative humidity 100 %
Insulation & EMC
Insulation IEC 60495 / IEC 60950
EMC (emissions) Radiated and conducted IEC 61000-6-4 (CISPR11)
EMC (immunity) IEC61000-6-2 / IEC61000-6-5
Mechanical
5
Default settings for AGC init, jumper RXF -12dB not enabled, separated mode.

AMP: 8800 g:
Weight
AMPX: 7650 g
Dimensions 480x260x134mm
MTBF
AMP 66 years @ 30°C 54 years @ 45°C
AMPX 149 years @ 30°C 120 years @ 45°C
11.2 Processing units

T390-PRCS MOD9002604 PRCS-E
T390-PRCS-B MOD9002902 PRCS-B Used instead of PRCS in
case of specific needs in
term of ringing voltage

Operational characteristics
Max Digital bit rate 327 kbit/s N/A kbits/s
Digital User rate Up to 256 kb/s N/A Up to 252 kb/s
Minimum SNR for Synchronization
QAM4 16dB N/A 16dB
QAM16/TCM32 20dB N/A 20dB
QAM64/TCM128 24dB N/A 24dB
QAM256 32dB N/A 32dB
QAM1024 43dB N/A 43dB
For PLC sync 6dB
Digital AGC
Dynamic range/set
+24dB N/A +24dB
reference
Time constant 20 dB/sec rise or drop N/A 20 dB/sec rise or drop
RF Equalizer
Amplitude distortion N/A  6 dB  6 dB
External Teleprotection

Interface N/A 4W
Impedance N/A 600 
Mode N/A Balanced/Isolated
Return loss N/A > 14 dB
Input max level adjustment N/A +14dBm for T390-PRCS
Input min level adjustment N/A -18 dBm
Input step level N/A 3 dB
Output max level N/A +14dBm for T390-PRCS
adjustment
Output min level adjustment N/A -18 dBm
Output step level N/A 3 dB
Internal Guard N/A YES
External Guard N/A YES
External Teleprotection Channel Blocking control (BLE/BLR) & safety presence
Command method 2 user points access, DC level, External free loop
Level range 17 VDC to 160 VDC
Insulation value IEC 60495
Particularity 0dB or +6 dB or +12 dB programmable Boost on
command
Bouncing Protection
External Teleprotection Alarm output – PRCS only
Function method Free potential Static relay Contact
Continuous max voltage 160 VDC
250 VAC
Continuous max current 190 mA
Peak current 300 mA during 30 ms
Particularity Normally open
Data & voice services
V11
RS232 See section 4, Digital services
Speech

Telegraphy
Signaling
Power Supply
Power 15W typical
3.76A (50 s < t < 1,5 ms)
Inrush current
1.9A (1,5 ms < t < 500 ms)
UO5 @ 52V
0.08A (t  500 ms)
Alarm output
Function method Free potential, Pure relay Contact
Continuous max voltage 160 VDC
250 VAC
Continuous max current 2A
Peak current 100 A during 30 ms
Max Power 100 W
Particularity Dual insulated contact
Normally closed
temperature
Max temperature -30°C / + 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
Max relative humidity 95 % at 23 °C
Relative humidity 100 %
Insulation & EMC
Mechanical

PRCS: 4300g
Weight
Dimensions 480x260x89mm
MTBF
PRCS 22 years @ 30°C 20 years @ 45°C
11.3 Teleprotection Unit

T390-TPI MOD9003102 TPI
General features
Power Supply
Power 19W typical/30W max
Permanent current without commands 19W
Permanent current with all relays only 28W
Permanent current with all relays & commands 30W
Inrush current 12A <1.5ms , 9A for 1.5<t<500ms
temperature
Max temperature -30°C
+ 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
Max relative humidity 95 % at 23 °C
Relative humidity 100%
Insulation & EMC

General features
C3790.1/C3790.3/C3790.3
Mechanical
Weight TPI: 3600 g
operation 3M1 according to IEC 60721-3-3
storage 2M1 according to IEC 60721-3-2
Dimensions 480x260x44,5mm
IEC 255-21-1 vibration response Class 2
IEC 255-21-1 vibration endurance Class 1
IEC 255-21-2 Shock response Class 2
IEC 255-21-2 Shock withstand Class 1
IEC 255-21-2 Bump Class 1
MTBF
TPI 29 years @ 30°C 25 years @ 45°C

Outputs
contacts available 8 NO contacts
6 NO/NC contacts
Mode Single Electromechanical relays (EMR)
or combined with solid state relays and (mode selectable by jumper)
Working Contacts the contacts are allocated freely to commands a/o alarms
Max permanent Current 8A
Max Voltage 300Vdc
Making capacity(200ms) EMR COMBINED
15A 30A
Breaking capacity see Figure 23 see Figure 23
Resistive Load
Inductive load
L/R= 40ms at 127V 5A on combined output
short-circuit max current 100A during 30ms

General features
Combination AND/OR
State on Alarm Transparent/Idle/Set/Memory
Holding Delay 0-500ms, by step of 1ms
Alarms
Delay for alarm relays 0-30s by step of 1s
Inputs
input available 8
Mode decoupling opto couplers
working inputs the input allocation is freely configurable by HMI
Max Input voltage 290VDC
Input Range selectabl
e by
jumpers 24V 48-60V 110-129V 220-250V
Max trigger threshold 18V 36V 80V 170V
Minimum switch off
voltage
Impedance At
(tolerance of 10%) nominal
voltage 6000 10000 18000 39000
Logical Combination AND/OR/XOR
Input filters 0-100ms by steps of 0,1 ms
Max input frequency 50 Hz in permanent
Holding Delay 0-500ms by steps of 1ms
Input validation Delay 0-25ms by steps of 1ms

1000
100
Max DC Voltage(A)
EMR
Combined
10
1
0,1 1 10
DC current(A)
Figure 23: breaking capacity of output on resistive LOAd
Digital
General features
number of commands 2/4/8
Application Types 3 different types selectable by group of 2 commands
Alarm on Ber Two thresholds available for Minor and Major BER alarm
Alarm on propagation 10-30ms by step of 1ms
Time
Measure of transfer time performed in link loop, accuracy of 1ms
Interfaces available V11 G703-1 G703-6 Optical
daughter daughter board daughter board link
board
Protection Protection against path switching and loop back
Electrical
connector Sub-D 15
V11
Clock source internal or external
Clock speed Range 32-256 kbps
Communication Mode Data received on internal clock/external clock

Digital
G703-6
Type E1 2Mbps
G703-1
Clock speed 64 kbps
Optical
connector Type LC-LC
Communication Type Monomode 1550nm long haul
1310nm short haul
1550nm simplex bidirectional interface
Multimode 850 nm for C3794 compatible application
Tx failure
LOS on Rx
Slots of 64kbps on 2Mbps 1/2/4
frame
interface type and
characteristics by SFP modules
C3794 function compatibility with C3794 system with 850nm SFP
Performance according to 60834-1
Protection mode Blocking Permissive Direct
Tripping
N Cycles required 1 2 3
D Hamming distance 3 2 2
Transfer Time 64 kbps 4 CMDS 6 ms 7 ms 8 ms
Transfer Time 2Mbps 4 CMDS <1ms <1 ms <1ms
Dependability (Pmc) for Pmc = Probability of <1E-35 <1E-20 <1E-15
BER = 1E-3 a Missing Command
(10ms)
Security (Puc) (Worst case) 1E-05 1E-13 1E-20
Recovery Time <8ms at 64kBps

Analog
General features
Number of commands 4 independent commands
Case dual tone 6 commands with priorities
2 commands + 1 SET/RESET
1 command + 2 SET/RESET
3 SET/RESET
Number of commands 2+2 : 2 permissives and 2 direct trippings
Case Mixed mode 3+1 : 3 permissives and 1 direct tripping
SET RESET Type of application designed for continuous commands such as
switchgear position copy
The Transmission duration is configurable in the 10-200ms range
Frequency And power Allocation
Type According to services configured, the TP band allocated
TP over
TP over speech empty TP over QAM
Power allocation operator can configure the channel to cut
during command transmission
Bandwidth TP over
TP over speech empty TP over QAM
same as QAM
1800Hz 1800Hz bandwidth
Alarm and special features
SNR alarm Low/High Limits and trigger delays configurable by HMI
Signal Loss Low/High Limits and trigger delays configurable by HMI
Unblocking function 1 output contact can be allocated
unblocking following Cigre Joint Working Group 34/35.11
Alarm on Command too
Long configurable by HMI from 0 to 2,5s by step of 0,1s
Performance according to 60834-1 dual tone mode
T0 (ms) Puc Pmc
Type 1 / Blocking 12 3E-05 7E-04
TP over QAM Type 2 / Permissive 12 7E-07 <7E-05
Type 3 /Direct tripping fast 14 1E-09 <1,3E-06

Analog
Type 4 / Direct tripping slow 40 1E-09 <1E-6
Type 1 / Blocking 9 4E-05 9E-04
Type 2 / Permissive 9 <1E-6 8E-05
TP in band Type 3 / Direct tripping fast 10 1E-09 <1E-6
Type 1 / Blocking 12 <4E-05 1,8E-03
Type 2 / Permissive 12 <1E-06 2,6E-04
TP over speech Type 3 Direct tripping fast 12 1E-09 <1E-6
Recovery Time <45ms for SNR= 0dB
(Tac after noise burst) <65ms for SNR = -5dB
Performance according to 60834-1 mixed tone mode
Dependability
Tac (ms) at Security(Puc)
T0 (ms) (Pmc) at
SNR=6dB at worst case
SNR=6dB
Permissive commands 12 15 <10-3 <10-4
Direct tripping
15 30 <10-4 <10-6
commands
11.4 Other General Information

General features
Frequency Accuracy HF +/- 1Hz
Cross Talk < -65 dBmp
Selectivity < 55 dBm0 as per IEC 60495 § 5.3.1.5
Overall stability (over
temperature) +/- 4 ppm ( +/- 2.8 Hz) [ at 700 kHz]
Oscillator stability Basic stability ± 1.5 ppm
Temperature coefficient ± 2.5 ppm on the whole working temp.
range
Ageing <1 ppm during first year
MTBF
Systems MTBF (years)

@30°C @45°C
AMP + PRCSe 17 15
AMP + AMPX + PRCSe 15 13
AMP + PRCSe + TPI 11 9
AMP + AMPX + PRCSe +TPI 10 9
Minimum bandwidth spacing for paralleling equipment
Digital mode Min 8 kHz or equal to a bandwidth
Analogue mode Transmitter to adjacent transmitter 8 kHz
Transmitter to adjacent receiver 8 kHz
Receiver to adjacent receiver 8 kHz

Gridcom T390
Installation
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Installation
CONTENTS
1. Safety Instructions .......................................................................................... 5

2. Installation procedure ..................................................................................... 6
3. Shipment and storage ..................................................................................... 7
3.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................. 7
3.1.1 Preliminary verification ................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Equipment unpacking ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Storage conditions ................................................................................................................ 7
3.3 Equipment repacking ............................................................................................................8
3.4 Accessories provided.............................................................................................................8
3.4.1 Kit basic standard ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.4.2 Kit basic special .............................................................................................................................. 9
3.4.3 Kit AMPX ........................................................................................................................................ 9
3.4.4 Kit TPI........................................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.5 Kit Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.6 Kit Connectors for AMP and PRCS.................................................................................................11
3.4.7 Kit Connectors for TPI ....................................................................................................................11
4. PLC Installation ............................................................................................. 13

4.1 Unit-specific physical settings: Amplifier bandwidth .......................................................... 13
4.2 Physical fittings ................................................................................................................... 13
4.2.1 Unit assembly ................................................................................................................................13
4.2.2 Inter-unit connection.................................................................................................................... 15
4.2.3 Power Supply Connection ............................................................................................................ 16
5. AMP Physical description .............................................................................. 18

5.1 Internal boards of the amplifier unit .................................................................................... 18
5.2 Board physical layout .......................................................................................................... 19
5.3 Internal interconnections .................................................................................................... 20
5.4 Functional interconnections................................................................................................ 22
6. AMP Connectors Description......................................................................... 24

6.1 AMP connectors ..................................................................................................................24
6.2 Unit chain P2/P3 connectors ...............................................................................................24
6.3 HF access P4 connector.......................................................................................................24
6.4 HF input 80W P5 .................................................................................................................26
6.5 Power supply P6 connector .................................................................................................26
6.6 HF output 80W P7 ............................................................................................................... 27
7. AMPX Physical description ............................................................................ 29

7.1 Internal boards of the AMPX unit ........................................................................................ 30
Gridcom T390 1 Installation

7.2 Board physical layout .......................................................................................................... 31
7.3 Internal interconnections .................................................................................................... 31
7.4 Functional interconnections ................................................................................................ 32
8. AMPX Connectors Description ...................................................................... 34

8.1 AMPX Connectors ............................................................................................................... 34
8.2 HF input P1 Connector ........................................................................................................ 34
8.3 HF output P2 connector ...................................................................................................... 34
8.4 Power supply P3 connector ................................................................................................. 35
9. AMPX accessories ......................................................................................... 36

9.1 Kit description ..................................................................................................................... 36
9.2 CAB9001201-400 description.............................................................................................. 36
9.3 CAB9001301-500 description .............................................................................................. 37
10. PRCS Physical description ............................................................................ 38

11. PRCS Connectors Description ...................................................................... 39
11.1 Power Supply P12 connector ............................................................................................. 39
11.2 Unit Chain P2 & P3 connectors .......................................................................................... 39
11.3 Alarms P11 connector ........................................................................................................ 39
11.4 External Teleprotection P4 connector ...............................................................................40
11.5 IRIG B P10 connector .........................................................................................................42
11.6 V11/X24 P5 connector ....................................................................................................... 43
11.7 RS 232 P6 to P9 connectors ............................................................................................... 45
11.8 Service Phone P13 connector (RJ11) ..................................................................................46
11.9 Speech Channels P14 to P16 connectors ........................................................................... 47
11.10 Reference Voltage P17 connector ....................................................................................48
11.10.1 Reference input access for telephone circuits ............................................................................ 48
11.10.2 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 48
11.10.3 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 48
11.10.4 Wiring recommendation ........................................................................................................... 48
12. TPI Physical description ............................................................................... 49

12.1 Board top view ..................................................................................................................49
12.2 Digital Communication interface ...................................................................................... 50
13. TPI Connectors Description ......................................................................... 51

13.1 Back panel ......................................................................................................................... 51
13.2 Input contacts.................................................................................................................... 51
13.2.1 Input contacts ............................................................................................................................. 51
13.2.2 Input range ................................................................................................................................. 52
13.2.3 Input mode ................................................................................................................................. 52
13.3 Output contacts................................................................................................................. 52
13.3.1 Output contacts .......................................................................................................................... 52
13.3.2 Output mode .............................................................................................................................. 53

13.4 Power Supply P7 connector ............................................................................................... 53
13.5 Front panel ........................................................................................................................ 54
13.5.1 Unit Chain P8 and P9 connectors ................................................................................................ 54
13.5.2 Communication medium connector P11 ..................................................................................... 54
13.5.3 Optical connector.........................................................................................................................57
13.5.4 Ethernet Connector .................................................................................................................... 58
14. Cabinet installation instructions .................................................................. 59

14.1 Foreword ........................................................................................................................... 59
14.2 Standards - Norms ............................................................................................................ 59
14.3 Instructions relevant to the power supply..........................................................................60
14.4 Electrical protection .......................................................................................................... 61
14.5 Instructions relative to the thermal aspects ...................................................................... 61
14.6 Instructions relative to the mechanical layout ...................................................................62
15. Wiring instructions ...................................................................................... 63

15.1 General principle for Telecom room wiring........................................................................ 63
15.2 Screens, Shielding ............................................................................................................. 63
15.3 Grounding .........................................................................................................................64
15.4 LMU connection ................................................................................................................ 65
15.5 Protection & galvanic isolation .......................................................................................... 65

1. Safety Instructions
WARNING: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE
FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENT OF THE SAFETY SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION, AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

2. Installation procedure
The purpose of this document is to help installers in preparing installation of a new equipment T390.
The procedure for installation of a new equipment is the following:
▪ Receipt the parcels and check their content.
This step is described in section 3: Shipment and storage.
▪ Prepare needed connectors.
Physical description of all units and their connectors are given in sections 4 to 13.
▪ Install the equipment in the cabinet.
Complete instructions are given in section 14: Cabinet installation instructions.
▪ Wire the equipment in the Telecom room.
Complete instructions are given in section 15: Wiring instructions.

3. Shipment and storage
This section describes the procedures for unpacking the containers used to transport T390 terminals.
Repacking is largely a reversal of these steps.
When repacking is required, the re-use of original packing materials is recommended.
In order to protect the equipment from mechanical and environmental damage, the following
containers should be used:
▪ Wooden boxes for ship, aircraft and truck transportation which is likely take longer than 60
days.
▪ Cardboard boxes for aircraft or truck transportation likely to take less than 30 days
3.1 Unpacking
3.1.1 Preliminary verification
The following information is printed on container sides:
▪ production mark
▪ destination
▪ net weight
▪ dimensions
▪  symbol identifying container proper position during transportation
A packing sheet, inserted in a plastic bag, lists the materials inside the container.
When receiving the containers, verify that no damage has occurred during transportation.
Should any damage be discovered, unpack the containers and contact the company or the carrier
representative.
Check that the container final destination matches that shown on the box.
3.1.2 Equipment unpacking

Follow these steps for unpacking containers and boxes:
▪ Confirm that container is facing the right way up (indicated by “ “)
▪ Cut the nylon laces
▪ Extract any nails if the container is a wooden box, or the metal staples if container is a
compensated wood or carton box
▪ Take out the carton pre-packing wound on the polyethylene tube
3.2 Storage conditions

If the equipment is not to be installed immediately, the packing should be stored as follows:
▪ Carton boxes must be placed in an environment with good air circulation.
▪ Wood or plywood boxes can be kept outdoors provided they are protected against rain and
sunlight.

▪ Long term storage temperature must be between -40 °C and +70 °C.
▪ The outdoor storage period must not exceed 12 months.
▪ Take out the carton pre-packing from the polyethylene tube by cutting one end. Do not throw
away the tube as it may later be needed for repacking.
▪ Cut the adhesive tape wound around the carton box.
▪ Remove the polyurethane foam bed from the box.
▪ Take out wound on the tube cutting an end.
▪ Do not throw away the tube as it may later be needed for re-packing.
▪ Check that the equipment was not damaged in transport, but if it was then contact the
company representative.
3.3 Equipment repacking

To repack equipment, proceed as follows:
▪ Insert the unit in its polyethylene tube and seal with adhesive tape
▪ Set the unit on the bed and insert the bed in the box
▪ Seal the box with adhesive tape
▪ Whenever it is necessary, see paragraph "General", put the pre-packing in wood or in plywood
crate
▪ Close the wood crate with the nails and the cardboard box with the metal staples
▪ Wind round the crate the nylon laces
▪ Take care with the front panel switcher: there is a specific cutout on the bed to protect it during
shipment
3.4 Accessories provided

3.4.1 Kit basic standard
This kit is always delivered with a basic system (in the AMP package). It is wrapped up in a plastic bag,
and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It contains the basic elements needed to start 2 units
(Amplifier + processing).
For bigger or different systems, please use additional kits to complete the furniture.
Code Qty Item

BAG 1 Polythene bag with zip seal
23mm x 32mm x 100μm
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000102" and Revision
V1 1 MOV 250Vrms / 6500A / 130J (HF Line common mode only)
V2 1 MOV 75Vrms / 6500A / 33J (Power Supply)
CAB1 1 Cable for LVDS 0,4m

CAB2 1 Cable for LVDS 1m
JMP1 15 Set of jumpers for RXF and Hybrid adjust (black or others color)
JMP2 10 Set of jumpers for TXF (Red)
JMP3 1 Jumper for TXF JP49 (unbalanced mode)
2 A flat braid cross-section of 10mm x 1mm and a length of 50cm.
4 Ring Terminals Crimp
3.4.2 Kit basic special

Special due to the LVDS cables that are with a right angle on the connectors. This is in order to
facilitate the integration within a cubicle with door.
This kit is an option that will be delivered with a system (in the PRCS package) instead of the standard
kit.
It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It contains the basic
elements needed to start a basic system of 2 units (Amplifier + processing).
Code Qty Item

V1 1 MOV 250Vrms / 6500A / 130J (HF Line common mode)
V2 1 MOV 75Vrms / 6500A / 33J (Power Supply)
CAB2 1 Cable for LVDS 1m
JMP1 15 Set of jumpers for RXF and Hybrid adjust (black or others color)
JMP3 1 Jumper for TXF JP49 (unbalanced mode)
3.4.3 Kit AMPX

This kit is delivered with the power extension unit AMPX. It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a
label indicating its reference stuck on it. It contains the elements needed to power up, connect and set
the AMPX unit.

Code Qty Item
TB1 1 Female Plug for Power Supply connection
(screw connection)
CAB1 1 Cable for Low Power signals 0.4m
CAB2 1 Cable for High Power signal 0.5m
LEV1 1 Lever for WAGO Connectors
3.4.4 Kit TPI

This kit is delivered with a TPI module. It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its
reference stuck on it. It contains the elements needed to connect a TPI module on a system (the system
must include at least an AMP module and a processing module).
Code Qty Item

LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000501"
3.4.5 Kit Commissioning

This kit is delivered with couple of PLC system in a dedicated box. (Generally 1 per order however could
be more).
It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It contains the
elements needed to perform the commissioning of the system.

Code Qty Item
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000202"and Revision
CAB1 2 75 ohm BNC male to SMB Male, coaxial RG179, length 1m
CAB2 1 CAT5e Crossover Patch Cable, 3 ft.
CAB3 1 75 ohm BNC male to HF connector, length 1m
3.4.6 Kit Connectors for AMP and PRCS

This kit is an option with a system (in the PRCS package). It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a
label indicating its reference stuck on it.
It contains the connectors needed for the installation of a basic system of 2 units (Amplifier +
processing).
Code Qty Item

TB1 2 Female Plug for Power Supply connection
(screw connection)
TB2 1 Female Plug for Alarms connection
(screw connection)
TB3 1 Female Plug for VSU board references connections.
PL1 1 Power Subconnect Plug for HF Line
CH1 1 Cable Housing for PL1
LEV1 1 Levers for WAGO Connectors
3.4.7 Kit Connectors for TPI

This kit is an option with a TPI module. It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its
reference stuck on it. It contains the connectors needed to connect I/O and alarms on a TPI.

Code Qty Item
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000901"
TB1 1 Female Plug for P7 connection
(screw connection)
TB2 4 Female Plug for P1 to P4 connection
(screw connection)
TB3 2 Female Plug for P5 to P6 connection
(screw connection)
LEV1 1 Levers for WAGO Connectors

4. PLC Installation
The PLC system supports the setting of several parameters to handle various site-related parameters
and customer-driven configurations. Some of the parameters are set at manufacturing time, some at
integration time, and some have to be set at installation and service start-up time.
Some parameters relate to a specific unit, while others apply to the whole system.
This section describes parameter setup, specifies the operating mode, and identifies the recommended
or mandatory steps with which the configuration should be carried out. When necessary, for unit-
specific parameters, reference is made to unit-specific technical manuals.
4.1 Unit-specific physical settings: Amplifier bandwidth

The frequency range used for transmission by the amplifier can be configured by modifying jumpers.
This is described in the Commissionning manual.
Take care during this procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier.
4.2 Physical fittings

4.2.1 Unit assembly
A T390 Link is a combination of two T390 systems, each located on distribution or transmission
substations, and each consisting of at least two units (a minimum system is one Amplifier, AMP, and
one Processing unit, PRCS).
It is important to note that the T390 systems at each end of a link must be an identical combination of
units, and the installed software on each system must also be identical.
4.2.1.1 General
Before the agreed delivery date, the infrastructure where the equipment will be installed should be
ready. It is also important that the AC mains power supply, as well as the PLC power supply, be
guaranteed continuous.
4.2.1.2 Site Selection

The following parameters should be taken into account during selection of the site:
▪ Rack dimensions
▪ Number of racks
▪ Ceiling height, no lower than 2.5 m. from floor
▪ Battery Charger dimension
▪ Environmental conditions
▪ Main earth network

4.2.1.3 Mechanical installation
Once all requirements related to the installation site have been verified it is possible to proceed with
installation.
The following rules should be observed when mounting T390 units in their rack:
▪ Choose an open space far from other equipment, if possible, and with good ventilation, to
reduce climatic stress.
▪ Leave at least 1U (44mm) between each unit. This space can be used for cable holdings or fan
units.
▪ Put the units on the rear of the rack: no cabling is required on the back except the grounding
braid refer to in the Application Note: Installation check. This layout will give more space on the
front for cabling and user accessibility.
▪ Fix the units firmly on the rack with the supplied bolts and screws or equivalents.
▪ Connect each unit to earth/ground using a large tinned copper braid to provide low impedance
between the cases and earth/ground.
4.2.1.4 Modules presentation
Figure 1: AMP module for 40W amplification
Figure 2: AMPX module for 80W extension amplification
Figure 3: PRCS module for data/speech/TPX/IRIG-B/alarms

Figure 4: TPI module
4.2.2 Inter-unit connection

All modules are interconnected through a high speed link, also called the LVDS link.
Use the supplied T390-Harting manufacturer cables to connect the units.
4.2.2.1 Connection scheme

The connection scheme must conform to the following:
▪ Both connectors of each unit should be connected in such a way that the connector could be
left connected when the system is on-line.
▪ The chain-in of each unit must be connected to the chain-out of one of the other units,
although no particular order is required.
▪ Use the appropriate cable length to connect the units. Supplied cables within the kit allow a
standard layout configuration, but other cable lengths can be ordered to suit different
configurations.
▪ Never connect or disconnect LVDS cables under PLC power on.
4.2.2.2 LVDS Inter-unit connector

LVDS connectors are provided in Kits “basic standard” and “basic special”.
Scheme of LVDS connectors is given in Figure 5.

Figure 5: LVDS cable
4.2.3 Power Supply Connection

Only star connection can be used to connect the various units to the power supply.
4.2.3.1 Star connection
CAUTION: The ground connection must be made with the main circuit breaker OFF.
Once the connections have been made, switch the main circuit breaker ON. Check on every unit of the
local system that the Main and Power LEDs indicate a correct connection: if the polarity has been
respected, the Main, Power and Logic LEDs will be lit (green). Only under these circumstances may
configuration continue.
4.2.3.2 Power supply connector

The power supply connector is not unit-specific: it is identical on every unit in a T390 system.
The socket connector is a WAGO connector, female, three poles, 12A, 7.5mm pitch. It must be
connected using the corresponding male WAGO plug supplied with the equipment

Pin out Description
+ BAT 48 VDC positive
- BAT 48 VDC negative
NC Not Connected
Figure 6: Power supply TABLE 1: Power supply connector
connector PIN-OUT

5. AMP Physical description
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR THE INNER CORE
OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS ENERGIZED.
This section identifies the indicators and connectors on the front panel of the amplifier unit. The layout
of the front panel is illustrated in Figure 7:
Figure 7: The T390 Amplifier Unit (AMP)
5.1 Internal boards of the amplifier unit

This section lists the boards that are present in the amplifier unit following configuration.
It also describes the main functionality of the boards and their interconnections.
NOTE: The description that follows is provided for information only; internal boards cannot be
sold separately. They are an integral part of the T390 system and must not be reworked
or repaired by customers. In the event of damage, the complete unit should be returned
to the manufacturer in its original packaging, or something equivalent.
Board Functions Comment

Name

PPC Main processor board Always present
AFE Analog Front End, A/D and D/A Always present
conversion Daughter board on PPC
AMP 40W AB class Amplifier Board Always present. Mounted on the left side heat sink
of the unit
TXF Programmable 40W Transmit Filter, Always present. Filter setting is achieved with
Impedance matching, Summing jumpers. Fine tuning is obtained by adjusting the
stage for 80W version inductance value of the 2 coils (screw adjusting)
RXF Programmable Receive Filter Filter setting is achieved with jumpers. Fine-tuning
In the 80W/Separated band version, is obtained by adjusting the inductance value of the
it is only present on AMP module three coils (screw adjusting).
PSL Power supply unit – Low levels Always present

PSH Main power supply input board Always present
(protection and filtering)
I80W Interface 80W Part of the TXF board
Jumpers on the transmission filter board (TXF) and on the reception filter board (RXF) allow frequency
settings: the pass-band can be 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 16 kHz, 32 kHz, 40 kHz, 48 kHz or 50 kHz wide, and is in the
range 20 kHz to 700 kHz, depending on the chosen bandwidth. The RXF board also allows a pass-band
2.5 kHz in the range 24 kHz to 320 kHz.
5.2 Board physical layout

Figure 8 shows the basic physical layout. It identifies the position of the physical elements used during
configuration, i.e. the jumpers and connectors.

Figure 8: Amplifier unit board physical layout (top view)
5.3 Internal interconnections

Figure 9 shows the internal interconnections:

REAR
C9
IOX11 IOX11
(J3)
T C2 (J2)
IOX18
C1 (J3)
IO16
Lower C3
J1
horizontal
IO16
board
(J2)
IO16
Upper (J1)
RXF
horizontal
board
C4
AMP
Vertical board
IO16 IOX14
(J2) (J3)
Power cable IO16
PSH/A
J6
C5
Data cable
IOX15
(J1)
C6 C8
IOX15 IO16
IOX14
(J2) (J6)
(J4) IOX14
IOX15
AFE C7
(J8)
(J1)
IOX18
(J7) TXF
IOX15
(J2)
PPC I80W
FRONT
D0579ENa
Figure 9: Amplifier unit internal connections (top view)
Cable list is given hereafter:

Left side Cable mark Right side
PSH-J3 C1 PPC-J7 (power)
PSH-J2 C2 AMP-J3
TXF-J1 C3 AMP-J2
TXF-J6 C4 RXF-J1
RXF-J2 C5 AFE-J6
AMP-J1 C6 AFE-J1
AFE-J2 C7 I80W-J2
AFE-J4 C8 TXF-J8 (first connection)
RXF-J3 (second connection)
Top rear screw insert C9 RXF rear left M4 screw

Mark Qty Manufacturer name & reference
C1 1 CAB9000101-750
C2 1 CAB9000601-400
C3 3 CAB9003001-200
C4
C5
C6 2 CAB9003101-240
C7
C8 1 CAB9003201-340
C9 1 CAB9003301-120
5.4 Functional interconnections

The internal and external functional interconnections depend on the configuration of the equipment.
PPC
connexion to
connexion to
Digital Logic
Digital Logic
Interface
RXF
AFE
AFE
RXF
connexion to
connexion to
PSL
Analog
Analog
RXF
AFE
Mixed Analog Digital Logic Analog

connexion to connexion to connexion to connexion to
80W interf AMP AMP AMP
Digital Flags
Analog Input
& PSH cmd
AMP
Power On PSH
PSH
AMP
PSL
TX signal Out
To To To
RXOUT
PSH PPC RXF
Mixed
connexion to
AFE
TXIN
TXF
I80W PSL
80W Interface
48V Power
To 80W From 80W HF LINE
Supply
Aux AMP Aux AMP Connector
Connector
D0580ENa
Figure 10: HF power 40W

6. AMP Connectors Description
6.1 AMP connectors

Pin Description
P1 Ethernet access
P2 Unit chain out
P3 Unit chain in
P4 HF line output
P5 Input AMPX
P6 Power supply
P7 Output AMPX
6.2 Unit chain P2/P3 connectors

Unit Chain Connectors are not specific to the amplifier; they are identical for every unit in a T390
system. Description is given in section 4.2.2.2: LVDS Inter-unit connector.
6.3 HF access P4 connector

HF access uses a single connector, the same for the 75 unbalanced access and all the other types of
connections (balanced for all impedance values and unbalanced for 50, 125, and 150).
The connector type is "Power Sub-connect" with three poles, from PHOENIX CONTACT.

3 2 1
Figure 11: HF Line Acces P4 Socket
3 2 1
Figure 12: HF line access P4 plug
NOTE: Pin 2 is left unconnected and provides isolation.
Pin Signal
1 HF signal (A)
2 Not connected
3 HF signal (B)
This point is connected to Mechanical ground when in unbalanced mode
Body Mechanical Ground

6.4 HF input 80W P5
Figure 13: HF input 80W access P5 Connector
Location Signal
1 HF signal
Body GND MECHANIC
Type RADIALL142085161
Designation BNC
Impedance 75 Ω
Voltage 200 Veff max
Frequency of use 0 to 1,5 GHz
Dielectric strength 1500 Veff mini.
Insulation resistance 5000 MΩ mini.
Gender Male
Temperature range -35°C to +70°C
Material of conductor Brass
Material of insulator Polypropylene
6.5 Power supply P6 connector

Power Supply Connector is identical for every unit in a T390 system. Description is given in section
4.2.3.2: Power supply connector.

6.6 HF output 80W P7
The socket connector is SUB-D9 whose pin-out is given hereafter.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Figure 14: HF output 80W access P7 connector
Pin Signal
1 TXa (AUX AMP input signal)
2 AUX Amplifier DS2431 R/W
3 PSH ENA GND
4 FLAG TEMP_OK
5 FLAG ALIM_OK
6 TXb (AUX AMP input signal)
7 PSH ENA
8 +15 V from AMP
9 FLAG POWER_OK
Body GND MECHANIC
Type SUB-D9 to solder

Number of points 9 (5 and 4)
Gender Male
Maximum current 5A
Maximum voltage 300 Vrms
Dielectric strength 1000 Vrms
Material of contact Gold on Nickel
Inflammability standard UL94V0
Temperature range -55°C to +125°C
Case Metallic

FCI’s reference DE09P064TX

7. AMPX Physical description
This section identifies the indicators and connectors on the front panel of the AMPX unit. The layout of
the front panel is illustrated in Figure 15:
Figure 15: The AMPX unit

AMP-AMPX connection:
Figure 16: AMP-AMPX interconnection
7.1 Internal boards of the AMPX unit

This section lists the boards that are present in the AMPX unit, following configuration.
The main functionality of the board and its interconnections are also provided.
NOTE: This description is for information purpose only. Internal boards cannot be sold
separately, they are an integral part of a T390 system and must not be reworked or
repaired by customers. In case of damage, the complete unit should be returned to the
manufacturer in the original packaging or equivalent.
Board Functions Comment

Name
AMP 40W AB class Amplifier Board Always present. Mounted on the left side heat
sink of the unit
TXF B Programmable 40W Transmit Filter, Always present. The filter setting is realized
Impedance matching, Summing stage for with jumpers. Fine tuning is obtained by
80W version adjusting the inductance value of the 2 coils
(screw adjusting)
PSL Power supply unit – Low levels Always present

PSH Main power supply input board Always present
(protection and filtering)
I80W Interface 80W It’s a part of TXF board
Jumpers located on the transmission filter board (TXF) allow for frequency settings: the pass-band can
be 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 16 kHz, 32 kHz, 40 kHz, 48 kHz, 50 kHz wide, and is in the range from 20 kHz to 700
kHz, depending on the bandwidth.
7.2 Board physical layout

Figure 17 shows the basic board physical layout. The main purpose of this diagram is to identify the
position of the physical elements used for configuration, i.e. jumpers and connectors.
165mm
Alim
PSL TXF
PSH AMP
436mm
D0591xxa
Figure 17: 80W AMPX - Board physical layout
7.3 Internal interconnections

The following drawing shows the internal interconnections:

REAR
IOX11 IOX11
(J3) C2 (J2)
IOX18
(J3)
IO16
Lower C3
J1
horizontal
IO16
board
(J2)
AMP
Vertical board
Power cable
PSH/A
Data cable
IOX15
(J1)
C6
C7
IOX18
(J7) TXF
IOX15
(J2)
PPC I80W
Power Plug P3
FRONT
D0592ENb
Figure 18: AMPX unit – internal connections (top view)
The cable list is given hereafter:

Left side Cable mark Right side
PSH-J5 C2 AMP-J3
TXF-J1 C3 AMP-J2
AMP-J1 C6 I80W-J2
7.4 Functional interconnections

The internal and external functional interconnections depend on the configuration of the equipment.
The four possible configurations are described later in this document.

Digital Flags
Analog Input
& PSH cmd
AMP
Power On PSH
PSH
AMP
PSL
TX signal Out
To
RXOUT
PSH
Mixed
connexion
AMP
PSL
TXIN
TXF B (Under equipped)
I80W
80W Interface
48V Power
From 80W To 80W
Supply
Main AMP Main AMP
Connector
D0593ENa
Figure 19: AMPX interconnections

8. AMPX Connectors Description
8.1 AMPX Connectors
Figure 20: AMPX connectors
Pin Description
P1 Input AMP
P2 Output AMP
P3 Power supply
8.2 HF input P1 Connector

The AMPX HF input P1 connector is the same as AMP HF output P5 connector, described in section 6.6:
HF output 80W P7.
8.3 HF output P2 connector

The AMPX HF output P2 connector is the same as AMP HF input P5 connector, described in section 6.4:
HF input 80W.

This output must be connected to the AMP input connector using cable CAB9001301-500.
8.4 Power supply P3 connector


9. AMPX accessories
9.1 Kit description
The kit description is given in section 3.4.3: Kit AMPX.
9.2 CAB9001201-400 description

This cable is used to make the connection between the AMP and AMPX units.
It connects to the boards by IOM2 plug (SUB-D 9-pin connector).
This cable allows the exchange of low level signals (AMP input and flag).
400 mm
SUB-D SUB-D
9 points 9 points
Male Male
5 twisted pairs - Shielded
Metallic shell connected to cable shield
Figure 21: CAB9001201-400
Location Wire Signal

1 red Txa (AUX AMP input signal)
2 brown AUX Amplifier DS2431 R/W
3 white PSH ENA GND
4 green Flag TEMP_OK
5 blue Flag ALIM_OK
6 black Txb (AUX AMP input signal)
7 black PSH ENA
8 black + 15 V from AMP
9 black Flag POWER OK

Body GND mechanic
9.3 CAB9001301-500 description

This cable is used to connect the AMPX amplifier output to the AMP amplifier unit when in 80W mode.
It is connected to the IOA8 plug on the TXF board.
Figure 22: CAB9001301-500
Type KX6A Impedance 75 Ω

Center conductor Stranded copper Frequency range DC to 1 GHz
Internal shield Yes Voltage withstanding 7000 Vrms
External shield Yes Capacitance 63 pF/m
Jacket PVC Propagation delay 5 ns/m
Colour Green Temperature range - 40°C to + 85°C

10. PRCS Physical description
This section identifies the indicators and connectors on the front panel of the processing unit. The
layout of the front panel is illustrated in Figure 23.
The signification of LEDs is fully described in the Maintenance and Measures manual.
The interfaces and other connectors on the PRCS front panel are described in detail in section 11: PRCS
Connectors Description.
Figure 23: Indicator and connector layout on the Processing Unit
NOTE: The PRCS must not be open. In case of failure, contact the Global Support Operation
Team CTT.eme@ge.com.

11. PRCS Connectors Description
The following table identifies all the PRCS unit connectors:
Pin Description Pin Description
P1 Ethernet 10/100 MB P10 IRIG-B
P2 Unit chain out P11 Alarms
P3 Unit chain in P12 Power supply
P4 Teleprotection P13 Maintenance handset
P5 V11/X24 P14 Speech1
P6 RS232-Data P15 Speech 2
P7 RS232-Data 1 P16 Speech 3
P8 RS232-Data 2 P17 Reference voltage
P9 RS232-Data 3
11.1 Power Supply P12 connector

11.2 Unit Chain P2 & P3 connectors

Unit Chain Connectors are not specific to the amplifier; they are identical for every unit in a T390
system. Description is given in section 4.2.2.2: LVDS Inter-unit connector.
11.3 Alarms P11 connector

The connector is a WAGO connector. The characteristics to take into account before connecting any
external device are the following:
ALx-x Min Type. Max Unit Notes

Continuous DC Voltage 17 48 160 V 48 to 250V DC nominal
Max continuous DC current 2 A
Short circuit current 100 A During 30 ms
Switching power 100 W Resistive load
Insulation 2000 Vrms During 1 minute (IEC60834-1)
Response time 10 ms

ALx-x Min Type. Max Unit Notes
Frequency Max 10 Hz
ALIVE Min Typ. Max Unit Notes

Input level +17 +48 +160 VDC 48V/60V/110V/127V
nominal
Input current 20 mA
Insulation 2000 Vrms 1 minute test
Response time 200 µs
Frequency Max 500 Hz
Figure 24: Alarms P11 connector
AL1-1 AL1-2 AL2-1 AL2-2 Alive

1st contact 2nd contact 1st contact 2nd contact Connector presence
Wiring recommendation
All circuits should be polarized on the other side.
11.4 External Teleprotection P4 connector

The connector is a SUD-D 15 connector.

Figure 25: TPX P4 connector
DIP SIDE PLC SIDE
TELEPROTECTION
DIP – P18 SUB-D15 CONNECTOR
TX 2 2 IN
9 9
4 4 OUT
RX 11 11
3 3 BLE
BLE 10 10
5
BLR 5 12
BLR
12
7 7 ALIVE
ALIVE 14
14
ALM EXT 6 6
13 ALM
13
+batt PLC
+batt DIP
-batt DIP
-batt PLC
Figure 26: DIP-T390 connection
The PIN assignment is given hereafter.
Pin Description Direction Comment

(P4 connector)

2 TXa Input 600 Ohms
9 TXb
4 RXa Output 600 Ohms
11 RXb
3 BLE (+batt PLC) Input Common Polarity from PLC
10 Common (-batt PLC) Led (TP Active) User Alarm (TPX Active)
5 BLR (+batt PLC) Input Common Polarity from PLC

12 Common (-batt PLC)
7 TP Alive (+batt PLC) Input Common Polarity from PLC
14 Common (-batt PLC) Led (TP Error) User Alarm (TPX Safety)
6 PLC Alarm Output Common Polarity from TP

13 Common (+ Batt TP) User Alarm (User Alarm Setting)
11.5 IRIG B P10 connector

This is an input interface for synchronizing the real time clock with an external time generator device, a
GPS clock device for example. The code used is the 1 kHz AM modulated version of IRIG-B (Inter Range
Instrumentation Group) standard time code.
IRIG-B supports formats B120, B121, B122, and B123, where the codes translate as follows:
B = format B (100pps)
1 = Amplitude modulation
2 = 1 kHz sinusoidal
0 = BCD, CF, SBS
1 = BCD, CF
2 = BCD
3 =BCD, SBS
IRIG-B characteristics are:
Standard 200-04,
Input impedance 4,7 kΩ at 1000 Hz,
Modulation ratio: 3:1 à 6:1,
Peak to Peak input signal : 100 mV à 10 V.
The connector is a BNC connector, of which details are given below:

BNC, Coaxial 75, Right Angle, Unshielded
Allocation:
▪ Internal cable: IRIG-B

▪ External cable: Return signal
Figure 27: IRIG B P10 connector
11.6 V11/X24 P5 connector

This interface offers up to 64kbps transmission capabilities.
This access interface is composed of the three following circuits, for which data flow direction depends
on the role given to the interface (DTE or DCE):
Name Description T390 as DCE T390 as DTE
T Transmission circuit Input Output
R Reception circuit Output Input
S Signal element timing Output Input
This is a 15-pin connector, of which details are given below:
Sub D 15 Points Female Right angle (Metallic connector)
Pin allocation:
Depending on the role given to the interface (DTE or DCE), the pin assignment differs. Details are given
in the table below for an interface being used as DCE:

Pinning Circuit DCE
(ISO 4903) (X24)
1
2 Transmit (A) TA In
3
4 Receive (A) RA Out
5
6 Timing RD (A) SRA Out
7 Timing TD (A) STA In/Out
8 V11_GND G
9 Transmit (B) TB In
10
11 Receive (B) RB Out
12
13 Timing RD (B) SRB Out
14 Timing TD (B) STB In/Out
15
Case Shield Case / Earth
If the interface is used as DTE, input and output pins must be swapped.
Figure 28: V11 connector

V11/X24 Interface
(ISO 4903)
1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10
3 R(B)
11
4 R(A)
12
5 S(B)
13
S(A)
6 S'(B)
14
7 S'(A)
15
8
S' : transmitter clock circuit

for non-standard use
Figure 29: V11 connector pin-out
11.7 RS 232 P6 to P9 connectors

This is a 9-pin connector, of which details are given below:
Sub D 9 Points Female Right angle (Metallic connector)
Figure 30: RS232 connectors

Pin allocation is given in Figure 31:

Figure 31: RS232 pin-out
11.8 Service Phone P13 connector (RJ11)

This interface allows complete phone services such as dialling, hook/unhook detection. A buzzer on-
board replaces the ring generator.
The connector is an RJ11 connector, of which details are given below.
The 4-pole right-angle RJ11 maintenance telephone connector is shown in Figure 32, along with its pin-
out following pin-out:
Figure 32: Maintenance handset connector and pin-out
Pin Name Direction Comments

1 NC
2 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires maintenance handset access
3 b (Trip) in/out
4 NC
Case MGROUND To mechanical ground

11.9 Speech Channels P14 to P16 connectors
The connector is an RJ45 connector, of which details are given below:
RJ45 Right angle mounted, 8-pole unshielded
The 8 poles, right-angle RJ45 speech connector is a combination of three different interfaces, as
follows:
▪ Analog (ab, cd)
▪ 4 Opto isolated input (DC voltage sensitive, 1 Wire).
▪ 1 Relayed isolated output (DC Voltage 1 wire output).
The pin-out is the following.
Figure 33: Speech connector pin-out
Figure 34: Speech connectors

1 not connected
2 X in X wire (compandor switch)
3 M in M wire
4 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires access, Receive (output) 4 wires
access.
5 b (Trip) in/out
6 c in Transmit 4 wires access
7 d in
8 E out E wire
Case MGRND To mechanical ground

11.10 Reference Voltage P17 connector
11.10.1 Reference input access for telephone circuits
Connector to input the reference voltages for the IC5 inputs (VREFIN) and OC5 outputs (VREFOUT).
The VREFIN and VREFOUT potentials will generally be of opposite polarities. These inputs will be
protected against common mode voltages with varistors, and protected against over-current with
resettable POLYSWITCH fuses.
The earth reference internally connected to the mechanical ground is provided on the connector.
11.10.2 Characteristics
Min Typ. Max Unit Notes

Input level +17 +48 +72 VDC 48V/60V nominal
Input current 500 mA
Insulation 1000 Vrms
11.10.3 Connectors
The connector reference is WAGO 231-433 (Male, 3 points, 5 mm, Right angle).
The reference voltage pinout is given in the table hereafter.
Pin Signal
1 VREFOUT (in) + Positive

2 MECA GRND (out)
3 VREFIN (in) – Negative
Figure 35: Reference voltage connector
11.10.4 Wiring recommendation

The references connector P17 has to be connected to the PABX.

12. TPI Physical description
12.1 Board top view
Remove the case top panel. The TPI mother board is similar to the following picture.
Input Input
Daughter Daughter
Board (1) Board (2)
COM Daughter Board
Legend
Red line: Jumper set for input range
Green Line: Input mode jumpers
Yellow line: Daughter boards location
Pink line: Optical connector
Blue line: Digital Communication connector
Brown Line: RJ45 Ethernet Connector
Figure 36: T390 TPI MOTHERBOARD TOPVIEW

Figure 37: T390 TPI INPUT JUMPERS
12.2 Digital Communication interface

3 sets of interface boards are available for the digital electrical communication.
These boards are compatible with the DIP digital daughter boards.
Board Standard
IR179 V11
IR173 G703-6
IR180 G703-1

13. TPI Connectors Description
The following table identifies all the TPI unit connectors:
Pin Description Pin Description
P1 Command input P2 Command input
P3 Output (N/O) P4 Output (N/O)
P5 Output (N/O – N/C) P6 Output (N/O – N/C)
P7 Power supply P8 Unit chain in
P9 Unit chain out P10 Optical (Tx and Rx)
P11 Communication medium (V11/X24, P12 Ethernet Connector
G.703.1, G.703.6)
TABLE 2: TPI unit connectors
13.1 Back panel

Power supply
Output contacts NO/NC

Output contacts NO
8 insulated inputs
P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
D0666ENA
Figure 38: T390 TPI back panel connectors
13.2 Input contacts

The T390 –TPI has 8 insulated inputs.
The input voltage range is selectable by jumpers JP50 to 64
The current direction (+/-) does not matter.
13.2.1 Input contacts

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

Connector P1 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2 P2
Pin 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8
TABLE 3: input contact table
13.2.2 Input range

JP (Jumper number) 64 62 60 58 56 54 52 50
TABLE 4: Input range jumpers table

Tolerance +10%, -20%
Input Range (nominal)
1-2 24 Vdc
3-4 48 - 60 Vdc
5-6 110 - 127 Vdc
7–8 220 - 250 Vdc default value
TABLE 5: input range table
13.2.3 Input mode

All the input mode jumpers (JP 82 to 89) must be set to position 1-2.
Other positions are for future use.

JP 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82
TABLE 6: input mode table
13.3 Output contacts

Two kinds of output contacts are available:
▪ 8 Normally Open for command purpose (P3/P4)
▪ 6 NO/Normally Closed suitable for alarms AND/OR commands (P5/P6)
13.3.1 Output contacts

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8
P3 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
P4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8

TABLE 7: Normally open output contacts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO
P5 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11
P6 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14
TABLE 8: Normally open/normally closed output contacts
13.3.2 Output mode

The output contacts are configurable by jumpers. In default mode, the electromechanical relay
operates in parallel with the static relay.
To disable the static outputs of the daughter board, set the jumper to position 2-3.
The additional delay if the static relays are disabled is about 7 ms at the opening and 4 ms at the
closing.
NO relays
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8
JP 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66
TABLE 9: normally open output settings

NO/NC relays
OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14
JP 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
TABLE 10: normally open/normally close output settings
NOTE: The use of electromechanical relays as single output is recommended only in case of
resistive load. In other cases, use the combined output (jumpers in position 1-2).
13.4 Power Supply P7 connector

The fuse location is easy to find and for replacing it (2xAT), as shown in Figure 39.

Fuse
Figure 39: Power Supply Board
13.5 Front panel

This section describes the physical appearance of the front panel with its various interfaces, connectors.
LED indicator description is given in the Maintenance and Measures Manual.
Digital Communication SFP transceiver

Medium
LVDS Internal Bus Ethernet Plug
Figure 40: front panel connectors
13.5.1 Unit Chain P8 and P9 connectors

Unit Chain Connectors are identical for every unit in a T390 system. Description is given in section
4.2.2.2: LVDS Inter-unit connector.
13.5.2 Communication medium connector P11

The P11 communication medium interface uses a Sub D 15-Pin female right-angle metallic connector
for the electrical communication options V11, G.703.1, and G.703.6.
The pin-out for each of these is different and is described under the relevant heading in the paragraphs
that follow.
13.5.2.1 V11/X24
This interface offers up to 64kbps transmission capabilities. The access interface is composed of the
three following circuits, for which data flow direction depends on the role given to the interface (DTE or
DCE):

1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10 R(B)
3 R(A)
11
4
12
5
13 S(B)
6 S(A)
14
7
15 S'(B)
8 S'(A)
S' : transmitter clock circuit

for non-standard use
Figure 41: Communication medium connector

The pin-out for a V.11 connection is given in Table 29:
Pin-out Circuit DTE
(ISO 4903) (X24)
1
2 Transmit (A) TA Out
3 Receive (A) RA In
4
5
6 Timing RD (A) SA In
7
8 Timing TD (A) S’A Out
9 Transmit (B) TB Out
10 Receive (B) RB In
11
12
13 Timing RD (B) SB In
14
15 Timing TD (B) S’B Out
Case Shield Case / Earth
TABLE 11: V.11 pin-out

If the interface is used as DCE, input and output pins must be swapped.
The signal S’ is a non-standard feature.
13.5.2.2 G.703.1
This interface offers up to 64 kbps transmission capabilities.
1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10 R(B)
3 R(A)
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
Figure 42: G703.1 Interface pin out
The pin-out for a G.703.1 connection is given in the following table:

Pin Name Signal Designation Pin Name Signal Designation
1 nc
2 T(A) out Transmit (A) 9 T(B) out Transmit (B)
3 R(A) in Receive (A) 10 R(B) inIn Receive (B)
4 nc 11 nc
5 nc 12 nc
6 nc 13 nc
7 nc 14 nc
8 nc 15 nc
TABLE 12: G703-1 Co directional interface connection
13.5.2.3 G.703.6
This interface offers up to 2 Mbps transmission capabilities.

1
9 Tx +
2 Tx -
10 Rx +
3 Rx -
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
Figure 43: G703.6 Interface 2 Mbps
The pin-out for a G.703.6 connection is given in Table 31:

Pin Name Signal Pin Name Signal Designation
Designation
1 nc
2 Tx - out Transmit (A) 9 Tx+ out Transmit(B)
3 Rx - in Receive (A) 10 Rx + in Receive (B)
4 nc 11 nc
5 nc 12 nc
6 nc 13 nc
7 nc 14 nc
8 nc 15 nc
TABLE 13: G703-6 pin-out
13.5.3 Optical connector

Small Form-Factor PlugableA cage is available on the TPI to plug in SFP modules for the optical
communication.
Two types of SFP are compatible:
▪ Multimode with 850nm wavelength for C3794 compatible communication
▪ Single mode with 1550nm/1310nm wavelength for long distance communication
These plugs do not require any special configuration.
They are hot swappable.

13.5.4 Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet Connector is only used for maintenance and monitoring purpose (SNMP).

14. Cabinet installation instructions
WARNING: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE
FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENT OF THE SAFETY SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION, AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
14.1 Foreword
This section is focused to the T390 equipment, but covers also related equipment that could be
connected to, such as DIP teleprotection equipment, modems, protocols or interface converters.
The T390 is a full range of products designed to cover the power utilities’ needs. The complete project is
suitable for conventional analog transmission & services as well as new digital services as noted in the
Cigré PLC report:
“Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000”.
This document aims at giving some rules and guidelines to install properly T390 equipment within a
substation
14.2 Standards - Norms

Name Comments
IEC 60495 1993 edition
IEC 60834-1 Edition 2.0 (1999-10)
Cigré report Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000
IEC 60663 Manual for planning of (SSB) PLC systems: Part 1 PLC systems (1980)
IEC TS 61000-6-5 Generic standards - immunity for power station and substation
environments
EN60950-1 Demonstrating compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive
EN60255-27 Demonstrating compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive
IEC ou EN 61000-6-4 Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
EN 55011 limits of conducted radio disturbance
EN 55022 limits of radiated radio disturbance
UIT-T (V,X)

14.3 Instructions relevant to the power supply
Main supply of T390 is 48Vdc (38 to 72Vdc).
Each piece of equipment shall be connected to 3 wire circuit breaker (+bat, -bat and protective [earth]
conductor terminal (PCT)). The PCT is marked on the rear of the T390 with the symbol:
For all other equipments placed within the cubicle, such as Teleprotection, modems, the Star supply
scheme should be used for connection.
Use a separate circuit breaker to protect each system. In general application we will have:
▪ Circuit 1: T390 equipments (2 to 10 units)
=> Unipolar 10A 127Vdc (type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
▪ Circuit 2: DIP equipment
=> Unipolar 4A 127Vdc (type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
▪ Circuit 3: Modems and ancillaries equipments
=> Unipolar 10A 127Vdc (ancillaries equipments type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
▪ Other circuits if needed.
Node of star connection should be placed at the wiring input of the cubicle, close to ground bar (earth
connection).
The power supply cables could be unshielded inside the cubicle, if the cubicle is completely shielded.
The power supply cables entering the cubicle must be shielded and the screen connected to earth
where they enter the cubicle. This is to ensure that the EMC and electrical isolation design requirements
are maintained.
Each cubicle should be powered by a separate cable from the main 48V battery source, with always the
same star scheme.
The cabinet cabling scheme is depicted below. In this figure, we could see:
▪ The protection devices placed closed to the arrival of cable (at the input of the cabinet)
▪ A solid copper bar to minimize the ground impedance at each point within the cabinet and
ensure that all equipment is at the same potential
▪ Equipment shall be connected to a 3 wire circuit breaker (+bat, -bat and protective [earth]
conductor)
▪ Each T390 unit shall be connected to the protective (earth) bar using a large cross section braid.
This shall be securely connected to the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) using an M4
screw and flat washer. The PCT is marked on the rear of the T390 with the symbol:
▪ A split ferrite sleeve, with snap fit plastic case should be fitted around the power supply
cable(s), either at the cable entry or between the input terminal and the circuit breaker. This is
to ensure that the EMC design requirements are maintained.

Cubicle
T390
Ground
AMPLIFIER
UNIT From circuit
Coax Bat
breaker
10A/127Vdc
T390 To circuit
PRCS breakers
UNIT
Protection
services
devices
User
-
+
Cubicle Ground
From From From

MDF Batterie LMU
14.4 Electrical protection

Using Manufacturer Reference
Battery protection devices Littlefuse V120ZA20
RF line protection devices Littlefuse V250LA40
Circuit breaker Merlin Gerin C32H-DC
14.5 Instructions relative to the thermal aspects

Leave at least 1U space between each unit of T390 equipment and from other ones. This space could be
useful for wire fixing systems.
Place a FAN equipment at the top of the cabinet to generate a continuous air flow through all PLC units
to equalize the temperature in the cabinet.

It is possible to insert a thermostat (set to 45°C) in the FAN supply circuit, if the forced ventilation is not
always required due to room air conditioning.
14.6 Instructions relative to the mechanical layout

There is not a strong constraint relative to the mechanical disposition of equipment inside the cabinet,
but we recommend the following layout:
TOP of cabinet
FAN equipement
1U wire pass-through panels
3U T390
Amplifier
T390
2U
Processing
Internal Teleprotection unit
1U T390 TPI
External Teleprotection
3U DIP equipement
1U MD50 modem
Bottom of cabinet
Figure 44: Cabinet Layout
In case of use of additional AMPX amplifier for 80W we recommend to 2U spacing with the main
amplifier
Amplifier radiator being on the left side (front view) it is recommended to put the more cooling on this
side and like insure an air flow in the cabinet.

15. Wiring instructions
15.1 General principle for Telecom room wiring
Use only shielded & closed cabinet for all telecom equipments, and use separate power supply wires for
each cabinet in the room.
Use large section cable for power supply connection to ensure all equipment is at the same potential. If
necessary, double or triple the power supply cable between the battery charger and each cabinet.
Use large copper braid for all ground connection.
Connections should be kept as short as possible.
Create distinct conduits for each kind of signal level & frequencies. For instance, use separate conduit
for:
▪ Conduit 1: power supply cables (continuous voltage 24 to 127Vdc)
▪ Conduit 2: RF line
▪ Conduit 3: telephony, pbx, modems, telegraphs wiring
▪ Conduit 4: connection between teleprotection and protection
▪ Conduit 5: General 230Vac distribution
Take care about the curving of cables, and avoid bending the cables
Care about the cable environment in the conduit:
▪ Presence of water or other liquids
▪ Contact with aggressive of corrosive substances
15.2 Screens, Shielding

All connections should be properly shielded, and the shield well connected to earth.

15.3 Grounding
T390
Cubicle
LMU
Copper
braid
Copper
braid Armoured
coaxial
Station
Ground
Grid
Ground cable sections to be used according to associated current values:

Cable section mm² Associated Current ADC
16 I < 50
25 50 < I < 70
70 130 < I < 160
95 160 < I < 180
120 180 < I < 1000
NOTE: The indicated sections are related to a maximum length of 50 m.

Figure 45: Dc supply and rf cable connections
15.4 LMU connection

We highly recommend using a LMU coupling box with the T390 equipment.
We recommend a phase to phase connection whenever is possible.
15.5 Protection & galvanic isolation

Except the RF line, already discussed, the various connections to the PLC should follow the following
rules:
▪ All connection inside the T390 cabinet are direct (without isolation) through shielded cables
▪ All connection within the telecom room should be properly shielded, made as short as possible,
put far away from other kind of signal to avoid crosstalk or disturbance (power cables, HF, high
voltage cables, etc)
▪ All connection that exit the telecom room should distinctly studied and additional rules applied:
Care about the voltage reference or each side, especially if different batteries are used
Add galvanic isolation (such as transformers) in case of long distance, earth equipotential
breaks, etc
Always use for instance a galvanic isolation for connection to external substation networks.

Gridcom T390
Commissioning
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Commissioning
CONTENTS
1. Overview ........................................................................................................ 5
2. Commissioning Procedure ............................................................................... 6
2.1 Commissioning Procedure scheme .......................................................................................6
2.2 Commissioning step by step: System Reception................................................................... 7
2.3 Commissioning step by step: Hardware Mounting ................................................................ 7
2.4 Commissioning step by step: Connection ............................................................................. 7
2.5 Commissioning step by step: Amplifier Settings ...................................................................8
2.6 Commissioning step by step: Amplifier Line Settings ...........................................................8
2.7 Commissioning step by step: Analog channel ..................................................................... 10
2.8 Commissioning step by step: Digital Channel ..................................................................... 10
2.9 Commissioning step by step: Network Services .................................................................. 11
3. AMP Configuration and settings .................................................................... 12

3.1 Configuration procedure ..................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Hardware settings overview ................................................................................................ 13
3.2.1 RX Filter board ...............................................................................................................................13
3.2.2 TX Filter board .............................................................................................................................. 14
3.2.3 HF access impedance settings ....................................................................................................... 17
3.2.4 Settings for AMP – AMPX connection .......................................................................................... 18
3.3 Filter settings ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.3.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................... 18
3.3.2 Test bench .................................................................................................................................... 19
3.4 Transmission filter settings ................................................................................................. 19
3.4.1 Precisions on filter parameters ..................................................................................................... 19
3.4.2 TXF board jumpers setting ........................................................................................................... 20
3.4.3 TXF board filter tuning .................................................................................................................. 22
3.5 Reception filter settings ......................................................................................................26
3.5.1 RXF board jumpers setting............................................................................................................ 26
3.5.2 RXF board filter tuning ................................................................................................................. 27
3.6 Filter settings: tip to tune quickly the coils .......................................................................... 30
3.6.1 Tuning TX filter ............................................................................................................................. 30
3.6.2 Tuning RX filters ............................................................................................................................31
3.7 Software parameter settings ............................................................................................... 32
3.7.1 Hardware configuration ................................................................................................................ 32
3.7.2 Configuration Window .................................................................................................................. 32
3.7.3 R.F. Stage configuration ................................................................................................................33
3.7.4 Misc and Alarm ..............................................................................................................................33
3.7.5 Advanced ...................................................................................................................................... 34
3.8 Hybrid Settings ................................................................................................................... 35
3.9 FSK Position ........................................................................................................................ 41
Gridcom T390 1 Commissioning

4. AMPX Configuration and settings .................................................................. 42
4.1 Configuration procedure .....................................................................................................42
4.2 Hardware Settings ..............................................................................................................42
4.2.1 Jumper configuration for TX boards for AMP and AMPX units...................................................... 43
4.2.2 HF access impedance settings ...................................................................................................... 44
4.2.3 Filters settings .............................................................................................................................. 44
4.3 R.F. stage configuration with the HMI .................................................................................44
5. PRCS Configuration and settings ................................................................... 46

5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................46
5.2 Analog services ...................................................................................................................46
5.2.1 General workflow ......................................................................................................................... 46
5.2.2 Speeches and telegraphs .............................................................................................................. 47
5.2.3 MTU ............................................................................................................................................. 49
5.2.4 Teleprotections ............................................................................................................................ 50
5.2.5 Check Coherency .......................................................................................................................... 51
5.3 Digital services .................................................................................................................... 51
5.3.1 General workflow.......................................................................................................................... 51
5.3.2 Encoder ........................................................................................................................................ 52
5.3.3 Speeches ...................................................................................................................................... 52
5.3.4 Data.............................................................................................................................................. 53
5.3.5 V11................................................................................................................................................ 54
5.3.6 Lan2lan......................................................................................................................................... 55
5.3.7 Check the gauge ........................................................................................................................... 56
5.3.8 Fallback ........................................................................................................................................ 56
5.4 User Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 57
5.5 Network services ................................................................................................................. 57
6. TPI configuration and settings ....................................................................... 59

6.1 General workflow ................................................................................................................60
6.2 Configuration step by step .................................................................................................. 61
6.2.1 Services ........................................................................................................................................ 61
6.2.2 Window TPI / Main ....................................................................................................................... 61
6.2.3 Window TPI / Communication path .............................................................................................. 61
6.2.4 Window TPI / Input commands..................................................................................................... 61
6.2.5 Window TPI / Output commands.................................................................................................. 61
6.3 TPI / communication path / Digital configuration ................................................................62
6.4 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case Dual Tone Mode ............................62
6.4.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX .................................................................. 62
6.4.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX ................................................................. 63
6.5 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case Mixed tone Mode ..........................64
6.5.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX .................................................................. 64
6.5.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX ................................................................. 64
6.6 Apply configuration ............................................................................................................ 65
6.7 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case ................................................................ 65
6.8 Maintenance AGC init ......................................................................................................... 65

6.9 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration ONLY in analog case .............................66
6.10 Apply configuration...........................................................................................................66
6.11 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case. Check levels .........................................66
7. DIP Connection to HMI .................................................................................. 67

7.1 Instructions relative to the cabinet installation .................................................................... 67
7.2 Instructions relative to wiring .............................................................................................. 67
7.3 Instructions relative to Firmware configuration ...................................................................68
7.3.1 Safety presence and alarms : PLC side .......................................................................................... 68
7.3.2 Safety presence and alarms : DIP side ........................................................................................... 70
7.3.3 Configuration of teleprotection levels : PLC side ............................................................................ 71
7.3.4 Configuration and teleprotection levels : DIP side ......................................................................... 72
7.4 Annexes .............................................................................................................................. 78
7.4.1 Physical units ................................................................................................................................ 78
7.4.2 Standard TPHF levels table configuration ..................................................................................... 79
7.4.3 How to compute the max power output of DIP ............................................................................. 80
7.4.4 Why using the « boost » option and how ...................................................................................... 81
7.4.5 In case of line distorsion, how equalize the Tones / What is the effect of PLC equalizer ? .............. 81
8. Point to Multipoint (PTM) configuration ....................................................... 82

8.1 Scope ..................................................................................................................................82
8.2 Point to Point mode ............................................................................................................82
8.3 Point to Multipoint Mode .................................................................................................... 83
8.4 Operating mode ................................................................................................................. 85
8.4.1 Star Topology ............................................................................................................................... 85
8.5 Software configuration .......................................................................................................86
8.5.1 Analog Mode ................................................................................................................................ 86
8.5.2 Digital Mode ................................................................................................................................. 88
9. Speech interface ........................................................................................... 90

9.1 Warning ..............................................................................................................................90
9.2 Analog vs digital mode ....................................................................................................... 91
9.3 Service Phone connector .................................................................................................... 91
9.4 Speech Channel Connector .................................................................................................92
9.5 Applications ........................................................................................................................ 93
9.5.1 Standard 2W phone ...................................................................................................................... 93
9.5.2 Transit between two PLC ............................................................................................................. 93
9.5.3 Transit of PABX ............................................................................................................................ 94
9.5.4 FXO/FXS Mode ............................................................................................................................. 95
9.6 Appendix: list of recommended handsets .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
10. Networking advanced features : Lan2lan .................................................... 97

10.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................ 97
10.2 System configuration ........................................................................................................ 97
10.3 LAN2LAN Activation overview ..........................................................................................98
10.4 Permanent network channel .............................................................................................99

10.5 Full band network channel (Maintenance mode)...............................................................99
10.5.1 Switch to lan2lan maintenance mode ....................................................................................... 100
10.5.2 Change configuration ................................................................................................................101
10.5.3 Exit from lan2lan maintenance ..................................................................................................103
10.6 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 103
11. Networking advanced features : SNMP ..................................................... 104

11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 104
11.2 PLC Configuration ........................................................................................................... 104
11.3 SNMP Management ........................................................................................................ 104
11.4 MIB (Management Information Base) ............................................................................. 105
11.5 SNMP architecture .......................................................................................................... 105
11.6 SNMPc configuration ...................................................................................................... 106
11.6.1 MIB copy ................................................................................................................................... 106
11.6.2 Launch SNMPc .......................................................................................................................... 107
11.6.3 MIB compil ................................................................................................................................. 107
11.6.4 New equipment ......................................................................................................................... 107
11.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 110
12. Adjacent Mode for 8+8kHz ........................................................................ 111

12.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 111
12.2 Hardware configuration .................................................................................................. 111
12.2.1 General Configuration ............................................................................................................... 111
12.2.2 Tx filter ...................................................................................................................................... 111
12.3 HMI Configuration ........................................................................................................... 112
12.3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration ..................................................................................................112
12.3.2 Internal Noise Measurement...................................................................................................... 113
13. Adjacent Mode for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX) ..................................................... 114

13.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 114
13.2 Hardware configuration .................................................................................................. 114
13.2.1 TX filter ......................................................................................................................................114
13.3 HMI Configuration ........................................................................................................... 115
13.3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration ................................................................................................... 115
13.3.2 Noise Measurement ................................................................................................................... 115
14. Superimposed Mode ................................................................................. 116

14.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 116
14.2 Discussion about the choice of the transmission mode ................................................... 116
14.3 Precautions ......................................................................................................................117
14.3.1 Line adaptation .......................................................................................................................... 117
14.3.2 Line attenuation ........................................................................................................................ 118
14.4 Discussion about the installation..................................................................................... 118
14.4.1 The power in the reception line ..................................................................................................118
14.4.2 Rejection Capacity ..................................................................................................................... 118

1. Overview
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment online, that is to say:
▪ Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system
▪ System integrators
▪ Field engineer
The document is made as follows.

▪ In section 2, the general commissioning procedure is given.
▪ In section 3, the Amplifier configuration and setting is detailed, in particular the TXF and RXF
boards setting is completely explained.
▪ In section 4, the AMPX configuration is described.
▪ In section 5, the PRCS configuration is described.
▪ In section 6, the TPI configuration is described.
The 4 next chapters are dedicated to particular functionalities of the PLC:
▪ In section 7, DIP connection to the PLC.
▪ In section 8, The Point to Multipoint Configuration.
▪ In section 9, Speech interface.
▪ In sections 10 and 11, the Network Advanced Features are described.
The 4 latest chapters are dedicated to 3 particular modes of the amplifier:
▪ In section 12, Adjacent mode for 8+8kHz.
▪ In section 13, Adjacent mode for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX).
▪ In section 14, Superimposed mode.

2. Commissioning Procedure
2.1 Commissioning Procedure scheme
The following diagram is an overview of all the steps to perform for a complete T390 setting. Every step
is detailed below. Check the validity of the step before going to the next one
START
EQUIPMENT
RECEPTION
HARDWARE
MOUNTING
CONNECTION
AMPLIFIER
SETTING
LINE
SETTINGS
TP/ANALOG
CHANNEL
SERVICES
NETWORK
SERVICES
CHECK LIST

2.2 Commissioning step by step: System Reception
START
CHECKING
1. CHECKING: a quick check must ensure that
there is no visible damage due to the
EQUIPMENT
RECEPTION shipment and that the test report is ok. The
test report also provides the IP of the rack
SYSTEM
COHERENCY 2. SYSTEM COHERENCY: Each system is
composed by two or more racks. The test
HARDWARE report gives the serial number of one
MOUNTING system. They must be recompose
STEP OK? identically
2.3 Commissioning step by step: Hardware Mounting
EQUIPMENT
RECEPTION
CABINET 1. CABINET INSTALLATION: Precautions
INSTALLATION must be taken, especially for grounding.
Refer to the Installation User guide for
details
HARDWARE
MOUNTING SYSTEM 2. SYSTEM INSTALLATION: The wiring for
INSTALLATION power supply, Line , LVDS cable are
described in the Installation User guide.
LVDS cable can be connected/disconnected
STEP OK?
only when the equipment is switched
CONNECTION off.
You can switch on the systems
2.4 Commissioning step by step: Connection

HARDWARE
MOUNTING
PC CONFIGURATION
The I.P. of each rack is written on the test report.
If not, the default I.P. is 10.22.171.200
1. PC CONFIGURATION
CONNECTION 2. CONNECTION: If the system is mounted
CONNECTION correctly, by connecting to one of the rack,
you can access to the whole system
3. KEY INSTALLING: install the keys
KEY
INSTALLING according to the option you chose.
You can check it directly in the menu
AMPLIFIER
HELP, ABOUT, INSTALLED KEYS
SETTING
If you only detect one rack at the connection,
STEP OK?
check the coherency of the system and the
software release.
2.5 Commissioning step by step: Amplifier Settings
CONNECTION
1. HMI CONFIGURATION: configure ONLY
IHM configuration the amplifier rack, in order to set the
frequencies (TX, RX) and the transmission
power. Uncheck the option Enable Amplifier
in the Misc and alarm tab
AMPLIFIER
SETTING Filter configuration 2. FILTER CONFIGURATION: Use a level
generator with a selective meter or a
spectral analyzer with a tracking generator
matched to 75 to measure the response.
LINE STEP OK?

SETTINGS
Check the option to enable the amplifier in the
configuration window
2.6 Commissioning step by step: Amplifier Line Settings

1. IN LINE TX POWER: The global Tx power
level must be adjusted to the desired value.
With a selective voltmeter, measure the level
of the FSK directly at the output of the
amplifier, on the test point situated on the
front side. The FSK level is by default 22dB
under the PEP. Adjust the level (HF
ADJUST) to get the right value.
2. FREQUENCY PRECISION: In the
maintenance tool, go to OFFLINE
MAINTENANCE and send a tone a 0Hz, -
20dB. It will be emitted at the center of the
band. Check the frequency precision with
AMPLIFIER
the selective voltmeter and correct the
Tx power emission frequency in the configuration
SETTING
window if necessary. Keep the tone for the
next step
3. HYBRID REJECTION: connect the
Frequency
selective voltmeter to the test point of the
precision
hybrid board in the amplifier unit- and tune
the hybrid to get the minimum reinjection.
WARNING: This tuning has to BE performed
Hybrid on line
LINE rejection 4. SNR COMPUTATION: Scan the line and
SETTINGS
find the quieter frequency band to measure
the noise, this is inband by default but you
can also choose to measure outband
SNR computation At the end of this step: the system amplifier must
synchronise: in the measure window, you should
get RUNNING in the status of the Medium
training of the System Diagnosis
TP/ANALOG AGC initialisation 5. AGC INITIALISATION : If the status of the
CHANNEL
medium training is not “running”, but “Wait
for carrier” or “bad”, go in window
“Maintenance”/ “Auto Gain Control” in
STEP OK? “AGC stored value”, check “enabled” and
decrease the AGC init value: “7” is a good
value in case of low attenuation line. Then
push “apply and save” (see picture below).
Select tab “Misc” and click on “Reboot”.
If the system remains in the same status
after one minute running, repeat step 6.
AGC INITIALISATION with a new AGC init
value.
At the end of this step: the system amplifier

must synchronise: in the measure window, you
should get RUNNING in the status of the
Medium training of the System Diagnosis

Figure 1: AGC Initialisation
2.7 Commissioning step by step: Analog channel
LINE
SETTINGS
HMI
CONFIGURATION
If you do not have any analog band, go directly to
the next step
TP/ANALOG
1. HMI CONFIGURATION: enable the analog
Teleprotection/ channel on the T390 HMI, check the band
CHANNEL
Analog device
aligning
allocation
2. ANALOG SERVICES CONFIGURATION:
Add the services in the HMI and configure
them
SERVICES
3. TELEPROTECTION CONFIGURATION
STEP OK?
2.8 Commissioning step by step: Digital Channel

TP/ANALOG 1. HMI CONFIGURATION: Configure the HMI
CHANNEL in order to get the desired constellation and
DIGITAL
SYNCHRONISATION disable all the services (the used band must
be null). Apply, reboot and wait for the digital
synchronisation(In the diagnosis tab, the
QAM training status must be running)
SERVICES SERVICES 2. SERVICES CONFIGURATION: Add the

CONFIGURATION services in the HMI. Check that the
coherency number is equal on both sides.
3. SERVICES OPTION: Add the options of
SERVICES synchronisation like
OPTION
the alarms triggers,
NETWORK the fallback options,
SERVICES the lock on bad line
STEP OK?
2.9 Commissioning step by step: Network Services
SERVICES
1. LAN2LAN: follow the instruction in order to

LAN2LAN configure correctly the LAN2LAN access. It
NETWORK
also implies the remote access and the
SERVICES remote connectivity of the SNMP access.
2. SNMP: configure by the HMI in order to get
the desired number of traps. Unplug the
SNMP
LVDS cable in order to provoke an alarm in
order to check in your software if the traps
CHECK LIST are correctly configured
STEP OK?

3. AMP Configuration and settings
The amplifier unit accepts a range of settings for handling various site-related parameters or customer-
driven configurations. Some of these parameters are set during the manufacturing stage, some at
integration time (for example, if they depend on other units in the target T390 system), and some are
set during installation and service start-up time.
This section describes the setup of amplifier parameters, along with the operating mode, and lists the
mandatory or recommended steps with which configuration should be performed. It also includes
instructions for setting the various transmission parameters (frequency, power, modulation).
3.1 Configuration procedure

As the change of frequency must be performed by changing jumpers on the hardware AND by firmware
configuration, it is mandatory to follow the procedure described below to avoid damaging the
amplifier:
▪ Clear Enable Amplifier in the Misc and Alarm configuration tab
▪ Apply changes
▪ Shut down the system and wait for all LEDs to stop flashing
▪ Power off the unit and configure the hardware filters
▪ Check the cables, close the unit
▪ Restart the system and go back to the configuration tab
▪ Set up the new filter frequencies in the RF Stage tab
▪ Click Enable Amplifier
▪ Apply changes, after which the system will shut down
▪ Wait for all LEDs to stop flashing
▪ Configure the Software parameters
▪ Set up the hybrid board
▪
Caution: Take care during this procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier.

3.2 Hardware settings overview
The frequency bands, as well as the output impedance of the amplifier can be modified by setting the
jumper positions.
Modification of these settings is normally performed at manufacturing time, but they may need to be
modified later.
3.2.1 RX Filter board

Figure 2 shows the Rx filter board jumper positions:
Figure 2: RXF filter board jumper positions

Figure 3 shows the Rx filter board layout:

Figure 3: RXF filter board diagram
The three relays (RL1, RL2 & RL3) are activated automatically by the AFE board to adjust the AGC level,
when JP2 is closed.
For a short line, implying low attenuation, an additional attenuator of 12 dB can be included by opening
JP2 and closing JP6. The total attenuation can be up to 33 dB.
3.2.2 TX Filter board

Figure 4 shows the Tx filter board jumper positions:

Figure 4: TXF filter board jumper positions
Figure 5 shows the Tx filter board layout:

Commissioning
SMC Connector
for adjustment
Front Side access
Superimposed
SMC Connector to
Rx Filter Board Separated
RX1
Superimposed
or adjacent modes
Asymmetrical Hybrid
AGND transformer with
impedance adjusting
(front side access)
Figure 5: TXF filter board diagram

Za
Tx Filter input Tx Filter Output
Impedance Matching Impedance Matching
From AMP Board HFGND
Line Connector
Protections
Line Impedance
40W Superimposed Matching :
Tx Programmable Filtering
16
I/O =75 Ohms 80W Separated
AGND 50 / 75 / 125 / 150 Ohm
Balanced
Force capacitive
impedance Unbalanced
Tx / Rx Coupling for
current limiter
separated mode
Divider/
HFGND
RX2
SMC Connector on front HFGND
panel for 80 W connection. Main
40W Input when Main AMP Symmetrical Connection to
HFGND
40W Output when Aux AMP Hybrid transformer Mechanical Ground
Aux with balancing resistor
SMC Connector
To Front side
(Test point)
HFGND
HFGND
Gridcom T390
3.2.3 HF access impedance settings
The impedance on the HF output can be modified as follows using JP43, JP44, JP45, JP46, JP47, JP48,
and JP49 on the TXF board:
Figure 6: Impedance setting jumpers
Mode Impedance
Unbalanced 50 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP44:1-2, JP48:2-3, JP49:1-2
Balanced 50 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP44:1-2, JP48:2-3
NOTE: The unbalanced mode is characterized by a measure on the HF signal A with the HF
signal B at the ground. The balanced mode is characterized by signals between HF signal A and HF
signal B in the same time. The ground reference is the body of the connector.

NOTE: Mode (balanced or unbalanced), and impedance are taken into account in the jumper
configurator tool. See section 3.4.2: TXF board jumpers setting..
3.2.4 Settings for AMP – AMPX connection

To include an AMPX amplifier unit (“double power” mode) Jumpers 38 and 51 (see) must be set
according to the table below.
AMP stand alone AMP - AMPX
JP38: 2-3 closed 1-2, 3-4 open JP38: 2-3 open 1-2, 3-4 closed
JP51: 1-2 closed 2-3 open JP51: 1-2 closed 2-3 open
The jumper positions for the AMP-AMPX connection are shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7: AMP-AMPX connection jumpers
NOTE: The double power mode is taken into account in the jumper configurator tool. See
section 3.4.2: TXF board jumpers setting.
3.3 Filter settings

3.3.1 Overview
This section applies to all T390 amplifier products, including T390-AMP and T390-AMPX.

NOTE: The T390 transmission and reception filter can be tuned at any 100Hz step, between 24
kHz and 700 kHz, using the same straps of the closest standard transmission channels reported on the
jumper configuration tool.
NOTE: The the jumper configuration tool refers to an external configuration program TXF/RXF
board jumper setting, available on the CD provided with equipments, and also by HMI by clicking on
Help | TXF/RXF boards jumpers settings.
3.3.2 Test bench

The best way to tune the filter is to use a generic spectrum analyzer with a tracking generator.
The analyzer can be replaced by a selective voltmeter also equipped with a tracking generator, the
SMP31 / PSE31 from W&G (ACTERNA) is a good example, but any Generator / Level Meter couple
would be Ok if it provides the following settings:
▪ Input impedance of the level meter: 75Ω
▪ Selectivity of the level meter: 24 Hz
▪ Output Impedance of the generator: 75 Ω
In the following, the generator will be referred as TG and the level meter or analyzer will be referred as
LM.
3.4 Transmission filter settings

3.4.1 Precisions on filter parameters
The limitations on the lower frequency are the following:
▪ For 4 kHz and 5 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 22 kHz (lower filter is 20 - 24 kHz
for the 4 kHz BW and 20 - 25 kHz BW)
▪ For 8 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 24 kHz (lower filter is 20 - 28 kHz)
▪ For 16 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 48 kHz (lower filter is 40 -
56 kHz)
The real bandwidth of the filters and the tapping loss mask are depending on the position of the central
frequency between 22 and 700 kHz. They are summarized in the following table:
Fc is the central frequency and dF is the distance from the central frequency (up or down) where the
tapping loss becomes lower than 1.5 dB.
4 / 5 kHz BW
Fc (kHz) Useful BW dF (kHz)
22-200 5 kHz 9.5
201-320 8 kHz 13.5
321-500 8 kHz 15
501-700 16 kHz 34

8 kHz BW
24-47 8 kHz 9.5
48-320 8 kHz 14
321-500 8 kHz 15
501-700 16 kHz 34
16 kHz BW
48-200 16 kHz 30
201-700 16 kHz 34
NOTE: For a given useful bandwidth, the in-band loss increases with the center frequency. If
the main concern is the output power, the useful bandwidth above should be preferred in the upper
part of the frequency range.
3.4.2 TXF board jumpers setting

Use the TXF/RXF board jumper configurator, available on the CD provided with equipments, and
also by HMI by clicking on Help | TXF/RXF boards jumpers settings.
Figure 8: link to jumper configurator by the CD
Figure 9: link to jumper configurator by HMI

First step – Choosing the module version and the power settings
Figure 10: TXF board jumper setting
First select the version of the board, TXFA or TXFB. If TXFB is selected, there are no other options. For a
TXFA module, select the normal option if it is aimed to be used alone or the Double Power option if the
board is to be connected to an AMPX module. Then choose the output impedance, which can be 50 to
150 Ω balanced or unbalanced. The preferred selections are 75 Ω unbalanced or 150 Ω balanced modes.
Second step – Central frequency and bandwidth
Enter the central frequency and the bandwidth of the required filter. The spreadsheet will automatically
propose the best jumpers setting.
The minimum value of the central frequency depends on the bandwidth selected and must be in the
following range:
Bandwidth Minimum Central frequency
4 kHz or 5 kHz 22 kHz

8 kHz 24 kHz
16 kHz 48 kHz
32 kHz or 40 kHz 60 kHz
48 kHz or 50kHz 120 kHz
Set the jumpers and go to the following step: TXF filter tuning.
3.4.3 TXF board filter tuning

For commodity, in the following chapter, the TXF filter is supposed to be setup with an output
impedance of 75 Ω unbalanced.
If another impedance or mode is required, the preferred method is to do all tuning for 75 Ω unbalanced
and only at the end modify the impedance by changing the position of JP45 (corresponding to 75 Ω) to
JP44 (50 Ω), JP46 (125Ω) or JP47(150). For balanced mode, at the end of tunings remove the
JP49. If adapted instruments are available, you can also verify the tuning for those settings.
NOTE: A quick accurate method for tuning the TXF filters has been developed and is described
in section 3.6: Filter settings: tip to tune quickly the coils.
3.4.3.1 TXFA board test bench

NOTE: If the TXFA board is to be used with a AMPX module (double power option), just set the
jumpers in the single power mode for the tuning procedure. Don’t forget to replace the jumpers
(JP38, JP51) in the double power mode once the tuning is over.
▪ Disconnect all connections from and to TXF filter board.

▪ Set the hybrid jumpers on 75 Ω and tune the potentiometer P1 to its minimum value (Unscrew)
▪ Release the holding screws on the L1 and L2 coil
▪ Connect the TXFA board in the way displayed in Figure 11.
▪ Send a test tone at the central frequency of the filter Fc, and then adjust the two coils for the
minimum signal loss. Send tones at the frequencies Fc ± BandWidth/2 try to reach the best
symmetry on the edges of the band. Verify that the filter loss matches the value on the table
below. Note that the value of the admitted loss depends on the position of the T390 in the 20-
700 kHz band and on the bandwidth of the filter.

Tracking Generator
75 ohms
TG
Analyser
75 ohms
LM
D0565ENa
Figure 11: TXF connection to testbench

BW (kHz) Center Frequency Range (kHz) Maximum Loss (dB)
Min Max
22 100 1,25
4/5 100 250 2,00
250 320 3,00
24 100 1,00
100 350 2,00
8
350 500 3,00
500 700 4,50
48 200 1,20
200 400 1,50
16
400 500 2,00
500 700 3,00

Check that the filter frequency response matches the mask on the figure below. In these figures, CL is
the measured value of the loss at the center frequency Fc performed in previous step.
Level (dB)
B3 B3
B2 Fc B2
F (kHz)
CL
CL+A1
B1 B1
CL+A2
CL+A3
Figure 12: Out-Band Tx Filter frequency response mask
The parameters of the frequency response mask are given in the table below:
Bandwidth Frequency Range B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3

(kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB)
BW = 4 / 5 kHz 22 – 200 kHz 2.5 0.35 10 5 16 14
201 – 500 kHz 2.5 0.35 16 6 24 12
BW = 8 kHz 24 – 500 kHz 4 0.30 16 6 24 12
500 – 700 kHz 4 0.30 30 6 40 10
BW = 16 kHz 48 – 700 kHz 8 0,30 30 6 40 10
This table gives typical values.

Inside the band, the maximum value allowed for the loss is:
▪ A1 + 0.15dB
Outside the band, the minimum allowed values are:
▪ A2 – 1dB
▪ A3 – 1dB

TIP: The two coils L1 and L2 have theoretically the same self-inductance value. To avoid long blindly
search for the good filter response, the first step is to screw on (clockwise) the adjusting screws of the
coils until blocking. To perform the adjustment, try then to screw on or off the two tuning screws
alternately with the same number of turns.
3.4.3.2 TXFB board test bench

▪ Disconnect all connections from and to TXF filter board.
▪ Set the hybrid jumpers on 75 Ω and tune the hybrid potentiometer P1 to its minimum value
(Unscrew)
▪ Release the holding screws on the L1 and L2 coil
▪ Connect the TXFB board in the following way:
Tracking Generator
75 ohms
Analyser
75 ohms
D0567ENa
Figure 13: Tx Filter testbench
For tuning and checking refer to TXFA tuning above.

3.5 Reception filter settings
3.5.1 RXF board jumpers setting
Use the TXF/RXF board jumper configurator, available on the CD provided with equipments, and
also by HMI by clicking on Help | TXF/RXF boards jumpers settings.
Selecting the central frequency and bandwidth
Figure 14: RXF board jumper setting
▪ Enter the central frequency and the bandwidth of the required filter. The sheet will
automatically propose the best jumpers setting.
▪ The central frequency range allowed depends on the bandwidth selected and must be the
following:
Bandwidth Minimum Central frequency
2.5 kHz 22 kHz to 150 kHz
4 kHz or 5 kHz 22 kHz to 375 kHz (BW = 4)
376 kHz to 700 kHz (BW = 8)
8 kHz 24 kHz to 700 kHz

16 kHz 48 kHz to 700 kHz
32kHz and 40 kHz 60kHz to 675 kHz
48kHz and 50 kHz 120kHz to 675kHz
The 2.5 kHz bandwidth filters are used to cover the 2.5 kHz reception band in TX/RX 2.5 kHz adjacent
configuration. Above 150 kHz, or for double channel in the 2.5 kHz mode, use the 4/5 kHz filters.
▪ Set the jumpers in accordance with the sheet then go to the next step.
TIP: Some jumpers are set symmetrically on the board.
Identical symmetrical settings
Identical symmetrical settings Identical symmetrical settings

D0674ENa
Figure 15: RXF symmetrical settings
▪ Set the first attenuator jumpers in the following position: JP2 CLOSED - JP6 OPEN
3.5.2 RXF board filter tuning

Follow the procedure to tune the filter.

NOTE: A quick accurate method for tuning the RXF filters has been developed and is described
in section 3.6: Filter settings: tip to tune quickly the coils.
▪ Disconnect all connections from and to RXF filter board.

▪ Connect the RXF board in the following way:
Tracking Generator
75 ohms L1
TG
L3
Analyser L2
75 ohms
LM
D0568ENa
Figure 16: Rx Filter testbench
With the signal generator, send a tone at the central frequency Fc of the filter. Set the selective
voltmeter on this frequency, with a measurement bandwidth < 30 Hz. Then follow the steps of the
procedure below.
▪ Adjust the L3 coil to obtain the minimum attenuation on Fc
▪ Then, adjust alternatively L1 and L2 to obtain the minimum attenuation on Fc. At each step, it
is recommended to find the maximum level. Verify that the final loss matches the values of the
following table .
NOTE: the value of the admitted loss depends on the position of the T390 in the 40-500 kHz
band, and on the bandwidth selected.
▪
BW (kHz) Center Frequency Range (kHz) Maximum
Loss (dB)
Min Max
2.5 22 150 2.5
151 320 9
4/5 22 149 2
150 700 6
8 24 149 1.5

150 700 4
16 48 200 1
201 700 2.5
▪
▪ Next, taking the loss at Fc for reference, verify the value of the attenuation in the passband of
the filter. If necessary, adjust slightly L1 and L2.
▪ With the same reference, verify the value at the limit frequencies:
▪ Fc  8 kHz for 16 kHz bandwidth
▪ Fc  4 kHz for 8 and 4 kHz bandwidth (4 kHz BW for Fc > 375 kHz)
▪ Fc  2 kHz for 4 kHz bandwidth (4 kHz BW for Fc  375 kHz)
▪ Fc  1.25 kHz for 2.5 kHz bandwidth (For Fc  320 kHz)
▪ These values must be symmetrical. If it is not the case, adjust very slightly the L3 coil to restore
the balance.
▪ If the L3 coil has been adjusted in the previous step, verify the loss on Fc. If necessary, adjust
very slightly the L1 and L2 coil to find back the minimum loss.
▪ The adjustments must be done in a very precise way. It is recommended to use a small plastic
screwdriver and to be very meticulous. Verify that the filter frequency response matches the
masks on figure below. In the following figure, CL is the measured value of the loss at the
center frequency Fc performed in previous step.
Level (dB)
B3 B3
B2 Fc B2
F (kHz)
CL
CL+A1
B1 B1
CL+A2
CL+A3
Figure 17: Out-Band Rx Filter frequency response mask
The parameters of the frequency response mask are given in the table below:
Bandwidth Frequency Range B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3

(kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB)
BW = 2.5 kHz 24 – 320 kHz 1.5 0.8 5 12 8 20
BW = 4 / 5 kHz 22 – 375 2.5 0.8 7.5 6 12.5 17
376 – 700 kHz 2.5 0.8 14 6 25 20
BW = 8 kHz 24 – 49 kHz 4 0.8 8 6 16 20
50 – 700 kHz 4 0.8 14 6 25 20
BW = 16 kHz 48 – 58 kHz 8 0.8 14 6 22 15
48 – 700 kHz 8 0.8 28 8 32 11
This table gives typical values.

Inside the band, the maximum value allowed for the loss is:
▪ A1 + 0.15dB
Outside the band, the minimum allowed values are:
▪ A2 – 1dB
▪ A3 – 1dB
TIP: The two coils L1 and L2 have theoretically the same self-inductance value, while L3 is the
double of L1 and L2. To avoid long blindly search for the good filter response, the first step is to screw
on (clockwise) all the adjusting screws of the coils until blocking. Then begin with the search of a
maximum level with L3 and after; adjust L1 and L2 trying then to screw on or off both of them
alternately with the same number of turns.
3.6 Filter settings: tip to tune quickly the coils

This part describes a method to tune the filters on the boards TXF and RXF. The tuning has to be done
for a 75 Ω impedance and if the real impedance is different, the corresponding jumpers on TXF board
has to be moved only after TxF tuning.
3.6.1 Tuning TX filter

On the test bench:
▪ Set the level meter to selective and tune the frequency to the central frequency of the filter
▪ Set the level filter to the 24 Hz position
On the Filter:
▪ Set the jumpers following the Spreadsheet PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls
▪ Even for other impedance tuning, set the TXF jumpers in position 75 Ω
▪ Set the hybrid jumpers on 75 Ω and tune the hybrid potentiometer P1 to its minimum value
(Unscrew)
▪ Free the L1 and L2 nuts and screw the black button of L1 and L2 at the maximum

First step:
▪ Connect the A point of the test bench to the input of the filter (connector J1 "From AMP")
▪ Leave the output of the filter unconnected
▪ Unscrew the black button of inductance L1 to find a minimum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the minimum, just find it.
Second step:
▪ Connect the A point of the test bench to the output of the filter (HF Line)
▪ Leave the input of the filter unconnected
▪ Unscrew the black button of inductance L2 to find a minimum on the level meter
Third step:
▪ Come back to the usual measurement of the filter response. You should be very close to the
right tuning.
3.6.2 Tuning RX filters

On the test bench:
▪ Set the level meter to selective and tune the frequency to the central frequency of the filter
▪ Set the level filter to the 24 Hz position
On the Filter:
▪ Set the jumpers following the Spreadsheet PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-RXF-001.xls
▪ Screw the tuning of L1, L2 and L3 at the maximum
First step:
▪ Connect the A point of the test bench to the input of the filter (connector J1 "From Hybrid TXF")
▪ Leave the output of the filter unconnected
▪ Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L1 to find a minimum on the level meter
Second step:
▪ Connect the A point of the test bench to the output of the filter (connector J2 "OUTPUT")
▪ Leave the input of the filter unconnected
▪ Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L2 to find a minimum on the level meter
Third Step:
▪ Leave the connections as they are
▪ Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L3 to find a maximum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the maximum, just find it.

Fourth step:
▪ Come back to the usual measurement of the filter response. You should be very close to the
right tuning.
3.7 Software parameter settings

3.7.1 Hardware configuration
Select File|Configuration to make any required adjustments to the hardware configuration. The
following window will open.
Figure 18: Hardware window
In that window, follow the procedure

▪ Select the needed total bandwidth, consistent with the bandwidths configured on TXF and RXf
boards
▪ Select the PRCS mode (digital, analog or mixte)
▪ Check TPX is external teleprotection is needed
▪ If you have selected a mixte modes, choose the digital/analog band repartition if proposed
▪ Click Next to diplay the configuration window
3.7.2 Configuration Window

The following tabs are now available:

▪ R.F. Stage
▪ Miscellaneous and Alarm
▪ Advanced
The panel at the foot of the screen displays either a graphical representation of the amplifier rack front
panel or the HF distribution bandwidths (controlled by Show HF/Hide HF).
Figure 19: Show/Hide HF band
3.7.3 R.F. Stage configuration

In R.F. stage configuration window, configure Output power and TX and Rx center frequency.
Refer to HMI manual for description of each panel of the window.
Figure 20: R.F. Stage
3.7.4 Misc and Alarm

▪ To enable amplifier after filter configuration, click on enable amplifier
▪ Configure thresholds and delay for AGC alarm.
▪ Select SNR alarm threshold.
NOTE: When SNR alarm is reached, the led SNR switches on (yellow blinking).

Figure 21: Misc and Alarm
3.7.5 Advanced
▪ Configure power sharing between analog and digital band
Figure 22: Advanced tab

By default, the repartition is:
Digital Bandwidth
Digital Channel Ratio =
Total Bandwidth
Analog Bandwidth
Analog Channel Ratio =
Total Bandwidth
This is suitable in most cases, but when digital channel bandwidth is very higher that analog one, for
instance in case digital=40kHz and analog=4kHz, it is a good idea to change the repartition to ensure
that analog path gets power enough.
▪ Configure the Noise measure in panel SNR computation. Refer to HMI manual for tips on the
choice of SNR width and place.
3.8 Hybrid Settings

Hybrid tuning is performed after the software configuration because of the need to generate an
internal signal. This section describes the location of jumpers, the jumper configuration, and specifies
the steps for carrying out hybrid tuning.
Step 1
Open the front cover on the AMP unit, as in Figure 23, to reveal the hybrid board:
Figure 23: Location of hybrid board
Figure 24 identifies the connectors and jumper locations on the hybrid board:

Figure 24: Hybrid board
Step 2
Unplug HF Line (P4) and wait until Led “Line Fault” is red.
Step 3
In the Multitones menu of the Maintenance window, select “Single Tone Generator” and click on
“switch to maintenance mode”.

Figure 25: Maintenance/multitones
Step 4
Select “Tone 1” at frequency 0 (band centre) and amplitude -10.
Click on “Apply”.
Step 5
Plug HF Line (P4).
Step 6
Plug the selective voltmeter into the J4 connector (test point). Set the voltmeter on the center of the
band, with narrow band filter (24Hz for instance).
Step 7
Carry out the adjustment. The scope is to minimize the level in reception by selecting the
capacitors/resistors J7 and the Potentiometer P1.
Four jumper locations allow capacitor tuning, three locations allow resistor tuning, and one location can
be used to compensate an inductive line (Figure 26).

Capacitor Resistor
tuning tuning
Inductive line
compensation
Figure 26: Hybrid Board Front end
Step 7.1: Tuning the resistor values
a) Remove all jumpers and start with the default position of resistor/capacitor jumpers
(Table 1 and Table 2).
b) Select the jumper position corresponding to the expected line impedance in Table 1.
c) Tune the Potentiometer P1 to seek a minimum.
d) If no minimum is reached, try another resistor jumper position.
e) Repeat c) and d) until the absolute minimum is achieved on the selective voltmeter.
At the end of the tuning the difference between max and min should be at least 30dB.
Resistor tuning
Table 1 gives the J7 position depending on the impedance range of the line for an output impedance of
the amplifier module of 75 Ω.
NOTE: If the output impedance of the amplifier is n Ω, the impedance range in the Table 1
should be multiplied by n/75.
J7 Position Position Impedance range

17-18 ; 21-22 ; 25-26 22Ω - 88Ω
17-18 ; 21-22 53Ω - 120Ω (Default)
17-18 ; 25-26 89Ω - 155Ω
17-18 120Ω - 186Ω
21-22 ; 25-26 155Ω - 222Ω
21-22 186Ω - 253Ω
25-26 222Ω - 288Ω
No jumper 253Ω - 320Ω
Table 1: Resistor adjustment
NOTE: Fine tuning is achieved with the potentiometer P1, which has a variation scale of 0 to
200 ohms.
Step 7.2: Tuning the capacitor values

f) Try to add a capacitor value to minimize even more the transmission signal in the
reception stream in case of capacitive line, according to Table 2.
g) Tune the Potentiometer P1 to seek a minimum.
h) If no minimum is reached, try another capacitor jumper position.
i) Repeat f) and g) until the absolute minimum is achieved on the selective voltmeter.
At the end of the tuning the difference between max and min should be at least 30dB.
Capacitor tuning on hybrid board

Table 2 gives the J7 position depending on the capacitor value.
J7 Position Position Capacitor value (pF)
1-2 50 (Default)
5-6 100
1-3 ; 5-6 150
9-10 220

1-2 ; 9-10 270
5-6 ; 9-10 320
1-2 ; 5-6 ; 9-10 370
13-14 440
1-2 ; 13-14 490
5-6 ; 13-14 540
1-2 ; 5-6 ; 13-14 590
9-10 ; 13-14 660
1-2 ; 9-10 ; 13-14 710
5-6 ; 9-10 ; 13-14 760
1-2 ; 5-6 ; 9-10 ; 13-14 810
Table 2: Capacitor adjustment
Step 7.3: Compensate inductive line
j) If capacitor jumpers have no influence, the line could be more inductive than
capacitive.
An additional Jumper can be added in position 11-12 in case of inductive line.
k) If the jumper is added, tune the Potentiometer P1 to seek a minimum.
J7 Position Position Capacitor value (pF)
11-12 2200 pF
Step 8
At the end of the tuning, click on “Exit” in Maintenance/ Multitones window of the HMI.
Re-set the front cover on the AMP (Figure 23).

3.9 FSK Position
The pilot of the PLC is a FSK of which position can be checked if needed.
The following table gives the position of the idle and shift tones of the FSK vs the configuration.
Digital and Mixte
Digital Fsk center Master side Slave slide

BW frequency Idle Shift Idle Shift
50 kHz 25000 Hz Fc+(25000-30) Fc+(25000+30) Fc-(25000-30) Fc-(25000+30)
48 kHz 24000 Hz Fc+(24000-30) Fc+(24000+30) Fc-(24000-30) Fc-(24000+30)
40 kHz 20000 Hz Fc+(20000-30) Fc+(20000+30) Fc-(20000-30) Fc-(20000+30)
32 kHz 16000 Hz Fc+(16000-30) Fc+(16000+30) Fc-(16000-30) Fc-(16000+30)
16 kHz 7940 Hz Fc+(7940-30) Fc+(7940+30) Fc-(7940-30) Fc-(7940+30)
8 kHz 4000 Hz Fc+(4000-30) Fc+(4000+30) Fc-(4000-30) Fc-(4000+30)
4 kHz 2030 Hz Fc+(2030-30) Fc+(2030+30) Fc-(2030-30) Fc-(2030+30)
2 kHz 1080 Hz Fc+(1080-30) Fc+(1080+30) Fc-(1080-30) Fc-(1080+30)
1 kHz 590 Hz Fc+(590-30) Fc+(590+30) Fc-(590-30) Fc-(590+30)
Analog
Analog Fsk center Master side Slave side

BW frequency Idle Shift Idle Shift
8 kHz 3930 Hz Fc-(3930+30) Fc-(3930-30) Fc+(3930+30) Fc+(3930-30)
5 kHz 2430 Hz Fc-(2430+30) Fc-(2430-30) Fc+(2430+30) Fc+(2430-30)
4 kHz 1930 Hz Fc-(1930+30) Fc-(1930-30) Fc+(1930+30) Fc+(1930-30)
2.5 kHz 1190 Hz Fc-(1190+30) Fc-(1190-30) Fc+(1190+30) Fc+(1190-30)
2 kHz 930 Hz Fc-( 930+30) Fc-( 930-30) Fc+( 930+30) Fc+( 930-30)

4. AMPX Configuration and settings
The AMPX amplifier unit accepts a range of settings for handling various site-related parameters or
customer-driven configurations. Some of these parameters are set during the manufacturing stage,
some at integration time (for example, if they depend on other units in the target T390 system), and
some are set during installation and service start-up time.
This section describes the setup of AMPX parameters, identifies the operating mode, and lists
mandatory or recommended steps with which configuration should be performed. It also includes
instructions for setting transmission parameters (frequency, power, modulation).
4.1 Configuration procedure

CAUTION: Take care during this procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier.
As the change of frequency should be performed by jumpers on the hardware, it is mandatory to follow
the described 3-steps procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier mentioned under AMP
documentation.
4.2 Hardware Settings

Frequency bands, as well as output impedance used by the amplifier can be modified by changing
jumper positions.
Modifications of these settings are generally performed at manufacturing time, but they may need to
be modified later.

Figure 27: AMPX board
4.2.1 Jumper configuration for TX boards for AMP and AMPX units
AMP – AMPX
JP38: 1-2, 2-3 open 3-4 closed
JP51: 1-2 open 2-3 closed
The two jumpers JP38 and JP51 on the TXFA and TXFB boards from the AMP and AMPX units,
respectively, need to be modified to activate the power summation. Refer to the TXF/RXF Boards
Jumper configurator to set the jumper positioning.

Figure 28: AMP-AMPX connection jumpers
4.2.2 HF access impedance settings

The impedance on the HF output can be modified using JP43, JP44, JP45, JP46, JP47, JP48 and JP49 on
the TXF board. Use filter settings procedure of section 3: AMP Configuration and settings to set the
desired impedance.
4.2.3 Filters settings

Use filter settings procedure of section 3: AMP Configuration and settings for a description and
adjustment of HF filters.
4.3 R.F. stage configuration with the HMI

▪ Step1
Open the Software Configuration Window, select the AMP unit from the Units from PLC panel, and
then click R.F. Stage.
The screen shown in Figure 29 is displayed:

Figure 29: AMP R.F. Stage configuration
For successful signal transmissions, the settings performed in this window have to be the same on each
side of the T390 system (except for the Tx and Rx frequencies and the Master/Slave settings).
▪ Step2
Click AMPX Available, as shown in Figure 30 to make the additional power of the AMPX unit available
to the T390 system. With the PEP set to Pmax, note that the estimated output power is now 80W, as in
Figure 30:
Figure 30: AMPX output power

5. PRCS Configuration and settings
5.1 Overview
Configuration of PRCS depends on the amplifier mode: analog, digital or mixte.
When amplifier is configured as analog only, the available services are:
▪ Speeches and telegraphs
▪ Data (MTU)
▪ External teleprotection
When amplifier is configured as digital only, the available services are:

▪ Speeches
▪ Data
▪ V11
▪ Lan2lan
When amplifier is configured as mixte, the available services are:

▪ Speeches and telegraphs, and they are analog
▪ External Teleprotection
▪ Data, and they are digital
▪ V11
▪ Lan2lan
The general workflow to follow is given hereafter:

▪ First configure analog services if any
▪ Configure then digital services
▪ Configure the desired alarms.
▪ In all cases, the networks features are configured in last.
5.2 Analog services

5.2.1 General workflow
The workflow to configure the analog path is the following
▪ Add the speeches services
▪ Add Telegraphs
▪ Add the data services

▪ Configure TPX
▪ Configure TPI
▪ Verify coherency
5.2.2 Speeches and telegraphs

▪ Click on speech 1 to 3 to open the speech configuration interfaces.
Figure 31: analog speech interface
▪ Always configure first speeches, as they have a dedicated place in the bottom of band.
▪ When several speeches are used, they are placed automatically in the HF transmitted band.
▪ The band allocation panel indicates where the speeches are in BF.

Figure 32: speech band
▪ Telegraphs can be placed in supraphonic band afterwards.
Figure 33: Supraphonic telegraph
▪ In expert mode, they can be placed everywhere in the HF band and in the BF band.

Figure 34: Telegraph expert mode
5.2.3 MTU
▪ Click on MTU 1 to 4 to open the data configuration interfaces.

Figure 35: MTU interface
▪ Click Enable Channel to activate the service.

▪ Choose the channel speed and place the service in the band with the frequency shift.
▪ Always check that enough band is available for the new service by clicking on show analog
band.
▪ Update the word type (data bits, stop bits, parity bit)
▪ If needed, click on lock condition to stop the service when alarm is arisen. Selection of alarms
than can trigger the lock condition is done in tab “User alarm”.
▪ Additionally, the slipping mode can be changed. A special chapter is dedicated to Point To
Multipoint option (PTM), see section 8: Point to Multipoint (PTM) configuration.
5.2.4 Teleprotections
▪ If you wish to configure an external teleprotection, click on tab TP. A special chapter is
dedicated to DIP connection to HMI, see section 7: DIP Connection to HMI.
▪ If you wish to configure an internal teleprotection, click on TPI in the panel “Unit from” on the
left. Section 6: TPI configuration and settings is fully dedicated to TPI configuration.

Figure 36: External teleprotection interface
CAUTION: The teleprotections should always be configured in last.
5.2.5 Check Coherency

▪ Click on show analog band to check that no service overlap another.
Figure 37: show analog band
5.3 Digital services

5.3.1 General workflow
The workflow to configure the digital path is the following
▪ Select encoder
▪ Add services: first speeches, then data, then v11 and lan2lan

▪ Check the gauge
▪ Configure Fallback if wished
5.3.2 Encoder
▪ Click on encoder tab to open the following window:
Figure 38: Encoder tab

▪ Select the wished encoder.
TIP: QAM64 is suitable in most cases.

If the line is of really good quality, you can select QAM256 to increase the bitrate.
If the line is noisy, and if you don’t especially need high bitrate, choose a QAM16 for instance.
5.3.3 Speeches
▪ Click on Speech 1 to 3 to configure speeches.
▪ Click on enable to activate the service
▪ Configure the speech: speech compression, call progress, interfacing.

Figure 39: Digital speech interface
5.3.4 Data
▪ Click on Data 1 to 4 to configure data.
▪ Click on enable to activate the service
▪ Configure the service: speed, data type (dat bit, stop bit, parity bit).
▪ If needed, click on “lock condition to stop the service when alarm is arisen. Selection of alarms
▪ Additionally, the slipping mode can be changed. A special chapter is dedicated to Point To
Multipoint option (PTM), see section 8: Point to Multipoint (PTM) configuration.

Figure 40: digital data interface
5.3.5 V11
▪ Click on Basic access tab to open the following window
Figure 41: V11 interface

▪ Click enable channel to activate the service
▪ Configure the channel speed and clock type.
5.3.6 Lan2lan
▪ Click on Misc tab to open the following window
Figure 42: Misc tab

▪ Click on Lan2lan interface to activate the interface.
▪ Click on enable channel to activate the service.
TIP: If lan2lan interface is checked and enable channel is not checked, then lan2lan is not activated
in service mode, but can be activated in maintenance mode.
CAUTION: If lan2lan interface is not checked, then lan2lan cannot be activated even in
maintenance mode.
Further information can be found in the chapter 10, dedicated to network features.

5.3.7 Check the gauge
As services are added or their bitrate is modifier, a gauge at the bottom of the window is automatically
updated. User can check if the used bitrate is less than available rate.
Figure 43: Digital band used
5.3.8 Fallback
▪ To activate the fallback feature, click on encoder tab.
▪ Click on allow fallback mode
▪ Choose the needed quality of services, 10-5 is suitable in most cases
▪ Choose the delay to return to normal mode, 30s is suitable in most case
▪ Click on Fallback configuration to open the fallback configuration window.
Figure 44: Fallback window
▪ Select fallback encoders wished and associated services.
TIP: Do not select all fallback modes. Preferably let gap between 2 encoders: choose for instance
QAM64 as normal, and QAM16 and QAM4 as fallback encoders, or QAM256 as normal and TCM128
and TCM32 as fallback encoders.

5.4 User Alarms
The PLC provides several alarms that can be reported to user by different means: Leds, buzzers, and
that can even cut services (lock conditions).
▪ Configure the alarms that have to be trigged.
Figure 45: User Alarm Tab
5.5 Network services

The PLC provides some networks advanced features, configurable by HMI. A special chapter is
dedicated to their configuration, pleaser to chapter 10.

Figure 46: Network services

6. TPI configuration and settings
This part handles about the internal TPI configuration and tuning.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 TPI equipment online, that is to say:
▪ Field engineer
WARNING: During configuration, the connectors P1 to P6 must be disconnected from the

substation system in order to avoid unwanted trips.

6.1 General workflow
TPI Main Windows
TPI
Communication
path
TPI
Input Commands
TPI
Output Commands
TPI
Analog Path
TPI
Digital Path
End of
Configuration
Levels Tuning
D0668ENa
Figure 47: General workflow

6.2 Configuration step by step
6.2.1 Services
▪ First of all configure all PLC services
6.2.2 Window TPI / Main

▪ Check info given in Main
6.2.3 Window TPI / Communication path

▪ Select Digital. Configure digital path (see chapter 6.3)
▪ Select analog column. Configure analogue path (see chapters 6.4 and 6.5)
▪ Select commands with crosses.
▪ Choose operators
6.2.4 Window TPI / Input commands

▪ Link inputs to commands with left button of mouse (normal input) or right button of mouse
(inverted input).
▪ Choose operator for each command.
▪ Set an input filter.
The input filter must be 1 ms minimum. It is preferable to set input filter to 2 or 3 ms in order to avoid
glitches.
▪ In dual tone mode, select the type of each command (type 1, 2, 3 or 4).
▪ Set the holding delay for each command.
Set a strictly positive value for holding delay is highly recommended in order to ensure the transmission
of commands. Set the holding delay to 20 ms is a good choice.
▪ In dual tone mode, set the validation delay for each command.
▪
CAUTION: Verify that all commands set on an input are checked in window communication path.
Otherwise, when input is activated, these commands will be sent on the digital transmission path and
will be ignored at reception.
6.2.5 Window TPI / Output commands

▪ Link commands and alarms to relays with left button of mouse.
▪ Choose operator for each relay.
CAUTION: The connectors P1 to P6 of teleprotection must to be disconnected from the substation

system.
CAUTION: Operator is valid for commands, start and alarms and not only for commands.
CAUTION: Verify that all commands set on a relay are checked in window communication path.

▪ Select the relay state when major alarm occurs.
▪ Set the holding delay for each command.
▪ Set the validation delay for each command
CAUTION: The validation is taken into account only by analogue path.
▪ Set time delay for alarms.

User 1 is same alarm as minor alarm, but it possible to set different time delay of switch on.
User 2 is same alarm as major alarm, but it possible to set a different time delay.
▪ Set logic alarms.
Choose AH or AL for alarms
▪ In dual tone mode, configure the Start if needed.
6.3 TPI / communication path / Digital configuration

▪ Select the communication module.
CAUTION: The first time you configure the equipment, it is possible that card is not seen. In that
case, select C3794. Configure the rest of equipment, apply configuration and after reboot, go back in
this window and configure the card you want.
▪ Select the number of commands.

▪ Select the source clock.
▪ Select the clock speed.
▪ Select the transfer time alarm threshold between 10 and 30ms.
▪ Select the BER minor alarm.
▪ Select the BER major alarm.
▪ In case V11 select the communication mode.
▪ Click ok to apply changes and return to communication path window.
6.4 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case

Dual Tone Mode
6.4.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX
▪ Overlay mode
Select the TP mode.
TP over QAM exists only if a QAM is defined, and if there is no already another TPI on it. TP over speech
exists only if a speech with signalling is defined, and if there is no already another TP on it.
▪ Command mode
Select the number of command: 4 or 6.
If you have key for set/reset, you can also choose”1 set/reset”, ” 2 set/reset”, “3 set/reset”.
▪ Set/reset transmission duration

If you have selected ”1 set/reset”, ” 2 set/reset”, “3 set/reset”, click on “…” to define the transmission
duration.
▪ Channel
Channel 1 is the only possibility.
▪ TP TX band
In case TP in band, you can move the TP in the channel you have chosen.
CAUTION: Verify on remote equipment that local Tx and Remote Rx are coherent.
▪ Channel cutting
When a Tx command is present, it is possible to cut other channels to allocate more power to
teleprotection mode.
Cutting other channels allows increasing security and dependability. On the other hands, services of the
cut channel will not operate during command transmission.
▪ Maximum transmission time
This variable allows limiting the command time transmission
▪ Transmission level
Set the transmission levels to maximal value minus 3dB for commands and for guard.
6.4.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX

▪ TP Rx band
Verify on remote equipment that local Rx band and Remote Tx band are coherent.
▪ Unblocking limit
A good choice is -20dB for level
Tune the delay of guard loss to switch on unblocking and tune the unblocking duration.
CAUTION: The unblocking functionality is non-sense in case TP over QAM if QAM mode is
separate.
▪ Alarms
The recommended values for Alarms are described hereafter.
ALARM TYPE RECOMMENDED VALUE COMMENTS
SNR high limit between 6dB and -2 dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to 1s
or more
SNR low limit between 3dB and -5dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to 1s
or more
Signal loss high between -4dB and -15dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to 1s
limit or more
Signal loss low between -2dB and -10dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to 1s
limit or more
TABLE 3: Alarms recommended settings

▪ Reception levels
Set the reception levels to same values as transmission levels.
6.5 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case

Mixed tone Mode
6.5.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX
▪ Overlay mode
Already selected by default
▪ Overlay Analog Channel
▪ Speech
▪ Guard frequency
▪ If this option is visible (no signalling defined), select the guard frequency
▪ Loop test
▪ Select an hourly or daily loop test if needed and define the schedule in “loop test time” panel.
▪ Define the severity of loop test failure. By default, choose “minor”.
▪ Maximum Transmission Time
This variable allows limiting the command time transmission
▪ Tmin DT commands
▪ Define the minimal duration of a Direct Tripping Commands.
▪ Increasing this value improves the probability of missing command of direct tripping
commands, but delays the permissive commands that can occur during the transmission of a
Direct Tripping.
▪ Transmission level
Set the transmission levels to maximal value minus 3dB for commands and for guard.
6.5.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX

▪ Unblocking limit
A good choice is -20dB for level
Tune the delay of guard loss to switch on unblocking and tune the unblocking duration.
▪ Alarms
The recommended values for Alarms are described hereafter.
ALARM TYPE RECOMMENDED VALUE COMMENTS
SNR high limit between 6dB and -2 dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to

1s or more
SNR low limit between 3dB and -5dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to
1s or more
Signal loss high between -4dB and -15dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to
limit 1s or more
Signal loss low between -30dB and -10dB To avoid alarms flooding, adjust the delay to
limit 1s or more
TABLE 4: Alarms recommended settings
▪ Reception levels
Set the reception levels to same values as transmission levels.
6.6 Apply configuration

Click on “Apply” button. HMI will display the configuration error list. If there is no error, and if you do
not want change other parameters at this step, you can click on “confirm”
6.7 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case

You have now to verify the tones reception level.
▪ Step 1a. On local equipment
Open Maintenance window.
Select TPI
▪ Step1b. On remote equipment
Open Measure window
Select TPI1 / Analogue
▪ Step 1c. On local equipment, in Maintenance window
Check cmd1 and then click force. A warning appears, click on OK.
▪ Step 1d On remote equipment, in Measure window
Note the reception level of frequency 1 and frequency 3.
▪ Step 1e. Do Steps 1c and 1d with cmd2, cmd3 and cmd4.
Note at each time the level of 1 or 2 received frequencies.
Step 2 do step 1a to step1e changing local and remote equipment.
6.8 Maintenance AGC init

▪ Go in window Maintenance / system equalization / AGC init
In panel AGC stored value check “Enabled” then apply and save
▪ Reboot system

6.9 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration ONLY in
analog case
▪ Modify Tx and Rx level
Modify them according levels measured in order to have at next reboot a relative measured level = 0dB
for each frequency. The difference between 2 reception levels must not exceed 3 dB.
▪ Modify Tx command alarm threshold if necessary.
6.10 Apply configuration
6.11 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case. Check

levels
▪ Redo step 9.7 and check that all measures are 0dB.
▪ The system is now ready to work.
▪

7. DIP Connection to HMI
The T390 is a full range of products designed to cover the power utilities needs. The complete project is
suitable for conventional analog transmission & services as well as new digital services as noted in the
Cigré PLC report:
“Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000”.
This document aims at giving some rules and guidelines to install properly a DIP teleprotection
equipment to a T390 system with a substation.
The DIP equipment shall be configured obviously in analog mode to be connected properly to the PLC
equipment.
The document covers the hardware wiring scheme and the firmware general configuration.
7.1 Instructions relative to the cabinet installation

See the Installation User guide for complete details about DIP installation in the cabinet.
It is recommended to supply the DIP with a distinct circuit from the PLC equipment, and a separate
circuit breaker. In case of redundancy of power supplies, we recommend using the dual input option of
the DIP equipment and use of distinct supply circuits for each.
We recommend placing the DIP equipment under the PLC, in order that the warm air flow produced by
the PLC amplifier does not flow through the Teleprotection equipment.
7.2 Instructions relative to wiring

The General principle for Datacom equipment wiring is fully described in the Installation User guide.
The objective of this document is to give additional details about some functionality of DIP/T390
equipment which require specific wiring.

Figure 48: TELEPROTECTION WIRING SCHEME WITH T390-PRCS
This wiring scheme is highly recommended especially if the power supplies of both equipments are
connected to separate circuit breakers.
If one power supply fails, the alarm on the other device must be able to detect this failure. That is why
each alarm input must be supplied its own circuit breaker.
7.3 Instructions relative to Firmware configuration

7.3.1 Safety presence and alarms : PLC side
The following alarm must be configured to prevent unknown effects in case of hardware failures of the
material.
The alarm must be configured to drive the Teleprotection alarm input:
▪ TPX Error: This alarm is triggered when the PLC is not operational.

▪ AGC High level Rx: The alarm is triggered when the AGC level get over the High Threshold
▪ AGC Low level Rx: The alarm is triggered when the AGC level goes over the low Threshold
In this case, the AGC threshold must be tuned properly, once the PLC is synchronised.
The recommendation is NOMINAL LEVEL +15dB for High Threshold
NOMINAL LEVEL –15dB for low level
Optionally, we may add the following PLC alarms:
▪ Line Fault: This alarm is triggered when the remote FSK is lost.
Use the dedicated alarm output to check the alarm state.
The firmware settings are depicted here after.
Figure 49: TPX ERROR FLAG
Figure 50: AGC HIGH/LOW LEVEL FLAGS

7.3.2 Safety presence and alarms : DIP side
7.3.2.1 External Alarm
This alarm will be commanded by the T390 alarm relays. The Major alarm must be on during all the
duration of a hardware failure (remote DIP or PLC).
The alarm will be off immediately (configuration: 0s) after PLC alarm relay switch.
7.3.2.2 Alive
The Alive signal from the DIP is a flag that automatically is switched ON as soon as the DIP device is
alive, even if the link is not operating correctly.

7.3.3 Configuration of teleprotection levels : PLC side
Figure 51: TPX WINDOW LEVELS
▪ The safety presence must absolutely be activated so that the PLC can react in case of DIP
Hardware failure
▪ The PLC must be in that way (TP HF application)
− Guard level: The guard level is –6dBm on the PLC input/output (TP interface on P4).
Tune the guard level to match this value. The Guard BAR displays the RF level of
the guard.
− Command level: The command level must make use of the maximum power of the
PLC. For this reason, the combination of the Max TP output level with the boost
mode must get the PEP on the RF command level Bar in output. In this case 2dB is
the maximum authorized for 40w configuration.
▪ The following Output Gain must be set to get the same level at the input and output, the
example shows one frequency at -9dBm in AF (Audio Frequency=low frequency level) is
corresponding to 23dBm at the RF (Radio frequency=High frequency level)to get it at -9dBm
set the “Output Gain” on +12.

Figure 52: ADJUSTMENTS
▪ “Internal Guard”, possibility to use TP in mute mode, in that case the teleprotection must base
its guard on the frequency of signalling of the speech configured on band 1.
▪ The “Max TP Output Level” and “RF Level” sliders are only for simulation levels.
7.3.4 Configuration and teleprotection levels : DIP side

7.3.4.1 Mode Choice
The Dual Tone mode is designed to transmit the commands always at the maximum power available. It
offers a fast application but the allocated band for teleprotection cannot be shared with another
service.
The single tone allows the multiplexing with another service.
7.3.4.2 Dual Tone Mode

The first bandwidth is 300-1900.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PLC in case of TPHF utilization)
In Dual Tone mode,
▪ At the most, always two frequencies can be transmitted simultaneously.
▪ In such a case, the magnitudes of the tones are halved.

Figure 53: DIP TRANSMISSION LEVELS
7.3.4.3 Reception
Figure 54: DIP RECEPTION LEVELS
The “Automatic Adjust” must be performed to match with “Output Gain” 12 Db.
In this example -6,39dBm is corresponding to 0dBr reception level and PLC will be transparent.

Figure 55: AUTOMATIC ADJUST
7.3.4.4 Single tone Mode

The normal mode and the enhanced mode can be chosen for the application with PLC but the system
best matches in the enhanced mode.
The enhanced mode is designed to transmit the commands always at the maximum power available.

7.3.4.5 Enhanced Mode
The best bandwidth is 300-3400.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PLC)
The guard Level must be –22dBm to match with the PLC configuration.
The command level must be –12dBm to match with the maximum power available.
In enhanced mode,
▪ At the most, two commands can be transmitted simultaneously.
▪ In such a case, the magnitudes of the tones are halved.
This is the reason why the magnitude of each command can reach the maximum power available,
either –12dBm

7.3.4.6 Normal Mode
The best bandwidth is 300-3400.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PL)
The guard Level must be –22dBm to match with the PLC configuration.
The maximum level is –12dBm (PLC configuration).
In the worst case, we have four commands simultaneously. If we suppose that we have the same
magnitude, we get 4 times the single tone magnitude for the PEP.
So have to send the single tone with magnitude ¼ of the PEP, either 12dB under –12dBm.
The magnitude of each tone will be –24dBm

7.3.4.7 Reception
The reception bandwidth must be set equal to the transmission bandwidth.
The guard signal is equal to the output of the PLC, either –22dBm.
The command Vs guard ratio must be tuned to the maximum: 6dB.

7.4 Annexes
7.4.1 Physical units
7.4.1.1 Definition
dBm: a term expressing an electrical power level, referenced to 1 mill watt
(i.e., 0 dBm = 1 mW).
dBu: a means of expressing voltage referenced so that 0 dBu equals 0.775 volts, regardless of
impedance. One mW of power is dissipated if 0.775 volts is applied to a 600-ohm load, so when the load
impedance is 600 ohms, 0 dBu = 0 dBm
dBV: a means of expressing voltage, referenced so that 0 dBV equals 1-volt RMS, regardless of
impedance.
7.4.1.2 Conversion formulas
7.4.1.2.1 Voltage
U 
U (dBv) = 20 log 10  
 U0 
With:
▪ U0=1V
▪ U in volt

7.4.1.2.2 Power
P
P(dBm) = 10 log 10  
 P0 
With:
▪ P0=0.001W
▪ P in watt
7.4.1.2.3 Power-Voltage conversion

U²
P=
Zc
With:
▪ U: voltage in volt
▪ Zc: Impedance of the interface
▪ P: power in Watt
So,
P ( dBm)
U²
P(dBm) = 10 log 10 ( )
⎯→U = PO Z C 10 20
PoZc
7.4.2 Standard TPHF levels table configuration

The following settings apply to a TPHF application with no other service on PLC and TP on dual tone.
All level tolerance must be ±10%.
F1 TO F7 COMMAND
POWER SETTLED FSK PEP-22dBm GUARD 12dB BOOST 12dB BOOST not
not INCLUDED INCLUDED
5W/37dBm/19,37V 15dBm/1,54V 17dBm/1,94V 14dBm/1,37V 17dBm/1,94V
F1 TO F7 COMMAND
POWER SETTLED FSK PEP-22dBm GUARD 12Db BOOST 12Db BOOST
INCLUDED INCLUDED

7.4.3 How to compute the max power output of DIP

7.4.3.1 Single tone case
Each command corresponds to a tone.
The max power output corresponds to the maximum power sent when all the commands are
transmitted.
In the normal case,
Max Voltage= U1+U2+U3+U4
With U1, U2 ,U3 ,U4 magnitude of the tone calculated using 5.1.2.3 formula.
Therefore, The maximum power output will be this maximum voltage converted in dBm by the 5.1.2.3
formula with impedance of 600
7.4.3.2 Dual tone case

Each command corresponds to 2 tones.
The max power output corresponds to the maximum power sent when 2 frequencies are transmitted.
Exemple : Max Voltage = F1+F3 = command 1
With command 1 magnitude of the tones calculated with 5.1.2.3 formula.

Therefore, the maximum power output will be this maximum voltage converted in dBm by the 5.1.2.3
formula with impedance of 600.
7.4.4 Why using the « boost » option and how

The boost option allows to leave the PLC increase the command level.
The increasing is performed inside the PLC which controls the power in R.F. line
The Boost can be chosen by steps of 6Db (0, 6, 12dB) during the PLC configuration in the HMI.
The Boost, if configured, is activated by trigger of the BLE/Boost relay (5-6)

Pure TPHF configuration, theoretically, does not need boost function, cause nothing other signal to
suppress, but anyway could be selected for signal on noise ratio improvement.
7.4.5 In case of line distorsion, how equalize the Tones / What is the
effect of PLC equalizer ?
The tone level tuning does not rely on the PLC capacity to equalize the TP channel.
The spirit is that the PLC shall provide a channel as transparent as possible. In that way, the
teleprotection path bypasses the equalizer filter.
The commissioner engineer should compensate the initial line distortion by applying a different
transmission level for each tone.

8. Point to Multipoint (PTM) configuration
8.1 Scope
This section describes the Point to Multipoint (PTM) service of the T390 system, and sets out the
necessary steps for its configuration. This mode is also known as pooling mode or slitting mode.
The aim of this PTM is to reduce the band allocated for data by sharing the band. The same data
channel is used for many Remote Terminal Units (RTU).
In the section 8.2 Point to Point mode, we start by explaining the classical Point To Point (PTP) mode,
where band is not shared.
In the section 8.3 Point to Multipoint Mode, we introduce the Point To Multipoint mode.
In the section 8.4 Operating mode, we present the configuration options the user can choose:
specifically an all analog or all digital, or mixed mode configuration. We also discuss the possible
topology choices that are inherent in configuration of PTM.
NOTE: Use of the terms analog, digital, and mixed mode in this section refers exclusively to
their meaning in the context of PTM.
Section 8.5 Software configuration is dedicated to Configuration of splitting mode (or PTM mode) in
HMI.
8.2 Point to Point mode

In the classical PTP mode, each device connected to a data port of one PLC transmits information to
the corresponding data port of remote PLC and uses on HF line the bandwidth corresponding to its
rate.
If two devices are connected, data are received on the remote end on two data ports and each of them
uses on HF line the bandwidth corresponding to its rate.
RTU1 SCADA
PLCs + HF Lines
RTU2
PTP is illustrated in Figure 56, in which there are two PLC links with RTUs attached to three of the four
PLC systems.
Configuration of PTP in the HMI of the PLC is done by selecting the splitting mode “NONE”.

SubStation1 SubStation2 Control Center
HF Line HF Line
PLC1 PLC2 PLC3 PLC4
« None » « None » « None » « None »
Data Data Data

RTU1 RTU1 RTU2
RTU1 RTU2 SCADA
Figure 56: PTP Configuration
With a point to point setup, access to the different RTU on remote links requires that each RTU need an
associated dedicated bandwidth and a dedicated RS232 port.
For example in Figure 56, RTU1 and RTU 2 will need each a dedicated band to communicate their
information to the SCADA, even if they won’t be used at the same time. This mode when used on
several transit is highly bandwidth consuming.
8.3 Point to Multipoint Mode

The point to multipoint mode allows connecting a single device to multiple ones without increasing the
used band.
It is it particularly useful to connect a SCADA to several RTU located in different substations in pooling
mode (Master Slave protocol).
RTU1
RTU2
RTU3
The T390 provides a splitting mode feature on two pairs of ports, in order to support PTM mode:
▪ Ports P7/P9, corresponding to data1 and data2 in digital mode and MTU1 and MTU2 in analog
mode.
▪ Ports P6/P8, corresponding to data3 and data4 in digital mode and MTU3 and MTU4 in analog
mode.

If data1/MTU1 is configured in the slitting mode MULTI, then data1 (P7) and data2 (P9) share the same
band.
▪ In transmission, data from ports P7 and P9 are sent to the HF line in the same band, but not in
the same time.
▪ In reception, the data are received on both to ports P7 and P9.
If data1/MTU1 is configured in the slitting mode SINGLE, then only port P7 is used, P9 is unavailable.
data1
data1
MULTI SINGLE
data2 data2
The same principle is applicable to the pair of ports P6/P8.
With Point to Multipoint arrangement as illustrated in Figure 57, RTU on the different links will share
the same bandwidth but they will be authorized or not to communicate depending on which RTU is
answering to the SCADA. The SCADA system can reach both attached devices, RTU1 and RTU2.
SubStation1 SubStation2 Control center

HF Line HF Line
PLC1 PLC2 PLC3 PLC4
« SINGLE » « SINGLE » « MULTI » « SINGLE »
Data1 Data1
OR
Data2
RTU1 RTU2 SCADA
Figure 57: PTM Configuration

NOTE: At any point where two PLC links are connected, as in Substation 2 in Figure 57, the two
T390 systems are connected back-to-back, using a “straight-through” RS-232 cable of maximum
length 15m.
8.4 Operating mode

The choice of operating mode for PTM depends on which transmission modes are supported by the
T390 system, as well as on the operational needs of the PLC link.
When all links of the chain are analog or all links are digital, no particular precaution has to be taken.
It is also possible to have a mixte mode, with both analog and digital links in the chain.
Mixed mode PTM, allowing mixed Analog and Digital mode links, is illustrated in Figure 58.
SubStation1 SubStation2 SubStation3 Control Center
PLC1 Analog PLC2 PLC3 Analog PLC4 PLC5 Digital PLC6

« Single » « Single » « Multi » « Single » « Multi » « Single »
RTU1 RTU2 RTU3 SCADA
Figure 58: PTM Mixed mode

With this configuration, the control system can reach all three RTU devices. The link closest to the
SCADA system must be operating in digital mode, while the most remote link may be analog. All
intermediate links can be either digital or analog, provided there is at most one changeover, in the
whole chain, from digital to analog.
8.4.1 Star Topology

So far the discussion has assumed a “linear” layout of links, but this is not mandatory. A simple star
formation, as shown in Figure 59 may be used, or even multiple branching.

SubStation1 SubStation2 SubStation3 Control Center
PLC1 HF Line PLC2 PLC3 HF Line PLC4 PLC5 HF Line PLC6

« Single » « Single » « Multi » « Single » « Multi » « Single »
RTU1 RTU2 SCADA
SubStation5 SubStation4
PLC10 HF Line PLC9 PLC8 HF Line PLC7

« Single » « Single » « Multi » « Single »
RTU4 RTU3
Figure 59: Star Formation
8.5 Software configuration

This section describes the configuration procedure for PTM, in analog and digital modes.
8.5.1 Analog Mode

Select tab MTU1 to display the window shown in Figure 60.
Click Enable Channel to make the MTU channel available in the system (disabled by default).

Figure 60: Configuration Window: MTU channels
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM) facilities.
Figure 61: PTM Mode selection

The options are:
▪ None: Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel.
▪ Multi: Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, ports P7 and P9 are used. MTU2 is
automatically activated. MTU1 and MTU2 share the same band.
▪ Single: Only P7 is used, P9 is unavailable. MTU2 is automatically deactivated.
▪ The pair MTU3/MTU4 can be configured in the same way.

Click SHOW ANALOG BAND to display the current analog bandwidth settings in the panel at the foot
of the Configuration Window.

Figure 62: Show Analog Band
NOTE: If the channel speed of MTU1 is higher than channel speed of MTU2, the bandwidth of
MTU1 is displayed. If the channel speed of MTU2 is higher than channel speed of MTU1, the
bandwidth of MTU2 is displayed.
8.5.2 Digital Mode

Configuration in digital mode is quite similar to configuration in analog mode.
Select tab Data1 to display the window shown in Figure 63.
Click Enable Channel to make the Data channel available (disabled by default).

Figure 63: Digital Slitting mode
Make a selection in the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM) facilities, as
shown in Figure 64.
Figure 64: Splitting mode selection
The options are:

▪ None: Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel.
▪ Multi: Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, ports P7 and P9 are used. MTU2 is
automatically activated. MTU1 and MTU2 share the same band.
▪ Single: Only P7 is used, P9 is unavailable. MTU2 is automatically deactivated.
▪ The pair Data3/Data4 can be configured in the same way.

9. Speech interface
This section handles about the speech interface.
It gives an exhaustive description of how to link the Speech connectors to the various device.
It does not describe the IHM configuration of the equipment.
This document is mainly at anyone who has to set PLC equipment online, that is to say:
▪ Field engineer
9.1 Warning
DIGITAL MODE
As the signal is compressed and digitally transmitted, it is impossible to transmit
a single tone through the speech interface in the digital Mode.
DO NOT TEST THE INTERFACE BY SENDING A TONE, TRYING TO MEASURE IT

ON THE REMOTE SIDE OF THE DIGITAL LINK
A test of the speech interface can only be performed emitting a complex signal
like the voice and checking that this signal can be received on the remote side of
the link
For the same reason it is impossible to connect a modem to a speech interface
functioning in digital mode
ANALOGUE MODE
No restriction in this configuration, the speech channels operate as transparent
BF/BF channels
Explanations for digital mode

This interface uses a hybrid vocoder that analyse the stream and compress it. The algorithm is based on
voice recognition, and is suited only for that purpose.
Alternate Test methods for digital mode
You could use empiric method such as plugging normal telephone handset and check the channel and
the quality through your ear.
If you need an objective method, use standard MOS measurement equipments/instruments that are
able to measure the gain, quality, distortion, etc of that kind of channel.

9.2 Analog vs digital mode
Voice transmission Advantages
Using an analogue Low E/M distortion (less than 2ms according to IEC495)
channel No compression/recompression allowing multiple HOPs without voice
deterioration
Using a digital channel High quality of voice in phone to phone or FXO/FXS
(TDM slot) Small band usage
9.3 Service Phone connector

The maintenance handset is enabled by checking the option in the speech1 configuration window.
The interface is 2 wires
1 4
front side of the female connector

1 NC
2 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires maintenance handset access
3 b (Trip) in/out
4 NC
Case MGROUND To mechanical ground

1
Telephone
9.4 Speech Channel Connector
FRONT SIDE OF THE FEMALE CONNECTOR

1 not connected
2 X in X wire (compandor switch)
3 M in M wire
4 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires access, Receive (output) 4 wires
access.
5 b (Trip) in/out
6 c in Transmit 4 wires access
7 d in
8 E out E wire
Case MGRND To mechanical ground

9.5 Applications
9.5.1 Standard 2W phone
In the Hot line mode, the standard phone to phone speech only use the a,b wires
The wiring between the PLC and the device for speech 2 and speech3 will be on pin 4/5
6
Telephone
7
Figure 65: Wiring a phone for hot line Mode on speech 2/3
9.5.2 Transit between two PLC

In the transit mode, the 4wire are used.
The E/M wire must also be linked.
The reference Voltage must be supplied to reference the E/M wires

Figure 66: Wiring Scheme for speech 1/2/3 in transit case
9.5.3 Transit of PABX
PBX
Telephone
PBX PBX
PLC PLC
Telephone
Figure 67: PBX network with digital PLC channel
In the following case, all the Wires are used:

The transit is mainly performed on 4 wires (a,b,c,d)
The E/M wires are used to transmit the signalling. The reference voltage must be linked. In the standard
case, REFOUT is polarized positive (ground) and REFIN is polarized negative.
The X wire is used to control the compandor switch; it is useless in Digital Mode

1 w
2 not Used
x
3 m
4 e
5 a
6 b
7 c
PBX
8 d
T390 PBX
Voltage Ref
1 2 3 - +
Figure 68: WIRING SCHEME FOR SPEECH 1/2/3 IN PBX TRANSIT CASE
9.5.4 FXO/FXS Mode

In that mode, the transmission is 2W for both side, the call will be transmitted through the (a,b) wires.
9.5.4.1 Subscriber
6
Telephone
7
Figure 69: Wiring Scheme for speech 1/2/3 on subscriber side

9.5.4.2 Office
1 w
2 x
3 m
4 e
5 a
6 b
7 c
PBX
8 d
T390 PBX
Figure 70: Wiring Scheme for speech 2/3 on Office Side

10. Networking advanced features : Lan2lan
10.1 Scope
This section handles about the LAN2LAN configuration. The LAN2LAN option of the PLC provides a full
network access through the power line.
The Lan2Lan option can be used to:
▪ Implement a complete bridge between distant LAN.
▪ Access to the remote equipment for monitoring, uploading or configuring.
The Lan2lan could be activated:
▪ Permanently for on-line operations.
▪ Temporarily for maintenance operation only.
10.2 System configuration

WARNING: If the LAN2LAN option is activated, DO NOT CONNECT the PLC equipment directly
neither to a Local Ethernet nor to the internet.
A router properly configured should be used in order to filter excessive traffic.
Different modes of connection can be used:
Using cross cables
Computer
Computer
Digital PLC Digital PLC
D0563ENa
Using routers

Computer
Computer
Computer
ETHERNET LAN
Printer
Computer
ETHERNET LAN
Router
Router
Internet
Router
Firewall Digital PLC Digital PLC
D0564ENa
NOTE: The IP address, mask and gateway address of each equipment connected to the
network should be properly configured.
10.3 LAN2LAN Activation overview

The Lan2lan mode requires the digital or mixed mode feature of the system to work and the Lan2Lan
option is mandatory.
To check if the key is available, click on each module and the installed keys will appear, the same keys
have to be installed on each module on both side of the link.
The Lan2lan can be used either permanently or temporarily:

▪ When it is used permanently, a slot must be dedicated to it in the TDM frame and a user
programmable data rate chosen for it.
▪ When the Lan2lan is to be used temporarily, then the Lan2lan interface must be checked in the
configuration, but it is not necessary to dedicate band for it. The full band provided by the
digital channel will be dedicated to the Lan2lan when activating the maintenance lan2lan mode
in maintenance window.
Full details on this mode are given hereafter.

10.4 Permanent network channel
In order to configure Lan2lan options, open the tab PRCS/Misc of the configuration window.
Activate “Lan2lan interface” to make Lan2lan available in the system and check “enable channel” to
activate the channel permanently in the digital frame and chose a channel speed for it.
It is recommended to dedicate at least 10kbit/s for a correct working.
10.5 Full band network channel (Maintenance mode)

This mode is used to dedicate temporarily the full digital band to lan2lan. This mode is particularly
useful for remote management like remote configuration or events retrieving.
During the maintenance lan2lan mode, other digital services are down.
This mode can only be used if the “lan2lan interface” has been checked in configuration.
NOTE: It is not necessary to click on “activate channel”: it means that lan2lan can be used in
maintenance mode without being activated in service mode.

10.5.1 Switch to lan2lan maintenance mode
The steps for entering lan2lan maintenance mode are described hereafter.
▪ Open window “Maintenance/Processing”
▪ In panel “Lan to Lan”, click on button “switch”
Figure 71 - Switch to lan2lan
▪ As soon as the system has switched in maintenance mode, the mode is updated in the status
bars of local and remote equipment (Figure 72 and Figure 73).

Figure 72 – Local maintenance
Figure 73 – Remote maintenance
▪ Once the system has switched in maintenance lan2lan, it is possible to connect to remote
equipment.
All windows of remote equipment are available for monitoring, and it is also possible to change the
configuration of services, as explained in next section.
10.5.2 Change configuration

Once the system has switched in maintenance lan2lan, it is possible to connect to remote equipment to
configure services remotely. On both sides of the link:
▪ Open the configuration window
▪ Click on Services (Maint) in the config Mode panel as shown in Figure 74.
▪ Modify needed services
▪ Click on Apply

▪ On local equipment, exit from Maintenance lan2lan (section
▪ The service configuration is available immediately
Figure 74 - Services (Maint.)
NOTE: It is not possible to apply a configuration on remote equipment outside from the
maintenance lan2lan mode.
WARNING: It is MANDATORY to select “Services (Maint)” before clicking on Apply on remote

equipment.
If “Full” radio button is checked and you click on “Apply”, the following message will appear;
If you click on YES you will crash the remote equipment

10.5.3 Exit from lan2lan maintenance
In order to quit the maintenance lan2lan mode, open the window “maintenance/Processing” on local
equipment and click “Exit maintenance”.
As soon as the system exits from maintenance mode, system switches to running mode, services are
restored, and connection with remote equipment is cut.
10.6 Troubleshooting
If the PLC is directly connected to Ethernet Network or internet without routers to limit the traffic, an
excessive IP traffic is seen by the PLC, which may locks or crash the Ethernet interface.
If PLC locks or crashes when LAN2LAN is enabled, add routers/firewall to limit the traffic seen by the
PLC.

11. Networking advanced features : SNMP
11.1 Overview
The SNMP option can be used to supervise or monitor the PLC equipment, locally (in analogue or digital
mode functioning) or remotely through the LAN2LAN feature (digital mode only).
The SNMP feature implements the polling mode through standard GET commands and also the TRAP.
Up to 10 IP address could be configured to dispatch the Trap messages.
11.2 PLC Configuration

▪ Select PRCS module
▪ Select Misc tab
▪ Check SNMP interface
▪ Settle the SNMP configuration for Traps
▪ Settle the SNMP configuration for polling

For the polling a Server community name can be specified. In that case, the PLC will only answer to
“get” requests from this Server community. If the checkbox “server Community” is not checked, then
the PLC answers only to “get” requests from “public”.
In any case, “set” requests are ignored.
11.3 SNMP Management

A SNMP (SNMP V2) agent is implemented within the T390, which allows a full monitoring of alarms,
real-time measures (SNR, AGC, etc) and complete configuration reading (frequencies, TX power,
services, etc). Moreover, each alarm could generate a Trap sent to the network manager (up to 10 IP

addresses are programmable). We provide a MIB to interface the T390 with the management system
(ASN.1 format).
Basic components
An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:
Managed device = Slave device (PLC)
Agent = software which runs on Slave device (MIB)
Network management system (NMS) = software which runs on Master
A managed device is a network node that implements an SNMP interface that allows unidirectional
(read-only) or bidirectional access to node-specific information. Managed devices exchange node-
specific information with the NMSs. Sometimes called network elements, the managed devices can be
any type of device, including, but not limited to, routers, access servers, switches, bridges, hubs, IP
telephones, IP video cameras, computer hosts, and printers.
An agent is a network-management software module that resides on a managed device. An agent has
local knowledge of management information and translates that information to or from an SNMP
specific form.
A network management system (NMS) executes applications that monitor and control managed
devices. NMSs provide the bulk of the processing and memory resources required for network
management. One or more NMSs may exist on any managed network.
11.4 MIB (Management Information Base)

SNMP itself does not define which information (which variables) a managed system should offer.
Rather, SNMP uses an extensible design, where the available information is defined by management
information bases (MIBs). MIBs describe the structure of the management data of a device subsystem;
they use a hierarchical namespace containing object identifiers (OID). Each OID identifies a variable
that can be read or set via SNMP. MIBs use the notation defined by ASN.1.
11.5 SNMP architecture

MIB name
iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprise.GE.AIS.Datacom.T1R5.mib

D0672ENa
11.6 SNMPc configuration

▪ Setup.exe
▪ Next
▪ Server
▪ Next
▪ Address
▪ IP address (SNMP server address = Pc)
▪ Subnet mask (same as Pc)
▪ Community (public)
▪ Select “start with discovery off”
▪ Next
▪ Next
▪ OK
11.6.1 MIB copy

Copy the MIB under following file;
C:\Program Files\SNMPc Network Manager\mibfiles

11.6.2 Launch SNMPc
▪ Startup system
▪ Cancel
▪ Continue
11.6.3 MIB compil

▪ Menu : config → Mib database
▪ Keep “standard MIB” only
▪ Add MIB renaming it “T1R5.mib”
▪ Select “T1R5.mib”
▪ Compile
▪ Yes
▪ OK
▪ Done
▪
▪
Figure 75: Mib compil
▪
11.6.4 New equipment

▪ Insert device

▪ Properties by right click
▪ Fill in Label & address (Groups is not mandatory)

Label = equipment name
Address = IP equipment address
OK

▪ Access tab, read/write community (public)
▪ Attributes, exec program, replace auto.exe by micom.bat $a

11.7 Troubleshooting
The above feature are key locked and should be unlocked prior usage.
Check first if the key are present in your system:
▪ Open the HMI and connect to the equipment
▪ Go to Help/About
▪ Click on “installed keys” button and check SNMP presence

12. Adjacent Mode for 8+8kHz
12.1 Scope
This section handles about the adjacent bands configuration. This configuration is helpful when you
have a single band available for Tx/Rx, and a separated band mode is preferred to superimposed mode
respect to SNR or recovery time best achievement.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to achieve the best performance for the 8+8kHz
configuration (single band of 16kHz available).
This document does not apply for other adjacent modes such as 4+4kHz or teleprotection mode.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set PLC equipment on line, that is to say:
▪ Field engineer
12.2 Hardware configuration

12.2.1 General Configuration
For better performance, a single 16kHz Tx filter shall be preferred. The filters must be configured like
for the superimposed mode:
In the adjacent mode configuration, the crosstalk between TX & RX board is a critical point.
That’s why a metallic plate has been inserted between boards to shield properly the various electrical
fields, especially the high level of emission of TX filter.
In case of unproper isolation, the reception filter will receive the whole field and you will not be able to
synchronize your systems even in the best line conditions.
12.2.2 Tx filter
The Tx filter will be tuned to include both reception and transmission bands.
The use of two different 8kHz transmission filers is prohibited because of the tapping loss, which will
exceed reasonable limits near the band center.
So it will be 16kHz wide like for the following scheme:

Tx filter
16kHz
8kHz 8kHz
Figure 76: Tx filter Transmission Band

This configuration avoids the interference between the transmission filter and the reception filter and
gives the better SNR achievement.
So, even if separated mode TX filter settings could work in some cases, we recommend configuring the
system as this for adjacent mode.
12.3 HMI Configuration

12.3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration
The first step is the choice of the Master/Slave
The focus of attention must be the robustness of the maintenance channel. In order to ensure the best
availability, the fsk must be set at the edges of the band.
Therefore,
The recommendation is to set the master to the upper frequency
16kHz
FSK SL
FSK M
Noise measure channel
8kHz 8kHz
SLAVE Tx MASTER TX
Figure 77: Master/Slave Configuration
For instance, if you use a 184-200KHz band

▪ The MASTER will transmit in the upper part of the allocated band(from 192 to 200kHz)

▪ The SLAVE will transmit in the lower part of the allocated band (from 184 to 192kHz)
At the edges, the recommendation is to leave 8kHz interband for other digital PLC.
The way to connect PLCs in parallel and to reduce such interband are not discussed in this document.
For an analog PLC, no interband is requested. The main reason is that the nominal level of analog signal
within the band is lower than digital PLC. QAM signals could be considered as a blank noise at
maximum power. Analog signals are few tones distributed within the band.
12.3.2 Internal Noise Measurement

Due to the proximity of QAM, and especially the lack of separate TX filters, the rejection of signal is
only entrusted to the Hybrid transformer (and related tuning).
For that reason, the internal SNR measure may be altered and seen lower than it should be.

13. Adjacent Mode for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
13.1 Scope
This document handles about the adjacent band configuration. This configuration is helpful when you
have a single band available for TX/RX, and a separated band mode is preferred to superimposed mode
respect to SNR or recovery time best achievement.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to achieve the best performance for the 8+8kHz
configuration (4kHz of DATA and 4kHz of analog band).
This document does not apply for other adjacent modes such as 4+4kHz.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment on line, that is to say:
▪ Field engineer
13.2 Hardware configuration

13.2.1 TX filter
The TX filter will be tuned to include both reception and transmission bands.
The use of two different 8kHz transmission filers is prohibited because of the tapping loss, which will
exceed reasonable limits near the band center.
So it will be 16kHz wide like for the following scheme:
Tx filter
16kHz
8kHz 8kHz
Figure 78: Tx filter Transmission Band
This configuration avoids the interference between the transmission filter and the reception filter and
gives the better SNR achievement.
So, even if separated mode TX filter settings could work in some cases, we recommend configuring the
system as this for adjacent mode.
The Rx filter, however, keeps a normal bandwidth of 8kHz.

13.3 HMI Configuration
13.3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration
The first step is the choice of the Master/Slave
The focus of attention must be the robustness of the maintenance channel. In order to ensure the best
availability, you must set the QAM far from each other to reduce the cross talk in the data band.
Therefore,
The recommendation is to set the master to the LOWER frequency
16kHz
Noise measurement
FSK SL
Noise measurement
FSK M
channel
QAM QAM
channel
analog analog
band band
8kHz 8kHz
MASTER TX SLAVE TX
Figure 79: Master/Slave Configuration
For instance, if you use a 184-200KHz band

▪ The MASTER will transmit in the lower part of the allocated band(from 184 to 192kHz)
▪ The SLAVE will transmit in the upper part of the allocated band (from 192 to 200kHz)
At the edges, the recommendation is to leave 8kHz interband for other digital PLC.
The way to connect PLCs in parallel and to reduce such interband is not discussed in this document.
13.3.2 Noise Measurement

Due to the proximity of QAM, and especially the lack of separate TX filters, the rejection of signal is
only entrusted to the Hybrid transformer (and related tuning).
For that reason, the internal SNR measure may be altered and seen lower than it should be.

14. Superimposed Mode
14.1 Scope
This section handles about the Superimposed Mode. This configuration is helpful when you have a
single band available for TX/RX.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to make the decision between the separated mode and
the superimposed mode.
This document gives some precautions about the use of superimposed mode
It also presents some installation rules in order to get the best performance on line.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment on line, that is to say:
▪ Field engineer
This document is valid for the product release 6.1 and later. It includes the use of differential hybrid.
14.2 Discussion about the choice of the transmission mode

The choice of a transmission mode for the PLC depends on the band needs and on the line bandwidth
availability.
Once the customer demand is totally defined, two factors must be considered to match the
requirements:
▪ The QAM bandwidth
▪ The encoder
A simple formula to calculate the approximate available bitrate in function of these criteria is
B=0.8 * BW * K
With BW the QAM bandwidth in Hz
K function of the encoder: 2 for QAM4
4 for QAM16 and TCM32
6 for QAM64 and TCM128
8 for QAM256
10 for QAM1024
For instance, for 16 kHz of QAM64, the gross bit rate is B=0.8*16000*6=76800 bit/s
Thus, for the same encoder, the superimposed mode saves half the band to reach the same bit rate.

SUPERIMPOSED SEPARATED
MODE MODE
INTERBAND
RX
TX RX TX
BW BW BW
Figure 80: COMPARISON between the bandwidth in separated mode and in superimposed
mode
But the choice is not so simple. The superimposed mode implies an echo cancellation and there are
many consequences:
▪ The reception gets the whole signal. The transmission signal is more likely to be higher than the
reception signal, which means that the AGC reference will be the Tx. The reception signal
dynamic will be lower than in separated mode.
▪ The synchronisation is sequential for the superimposed mode. The system trains first one side
and after the other side. Furthermore, an training of the echo canceller is necessary.
In separated mode, the training is contemporary for both sides.
For these reasons the synchronisation time is far quicker in separated mode (60s against 100s)
▪ The resynchronisation time is also different in both cases. The quick resynchronisation is really
fast in separated mode(less than 1s). In superimposed mode, a readaption of the echo canceller
is necessary, which implies a longer delay for resynchronisation (near 8s)
▪ The performance depends directly on the capacity for the Echo canceller to cancel the own
transmission. Obviously, the Line attenuation influence will be really critical:
For a 40dB cancellation, the disturbing due to the own transmission will imply a SNR of
20dB for a line Attenuation of 20dB
30dB for a line Attenuation of 10dB
The good adaptation to the line is also a really important factor for the echo cancellation.
Some simple rules can be deduced from all these considerations:
▪ If there is no band occupation issue, the separated mode must be preferred
▪ In good conditions, the performances (SNR Vs BER) are equals in separated mode and in
superimposed mode but the bandwidth is halved
▪ In case of disturbing (line changes, spikes), the resynchronisation is faster in separated mode
▪ In bad conditions, like an high line attenuation or a bad adaptation, the superimposed mode is
not indicated.
14.3 Precautions
Two major precautions must be taken before deciding to set a PLC on line in superimposed mode:
14.3.1 Line adaptation

The use of the system implies a tuning of the Hybrid transformer.

The tuning consists in adapting the transmission to the line conditions (impedance, capacity). In case of
poor line, especially for the short line, the impedance is too tough and too variable to reach a good
tuning, in this case, the reinjection of the transmission into the reception is very high and the system is
not able of synchronising.
WARNING: If the line attenuation is higher than the transformer rejection,

the system may not synchronise
14.3.2 Line attenuation

It is not recommended, due to the HF reinjection to use the superimposed mode for line attenuation
over 25dB.
14.4 Discussion about the installation

Two factors are critical for the system capacity of synchronising:
▪ The power in the reception line
▪ The rejection capacity
14.4.1 The power in the reception line

14.4.1.1 Transmission power
In superimposed mode, the choice of the transmission power is only dependent on the noise in band:
The attenuation is not a decisive criterion. Actually, any power choice (over 2W) should be sufficient for
the line attenuation recommended (see paragraph 14.3.2).
Thus, the transmission power should only be chose in function of the noise level.
The transmission power should guarantee a SNR sufficient to avoid unacceptable BER.
In absence of noise, a power of 10W ensures the best performances for the system
14.4.1.2 Reception attenuation

The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) allows adapting automatically the attenuation on Rx board. As a
recommendation, the AGC value should always be stored in the PLC at commissioning when the
system is running. In that way, the system starts with a good AGC value in case of restart.
Go in Maintenance | System Equalization | AGC to store the AGC initialization value in the PLC.
14.4.2 Rejection Capacity

As said above, the rejection attenuation is a really critical factor to get the best performance.
To reach this scope, it is really important to tune the Hybrid transformer to the line conditions.
The recommendations are
▪ Measure the rejection at the center of the QAM band
▪ Adapt the line capacity by moving the capacitors jumpers
▪ Adapt the varistor to get the best rejection

The difference between the transmitted signal level measured at the output of the system (balanced
output or unbalanced output) should be of 20dB minimum.
If the rejection is lower than 20dB, it could jeopardise the system synchronisation.
So the rejection tuning must be performed with the best care.

Gridcom T390
Human Machine Interface
Version: 9.0
T390/EN HMI
CONTENTS
1. Overview ........................................................................................................ 5
2. CDrom installation .......................................................................................... 6
2.1 Installation using Internet Explorer .......................................................................................6
2.2 Installation using Firefox or Chrome Browsers ...................................................................... 7
2.3 Direct Installation from the CD ROM.....................................................................................8
3. Connecting the HMI to T390 .......................................................................... 10

3.1 Physical connection between a PC and a PLC...................................................................... 10
3.1.1 Basic connection ........................................................................................................................... 10
3.1.2 Indirect PC connection through a LAN (complex configuration) ....................................................11
3.2 Check if your PC is able to access the equipment ................................................................ 12
3.3 Firewall administration and « Well known ports » ............................................................... 12
3.3.1 Firewall ......................................................................................................................................... 12
3.3.2 Communications from the HMI to the PLC target equipment ........................................................13
3.3.3 Communications from the PLC target equipment to external world ............................................. 14
3.4 Configuring the PC (Windows 7) .......................................................................................... 14
3.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.2 Modifying computer TCP/IP configuration ................................................................................... 14
3.4.3 Install the HMI software ................................................................................................................. 17
3.5 Access to the PLC ................................................................................................................ 17
3.5.1 Connection .................................................................................................................................... 17
3.5.2 Record the PLC IP in the HMI ........................................................................................................ 18
3.6 Configure the PLC IP address .............................................................................................. 21
3.6.1 Why configuring the PLC IP address ? ........................................................................................... 21
3.6.2 How to read the PLC IP address.................................................................................................... 21
3.6.3 How to change the IP address of the PLC ..................................................................................... 22
3.6.4 Warning........................................................................................................................................ 22
4. HMI Introduction .......................................................................................... 23

4.1 Main window description .................................................................................................... 23
4.2 Toolbar ............................................................................................................................... 23
4.3 Menus .................................................................................................................................24
4.4 Status Bar ...........................................................................................................................24
4.5 Date Manager ..................................................................................................................... 25
4.6 PLC Information..................................................................................................................26
5. User management......................................................................................... 27
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 27
5.2 Anonymous mode and access manager .............................................................................. 27
5.3 System Security Management window ...............................................................................28
5.4 PLC authentication .............................................................................................................29
Gridcom T390 1 HMI

5.5 RADIUS authentication ....................................................................................................... 30
5.5.1 System Security Level....................................................................................................................31
5.5.2 Local and Remote access ...............................................................................................................31
5.6 User level ............................................................................................................................ 32
5.7 Enabling the security ........................................................................................................... 33
6. Configuration first steps ................................................................................ 34

6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.2 Hardware configuration window ......................................................................................... 34
6.2.1 Connected mode .......................................................................................................................... 34
6.2.2 Disconnected mode ..................................................................................................................... 35
6.3 Configuration window ......................................................................................................... 36
6.4 Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................ 37
6.4.1 Offline: Full ................................................................................................................................... 38
6.4.2 Online: Services (Maint.) .............................................................................................................. 38
6.4.3 Online: Patches ............................................................................................................................ 40
7. AMP tab ........................................................................................................ 41

7.1 RF stage............................................................................................................................... 41
7.1.1 Output Power Panel ...................................................................................................................... 41
7.1.2 Transmission Center Frequency .................................................................................................... 42
7.1.3 Reception Center Frequency ......................................................................................................... 42
7.1.4 PLC Mode panel............................................................................................................................ 42
7.1.5 Show HF ....................................................................................................................................... 43
7.2 Misc and Alarm configuration ............................................................................................. 43
7.2.1 AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Alarm panel .................................................................................. 44
7.2.2 Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) Alarm panel ...................................................................................... 45
7.2.3 Gain Alarm panel .......................................................................................................................... 45
7.2.4 Enable Amplifier panel ................................................................................................................. 45
7.3 Advanced configuration ...................................................................................................... 45
7.3.1 FSK level ....................................................................................................................................... 46
7.3.2 Ratios ........................................................................................................................................... 46
7.3.3 SNR computation for digital and analogue band ........................................................................... 46
8. PRCS tab ....................................................................................................... 50

8.1 Software configuration – digital mode ................................................................................ 50
8.1.1 Basic Access.................................................................................................................................. 51
8.1.2 Encoder ........................................................................................................................................ 52
8.1.3 Misc .............................................................................................................................................. 52
8.1.4 Data ............................................................................................................................................. 54
8.1.5 Channel Activation panel .............................................................................................................. 54
8.1.6 User Alarm ................................................................................................................................... 55
8.1.7 TP (Setttings for external analogue teleprotection) .......................................................................57
8.1.8 Ringing Generator ........................................................................................................................ 61
8.1.9 Speech Configuration in digital mode........................................................................................... 62
8.1.10 Fallback option ........................................................................................................................... 63
8.2 Analog configuration: Speech and MTU .............................................................................64
Gridcom T390 2 HMI

8.2.1 Speech/Telegraph configuration in analog mode ......................................................................... 64
8.2.2 Configure Speech channel ............................................................................................................ 69
8.2.3 Configure Telegraph channel........................................................................................................ 72
8.2.4 MTU configuration (analog mode) ............................................................................................... 74
8.2.5 Frequency gap between services ...................................................................................................75
8.3 Note on speech channels modes ......................................................................................... 75
8.3.1 Phone / Phone Connection (Hot Line) ........................................................................................... 76
8.3.2 Incoming call alerts ....................................................................................................................... 76
8.3.3 PABX / Phone Connection............................................................................................................. 76
8.3.4 Transit Connection ........................................................................................................................ 77
9. TPI tab .......................................................................................................... 78

9.1 TPI HMI Hardware Configuration ........................................................................................ 78
9.2 Power configuration ........................................................................................................... 78
9.2.1 Default values............................................................................................................................... 79
9.2.2 TPX power.................................................................................................................................... 79
9.3 TPI configuration menu....................................................................................................... 81
9.4 Main screen.........................................................................................................................82
9.5 Communication path ..........................................................................................................82
9.5.1 Defining communication paths..................................................................................................... 83
9.5.2 Operator ...................................................................................................................................... 84
9.6 Analog, case dual tone ........................................................................................................84
9.6.1 Case 4 commands ........................................................................................................................ 86
9.6.2 Case 6 commands Mode A ........................................................................................................... 87
9.6.3 Case 6 commands Mode B ........................................................................................................... 89
9.6.4 Case 2 set/reset ............................................................................................................................ 92
9.6.5 Case 3 set/reset ............................................................................................................................ 93
9.6.6 Analog Interface TX window ........................................................................................................ 95
9.6.7 Analog Interface RX window........................................................................................................101
9.7 Analog, case mixed mode ................................................................................................. 103
9.7.1 Frequencies .................................................................................................................................103
9.7.2 Command coding ........................................................................................................................105
9.7.3 Relation between commands and frequencies............................................................................ 109
9.7.4 Analog Interface TX window ........................................................................................................110
9.7.5 Analog interface RX window ........................................................................................................ 113
9.8 Digital ............................................................................................................................... 116
9.9 Input commands ............................................................................................................... 118
9.9.1 Protection scheme ......................................................................................................................119
9.9.2 Operator .....................................................................................................................................119
9.9.3 Holding delay ............................................................................................................................. 120
9.9.4 Validation delay ......................................................................................................................... 120
9.9.5 Start (Ext Blk) .............................................................................................................................. 121
9.9.6 Filter............................................................................................................................................121
9.10 Output commands .......................................................................................................... 122
9.10.1 Reception Commands ...............................................................................................................123
9.10.2 Transmission Commands ......................................................................................................... 124
9.10.3 Protection scheme .................................................................................................................... 124
Gridcom T390 3 HMI

9.10.4 Operator................................................................................................................................... 124
9.10.5 Holding Delay ............................................................................................................................125
9.10.6 Validation delay.........................................................................................................................125
9.10.7 Unblocking ............................................................................................................................... 126
9.10.8 Start (External Blocking)........................................................................................................... 126
9.10.9 Events/Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 128
9.10.10 State on alarm .........................................................................................................................130
9.11 Warning about protection scheme in analog path ........................................................... 132
Gridcom T390 4 HMI

1. Overview
This document aim is to describe as exhaustively as possible the configuration windows of HMI.
▪ Section 2 deals with the HMI installation from the CD provided with your equipment.
▪ Section 3 is a short procedure to connect the HMI.
▪ Section 4 is an introduction to HMI.
▪ Section 5 deals with the user management.
▪ Section 6 is about first steps configuration.
▪ Following sections presents the main windows of configuration.
▪ Section 7 presents the Amplifier tab.
▪ Section 8 presents the Processing tab.
▪ Section 9 presents the Teleprotection tab.
Gridcom T390 5 HMI

2. CDrom installation
This section gives the procedure to install the HMI application of the T390 equipment on a Windows 7
personal computer.
2.1 Installation using Internet Explorer

1. Insert the CD into the CD drive.
2. If the Autoplay feature of windows is not enabled on your PC, then nothing will happen. In this
case follow the instructions given in chapter 2.3.
3. If the Autoplay function of windows is enabled on your computer, the following windows should
automatically appear.
4. Click Yes, the following window will open.
5. Click on Install Software

6. The "File Download" security warning windows will appear. Select Run.
7. The "Unknown Publisher" security warning windows will appear. Select Run.
8. The Installation procedure of the HMI will then start.
Gridcom T390 6 HMI

9. If an error message “Unable to save file” appears, it means that the admin rights are not
available on the PC. If the message does not appear go to step 10, else follows first the
instructions 9.1 to 9.4.
9.1. Close the error message.

9.2. In the CD ROM homepage, click on Browse this CDROM
9.3. An explorer window will appear. Open folder HMI / T390_HMI_Customer.
9.4. Right click on setup.exe and select “Run as admin”.
10. Follow the instructions until the end of the installation wizard.
2.2 Installation using Firefox or Chrome Browsers

1. Insert the CD into the CD drive
2. If the Autoplay feature of windows is not enabled on your PC, then nothing will happen. In this
case follow the instructions given in chapter 2.3
3. If the Autoplay function of windows is enabled on your computer, the following window should
automatically appear:
Gridcom T390 7 HMI

4. Click on Install Software. The opening window appears:
5. Save file setup.exe. After download, right click on setux.exe and select “Run as admin”.
6. The Installation procedure of the HMI will then start
2.3 Direct Installation from the CD ROM

1. Open an explorer window on "My Computer". For this, double-click on the "My Computer" Icon
on the Desktop, or click on "My Computer" in the Start Menu.
2. Right-click on the CD, then click "Open"
3. The CD content will appear
Gridcom T390 8 HMI

4. Double-click on the CDROM_ini
5. Follow the instructions given in sections 2.1 or 2.2 from step 3.
NOTE: You can also copy the content of the CD ROM on a temporary directory on your local
Hard Disk Drive and execute the steps above from this directory.
Gridcom T390 9 HMI

3. Connecting the HMI to T390
WARNING: Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety section, the technical data section and the ratings on the
equipment rating label.
3.1 Physical connection between a PC and a PLC

Use the cable provided under the user kit (cross Ethernet cable equipped with RJ45 plug,
First, establish a physical connection between the system Ethernet port of the T390 product and the PC
running the HMI, by one of the following methods:
▪ Direct PC to equipment connection, by the means of a cross-cable (Ethernet 10/100 MB plug)
▪ Basic connection by the means of a Ethernet HUB or switch
▪ Connection of the equipment to an existing LAN
▪ Connection to a large network through an Ethernet router
All units of system are connected together through the daisy-chain lvds ring. This feature allows seeing
and configuring the whole system with only one Ethernet connection.
However, under some circumstances (firmware corruption, kernels incompatibility, parameters
mismatch, etc), it could be necessary to connect to each unit to restablish the system coherency.
We recommend connecting always to the processing unit for faster access to the equipment.
3.1.1 Basic connection

Basic connection means that PC and T390 equipment are not connected to an existing LAN or WAN,
allowing a complete free Ethernet configuration.
In this figure, you are completely free for choosing the IP address of the equipment.
Gridcom T390 10 HMI

By default, the IP address of T390 equipment is given below. In any case, this value should be
mentioned in the TRS or FAT/SAT report sheet.
Release Default IP Address

REL 8.x and 9.x 10.22.171.200
If no change has been made during commissioning, FAT or SAT, all units have the same default IP
address, forbidding connecting them on a HUB or switching equipment.
Connect only one unit first, reconfigure the IP address/mask/gateway of each recognized units, and
reboot the system. After this operation, you may connect all units to the HUB.
3.1.2 Indirect PC connection through a LAN (complex configuration)

In the scheme depicted below, each computer shown are able to configure the digital PLC. In addition,
through the LAN2LAN feature of the PLC, you could also configure the remote PLC and all PLC seen
through the TCP/IP network.
Before connecting the PLC to a network, you have to properly configure your equipment to be
compliant with your network. Otherwise you may jeopardize your network and/or not be able to access
your equipment.
Connect first your equipment to an isolated network as described in the above basic connection
chapter, and configure properly your system.
Contact your network administrator to obtain a free IP address range for your products and the
gateway IP address if a router is on the path between your PC and the connected equipments.
Verify also the presence of a firewall in the network that may block the traffic between the HMI and the
T390.
Gridcom T390 11 HMI

3.2 Check if your PC is able to access the equipment
The PC should be configured properly to be able to see the Ethernet subnet of the PLC. In other words,
the PC should have an IP address mask allowing to not hide the address of the connected equipment.
To know and configure your PC, follow the guide below:
Run ipconfig/all from a Command Prompt window.
The information that can be retrieved is:
Name Example Description

“Physical Address” 00-0D-56-A8-D3-62 MAC address of the interface
“IP address” 131.12.14.234 IP address of the interface
“Subnet Mask” 255.255.255.0 IP Mask
“Default gateway” 131.12.14.197 Gateway IP address
In the above configuration, you will be able to see IP address:

from 131.12.14.0 to 131.12.14.255
If your equipment has not been modified, its default IP address should be 10.22.171.200, and then you
will not be able to see it. You have to change the IP configuration of the PC.
3.3 Firewall administration and « Well known ports »

3.3.1 Firewall
It is mandatory to ensure that the installed program MicomT1_Customer.exe is allowed in the
Firewall(s) administration management rules to establish communication using any port numbers.
Gridcom T390 12 HMI

3.3.2 Communications from the HMI to the PLC target equipment
The HMI and the PLC use defined ports that must not be used by another program.
The ports used by the HMI depends on the type of connection, with or without SSH.
In classical communication mode (without SSH)

The HMI connect to a PLC on 3 ports:
5000: Orders (connection and commands to the PLC)
5001: Download (Bitstream)
5002: Upload (Events, History)
In SSH communication mode

The HMI connect to PLC through a localhost (127.0.0.1) SSH channel tunnel session port:
22
The HMI connects through localhost SSH tunnel to the PLC using following ports:
PortOffset: Orders
PortOffset + 1: Download
PortOffset + 2: Upload
With PortOffset = 5600 + 5*(NbInstances - 1)
And NbInstances in [1 .. 5]
That means that for the first HMI connected, the used ports will be 5600, 5601, 5602.
Check that the needed ports are not already opened by another application process (pid).
netstat -a -n -o is the command to list all the opened ports established or listening.
To check that ports needed for the Micom application are not already used, write the following
commands in a console window:
> Netstat -a -n -o | findstr /c:5600

No other process should be found.
NOTE: Additional Ports numbers are dynamic allocated by the SSH channel tunnel software.
Example: (monitoring ports used by the Micom... program)
Gridcom T390 13 HMI

3.3.3 Communications from the PLC target equipment to external
world
The PLC listens following ports:
5000, 5001, 5002 (without SSH)
Or
22 (with SSH)
For SNMP publication, the connection port and IP address are configurable by HMI.
For Radius authentication, the connection port and IP address are configurable by HMI.
3.4 Configuring the PC (Windows 7)

3.4.1 Overview
In order to access the T390 product, it is mandatory to:
▪ Configure the PC hosting the HMI according to the PLC product.
▪ Install the HMI software.
▪ Configure the units.ini file within HMI directory to point the PLC units.
▪ Know the IP address/mask of the PLC product.
3.4.2 Modifying computer TCP/IP configuration

▪ Open the control panel from the start menu; double-click on the icon named "Network and
Dial-up Connections". This opens an explorer window showing all the computer network
connections. Right-click on the icon representing the connection you want to configure and
select "Properties" in the pop-up menu. The following window should appear:
Gridcom T390 14 HMI

▪ Click on "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click the "Properties" button.
▪ Then, the following window allows you to configure the IP address, the subnet mask and the
gateway address for this connection.
Gridcom T390 15 HMI

▪ To connect the Personal computer directly to the PLC, enter an IP Address compatible with the
Subnet Mask of the PLC IP configuration. Set the Default gateway field to 0.0.0.0. The DNS
server address fields can be left blank.
Example:
The default configuration of the PLC is:
▪ IP Address: 10.22.171.200
▪ Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
▪ Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
The configuration of the computer may be set to:
▪ IP Address: 10.22.171.202
▪ Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
▪ Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
To connect on the PLC through your local area network, ask first to your administrator. In this case, the
following procedure should be followed:
▪ Program the TCP/IP properties of your computer according to the T390 default configuration
and connect directly the PLC and the computer with a cross-cable as described above.
▪ With the HMI application, modify the TCP-IP settings of the T390 according to your
administrator's recommendations.
▪ Program the TCP/IP properties of your computer back to the original configuration (connection
to your local area network).
▪ Connect the T390 and the computer on the local area network with direct cables.
Gridcom T390 16 HMI

3.4.3 Install the HMI software
Run the executable setup program found on your CD-ROM, following the instruction given in section 2:
CDrom installation in order to install the HMI software.
3.5 Access to the PLC

3.5.1 Connection
▪ Step 1: Double click on the “.exe” icon:
▪ Step 2: The main tool bar appears.
▪ Step 3: Click on “Connection”:
▪ Step 4: Select the IP associated to the module you are connected:
▪ Step 5: Click on “Connect”
▪ Step 6: The “Identification” window appears to leave you enter the default user name and
password.
Gridcom T390 17 HMI

▪ Step 7: “3” is the common user name and password standard access.
Procedure to change user name and password is given in chapter 5: User management.
▪ Step 8: Click on “Login” and you can have an overview of your system:
▪ Step 9: Click on “OK” and the main window is appearing.
▪ You are connected.
3.5.2 Record the PLC IP in the HMI

There are 2 ways for recording IP address within the HMI:
▪ Adding a single address within the HMI dialog box (easy method)
▪ Modifying the “unit.ini file” of the HMI program
3.5.2.1 Easy Method

▪ To access Local Connection, select PLC|Connect Local. During the connection, the HMI
identifies the system configuration, and the following selection window is displayed:
Gridcom T390 18 HMI

Figure 1: Unit selection window
▪ Initially, the display reflects the current system setup. To add a new unit IP, right-click in the
display and select Add Unit, as in Figure 2. The new IP details can now be added.
Figure 2: Add a new Unit
Figure 3: Add info of a new Unit

▪ Then click the "Confirm" button.
Gridcom T390 19 HMI

To connect to an IP which is not in the list, right-click in the display and select Connect to, as in Figure
4:
Figure 4: Connect to new IP address
3.5.2.2 “Expert mode” method

Search for the "units.ini” file within the install directory of the HMI (should be by default “C:\Program
Files\GE\T390\Ini”) and edit the file with the windows Notepad.
Each PLC unit owns a text block composed by:
[name]
addip=
Type in all the names and IP address for the PLC units you want to access.
Example:
Gridcom T390 20 HMI

If the PLC rejects any logon and you are able to ping its IP address properly, the equipment may be
protected by the security pack option. In this case, refer to the security pack chapter for details.
3.6 Configure the PLC IP address

3.6.1 Why configuring the PLC IP address ?
If you only need to configure the PLC through a laptop PC (cross cable), you don’t need to change the
PLC address configuration. Simply use the default configuration each time you need a connection.
But, in all other cases, you need to change this configuration.
Examples:
▪ Connecting one or more PLC on a LAN or HUB
▪ Using the LAN2LAN module, for connecting 2 LANs across a PLC link
▪ Remote configuration or measurements through LAN2LAN
In such cases, each PLC should have a unique IP address to be properly identified on the network.
Take care to assign a correct IP address respect to your subnet mask.
You should also set the gateway address if you need to access the PLC through a router.
3.6.2 How to read the PLC IP address

It is quite difficult to know the IP of the PLC after having applied some changes.
So BE REALLY CAREFULL when changing the IP Address of a system and record the configuration
change on a secure place.
Original manufactured PLC:
Gridcom T390 21 HMI

Each PLC comes with a default address/mask. Try this one prior searching with another method.
▪ Default IP address : 10.22.171.200
▪ Default IP Mask : 255.255.255.0
▪ Default gateway : 0.0.0.0
3.6.3 How to change the IP address of the PLC

Go to PLC info and Recognition to modify IP settings for each unit by sending them after setting new
address under Change IP.
Change IP address and click Apply.
3.6.4 Warning
The IP address, mask and gateway address of each equipment connected to the network should be
properly configured.
Check the Factory Acceptance tests document, provided within the PLC, to know the IP address of the
PRCS module.
Gridcom T390 22 HMI

4. HMI Introduction
This section introduces the Human Machine Interface (HMI), illustrates the user interface, and
describes the basics of operation and access.
4.1 Main window description

On launching the HMI, the main window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5:
Figure 5: HMI main window

All options display a window or pane inside the main window.
4.2 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar, and is illustrated in Figure 6:
Gridcom T390 23 HMI

Configuration
Connection Maintenance
Measurement
Firmware Events
Upgrade
Figure 6: Main window toolbar

References to the relevant explanations of facilities available from the menu are given in the sections
that follow.
4.3 Menus
All functions available from the main window are listed in its menus, as shown below.
Figure 7: Main window menus

The functionality within these menus is described later in the document.
4.4 Status Bar

The status bar, shown in Figure 8, is located below the HMI main window. It provides general and real
time information about the PLC.
Gridcom T390 24 HMI

Figure 8: Main window status bar
The following table describes the various messages displayed in the status bar:
Status bar
Description Values
info position
- Disconnected
TCP/IP or remote Connection
1 - Connected
status
- Connecting
2 HMI user identification level Level 1 to 3
- Running (GREEN) (Training, Service,
ANALOG ONLY …)
- FAILED (RED)
3 PLC running mode
- Entering conf (RED)
- Maintenance mode (Orange)
- etc
- OK
4 PLC general Status - Warning
- Failed
- Used when launching any menu to
5 Progress bar
report progress progress
- No new events available
6 Events availability
- New events available
Table 1: Status bar messages
4.5 Date Manager

To access the Date Manager select Tools|Date Setup.
The window shown in Figure 9: Date manager window is displayed.
To match the PLC system date and time to the PC, click the >> button. To match the PC date and time
to the PLC, click the << button.
Gridcom T390 25 HMI

Figure 9: Date manager window
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize PLC clock in the Internet. To set local
Time Server IP address, click SNTP Enable, enter the IP address, and click Apply.
Note that SNTP requires the purchase and installation of options KEY-IRIGB and KEY-L2L.
4.6 PLC Information

To view PLC information, select File|PLC Info. The pane shown in following figure is displayed:
Figure 10: PLC info Window

To exit, click OK.
Gridcom T390 26 HMI

5. User management
5.1 Overview
There are three levels of security in the T390:
▪ Anonymous: unsecured basic access (backward compatible).
▪ PLC authentication: users must be registered in the PLC.
▪ RADIUS authentication: users are registered on a RADIUS server and on PLC.
The PLC is delivered without security pack enabled; The “Anonymous” mode is configured out of the
factory, so that the equipment can be accessed freely.
When RADIUS authentication is selected, exchanged are automatically SSH encrypted. SSH encryption
is also available as an option in PLC authentication mode.
Fallback to PLC authentication option switches authentication to PLC defined users when the RADIUS
server is not available.
5.2 Anonymous mode and access manager

The anonymous mode is an unsecured basic access. Users are only registered on the PC. It is possible to
change users registered by using the access manager provided with the HMI.
The access manager is an independent application launched to configure access rights for users
depending on their login identity. This application generates password files that control user login.
Double-click the icon marked AccessManager.exe to display the authentication dialog, as in Figure 11:
Figure 11: Authentication

Enter the standard password mdp to display the main window, as shown in Figure 11:
Gridcom T390 27 HMI

Figure 12: Access Manager user configuration
Users are created with the Apply Changes button or deleted with the Delete User button. The
configuration is saved by clicking Apply.
When selecting a user from the list on the left hand panel of the window pane, the properties for that
user are displayed on the right hand panel: name, password, a textual description, and a user level. The
user level defines access to the various levels of functionality.
5.3 System Security Management window

User belonging the Key “Security-Pack” have the possibilty to manage the security level of the PLC in
to the window Maintenance|System Security Management.
Figure 13: System Security Management

In this window, the panel System Security Mode is used to choose the authentication mode. The panel
Radius Parameters is dedictaed to radius parameters configuration.
Gridcom T390 28 HMI

The panel PLC users list provides the list of users registered in the PLC. The panels Add a new user
allows adding a new user to this list.
5.4 PLC authentication

In the PLC authentication level, users are registered in the PLC. The list of registered users is given in
the panel PLC users list.
Figure 14: Users Access Database
NOTE: The first PC user to PLC connection, there is a standard “once-only” login/password
combination admin/admin. This is only used for creating the initial customer password
connection, and then is not valid anymore.
Activation of SSH encryption for communication between the PC and the PLC is possible in the mode
PLC authentication and is done by clicking on « Activate SSH » checkbox.
Addition of new users in the PLC is done in the panel “Add a new user”. After registration, new users are
inserted in Users Access Database.
Figure 15: Add a new User
The login name must be no more than 14 characters, the password no more than 6. The following
characters are not authorized for user/pwd : " \ / # .
Gridcom T390 29 HMI

As explained before, for the first PC user to PLC connection, there is a standard “once-only”
login/password combination admin/admin, which is overwritten at first registration.
The first registration should be a level 3 user. Otherwise, registration is rejected.
5.5 RADIUS authentication

In the RADIUS authentication mode, only users registered in the radius server can access the PLC.
Optionally internal users of the PLC can be allowed if the RADIUS server is not available by checking
“Fallback to PLC authentication” checkbox. If RADIUS authentication mode is selected, and if no users
are registered in the PLC, the default user admin/admin is NOT valid. Thus, at least one level 3 user
must be defined to enable the Fallback option.
In this mode, the communication protocol between the PC and the PLC is always SSH encrypted.
IP address, UDP Port and Shared Secret for the RADIUS server must be filled in the panel « RADIUS
Parameters ».
Figure 16: RADIUS parameters
The authentication workflow is as follows:

▪ HMI sends credentials to PRCS through SSH protocol
▪ PRCS asks for authentication to Radius Server
▪ Radius server identifies the user and the PRCS authorizes the connection to HMI
▪ HMI is connected to the PLC and screens available depend on user level
Gridcom T390 30 HMI

NOTE: Security level and RADIUS parameters modifications are only available in user level 3.
NOTE: When clicking on Apply button, a test is done to check Radius avaibility. If the test fails,
the Radius authentification mode cannot be applied.
5.5.1 System Security Level

The current System Security Level of the PLC is given in the status bar of the HMI. List of possible
message according to security level is given in Table 2.
Figure 17: Status Bar

Mode Message
Anonymous (empty)
PLC authentication without SSH PLC authentication
PLC authentication with SSH SSH - Blowfish - PLC authentication
RADIUS authentication SSH - Blowfish - RADIUS authentication
Table 2 : Status bar message
5.5.2 Local and Remote access

It is assumed that the PLC is only accessed from outside the substation through the Processing unit
(PRCS) Ethernet link over a corporate LAN, therefore it is the one and only link which is implemented
with SSH encryption and RADIUS authentication.
Others units of the equipment (Amplifier and Teleprotection) are accessed without encryption and
authentication level is “Anonymous” or PLC authentication at the most.
Gridcom T390 31 HMI

Figure 18: Local and Remote Access
5.6 User level

The User level defines the windows visible in the HMI.
The relation between visible windows and level is fixed and given in Table 3.
Screen / Function Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Connect X X X
Disconnect X X X
Bitstream X
Events / read X X X
Events / erase X
Configuration / read X X X
Configuration / write X X
Print X X
PLC Info X X X
Measures X X X
Maintenance X X
Gridcom T390 32 HMI

History Logging / read X X X
History Logging / erase X
Date setup X X
Firmware upgrade X
Manufacturing1 X X
Key Manager X
Main Script2 X
Table 3 : user acess configuration
5.7 Enabling the security

Prior to enabling the security, check the following:
▪ Option is available on the equipment (corresponding key has been loaded)
▪ Make sure an Administrator (level 3 user) login/pwd somewhere: if you forget the password,
you will not be able to connect to the equipment
▪ Create at least an account for:
 Administrator (level 3, full access)
 Commissioner (level 2, able to configure the equipment)
 Operator (level 1, able to read information about the equipment)
▪ Configure the RADIUS server parameters
To enable the service, simply go to the Maintenance / System Security Management tab within the
HMI, select the desired mode and apply your changes.
1
Not available in Customer version
2
Only available in Developer version
Gridcom T390 33 HMI

6. Configuration first steps
6.1 Overview
The configuration of the PLC is made up two main windows: the hardware configuration, and the
configuration window.
In the hardware configuration window, user gets a remaining of the hardware configuration, ie the
number of units and names, and can modify the bandwidth occupation and repartition between digital
and analog band.
This window is described in section 6.2 Hardware configuration window.
After configuring this hardware window, user can configure the rest of the PLC: TX and RX center
frequencies, services.
A very short presentation of this window is given in section 6.3 Configuration window and a complete
description of all tabs of this window is given in sections 7 to 9.
The apply of the new configuration to the PLC can be done in different ways. If the PLC is configured for
the first time, or if main changes are needed, then the system will need a reboot after apply, and
remote configuration through lan2lan won’t be possible.
If only modification in services are needed, then a “light” apply can be done: the system won’t reboot
and remote configuration through lan2lan is possible.
The complete description of different mode of apply are given in section 6.4 Configuration Mode.
6.2 Hardware configuration window

To open the PLC configuration window, select File|Configuraton or click on the configuration icon, as
illustrated in Figure 19:
Figure 19: Open the Hardware Configuration window
6.2.1 Connected mode

If the HMI has been launched in connected mode, the Hardware Configuration window shown in Figure
20 is displayed:
Gridcom T390 34 HMI

Figure 20: Hardware Configuration window in connected mode
The hardware configuration is displayed for information.The various panels show the name and a
textual description for each configured unit. The units names and the Add and Remove buttons of
teleprotection are inactive.
It is possible to insert a free text in the text field Substation name. This text is stored on the PLC after
applying and is reminded in the main window (section 4, Figure 5).
Then, choose the needed bandwidth distribution by following the steps:
▪ Select the total bandwidth.
▪ Choose the PRCS mode: analog, digital or mixed.
▪ Click on TPx to add a TPx if wished.
▪ Select the digital bandwidth when PRCS mode is “mixte”.
▪ Click Next to continue to the Configuration Window described in section 6.3.
6.2.2 Disconnected mode

It is possible to open the configuration window without in disconnected mode.
This disconnected mode is particularly useful:
▪ To prepare a offline configuration, without being connected to the PLC.
▪ To load an existing configuration, without being connected to the PLC.
If the HMI has been launched in disconnected mode, the following window is displayed:
Gridcom T390 35 HMI

Figure 21: Hardware Configuration Window in disconnected mode
This window is similar to that displayed for connected mode, but now the Load button is available, the
text fields are editable, and the Add and Remove buttons are also active.
The window is used for hardware configuration of the units in the system. AMP and PRCS are
mandatory, and internal teleprotection units can be added. Teleprotection Units are added to the upper
list by entering a name for the unit and clicking Add.
NOTE The name chosen for each unit must be unique within the system: it is the reference
identification for configuration. The name must not contain any Space characters.
6.3 Configuration window

Once the hardware configuration is completed, click Next to display the System Configuration
Window, as shown in Figure 22.
▪ In panel Config mode (1), select the needed configuration mode: Offline Full, Online Services
(Maint.) or Online Patches.
▪ The different modes are explained in section 6.4 Configuration Mode.
▪ In panel “Units from” (2), configure the units of the system one by one: the Amplifier must be
configured first, then PRCS and then Integrated Teleprotections if any.
▪ The whole description of each unit configuration is given in sections 7 AMP tab, 8 PRCS tab and
9 TPI tab.
▪ In panel File/PLC (3), Click Save to save the configuration to a file or click Apply to load this
configuration into the system.
Gridcom T390 36 HMI

Figure 22: System Configuration Window
6.4 Configuration Mode

All parameters must be set correctly and must be consistent with the remote PLC.
Please refer to the relevant manuals for a description of the various parameters.
There are three options available for firmware configuration, as follows:
▪ Offline configuration
▪ Online services configuration
▪ Online patches
The preferred option is selected from the panel at the lower left of the configuration window.
Figure 23: Configuration mode
Gridcom T390 37 HMI

6.4.1 Offline: Full
In this mode, the whole PLC configuration is accessible.
A PLC reboot will be automatically done after applying the new configuration.
This mode is useful at commissioning time or when the system requires major changes such as
frequency allocation and output power.
CAUTION: This mode must not be used if you are connected on remote equipment through
lan2lan. Otherwise, click on apply button will crash the equipment. If you are connected
on remote equipment through lan2lan, always use the “Online: Services (Maint.)” mode
described in the next section
6.4.2 Online: Services (Maint.)

In this mode only the services can be configured, but there is no need to reboot the system. Also, this
mode allows the service configuration changes while the system is still synchronized. The mode can be
used off-line, but is especially suited to on-line configuration.
It is carried out using the following steps:
Step 1: Switching in maintenance mode
Go in window “Maintenance/Processing” and switch the PLC to maintenance mode processing: either
Pseudo Noise, Fixed symbol, or LAN to LAN mode.
The whole digital band will then be dedicated fully to selected data (other digital services will be down).
If configuration of remote equipment through lan2lan is needed, Lan2lan has to be chosen.
As soon as the system is in maintenance mode, a message is displayed in the status bar.
Gridcom T390 38 HMI

Step 2: Configuration
On both sides of the link :
▪ Open Configuration Window.
▪ In Config Mode panel, select “Online Services mode”.
▪ Modify the configuration as needed.

▪ Click on Apply.
Step 3: Exit maintenance mode

On the same side as entered it (ie the PLC where the status is “local maintenance” and not “remote”),
open the window “Maintenance/Processing” and click on “Exit Maintenance”.
Gridcom T390 39 HMI

The service configuration is immediately operational.
NOTE: This mode requires a switching to maintenance mode step, in which only the selected
data (Pseudo Noise, Fixed symbol or Lan2lan) are transmitted.
NOTE: During the maintenance period, all services configured on the digital band will be down.
6.4.3 Online: Patches

This mode allows only alarm configuration.
It can be applied at any time without rebooting the system.
Gridcom T390 40 HMI

7. AMP tab
7.1 RF stage
Select the R.F. Stage tab to display the following pane:
Figure 24: Amplifier R.F. stage configuration

For successful signal transmission, the values set in this screen must be the same for both sides of the
T390 system (except Tx/Rx frequencies and the Master/Slave dialog).
7.1.1 Output Power Panel

AMPX Available
Use the additional External Amplifier Unit (AMPX) to increase maximum power to 80W.
PEP Range
This range must be set to one of the three following values:
▪ Pmax (default)
▪ Pmax/2
▪ Pmax/4
PEP Limiter
The signal power setting for the limiter can be expressed in two ways:
▪ As a percentage of maximum power (using the Power % text box). This parameter can take any
value between 10 and 100%, the default value being 100%.
▪ As an attenuation in dB (using the RF adjust text box). This parameter can take any value
between –3dB and 0dB, the default value being 0dB. This RF power adjust is used to adapt the
output power respect to the TX filter insertion loss
Estimated Output Power
Gridcom T390 41 HMI

This field is not editable. It displays the result of applying the limitation factor “power %” to the PEP
Range value. RF adjust is not taken into account in estimated output power computation.
7.1.2 Transmission Center Frequency

This value sets the transmission center frequency, using two slide bars:
▪ The top slide bar adjusts the center frequency in 1kHz steps, the default value being 184kHz.
The actual value is displayed in the text box above the slide bar. The actual frequency range
depends on the effective signal transmission power and can be derived as follows:
 Minimum frequency (in kHz): 20 + 0.5*RF Bandwidth (in kHz)
 Maximum frequency (in kHz): 700 – 0.5*RF Bandwidth (in kHz)
▪ The bottom slide bar provides finer adjustment of the frequency by up to 500Hz on either side
of the currently set center frequency.
7.1.3 Reception Center Frequency

This setting is only available when R.F. mode is set to “separate band”. It is used to set the reception
center frequency and uses two slide bars:
▪ The top slide bar allows for setting of the centre frequency in 1kHz steps, the default value
being 184kHz. The actual value is displayed in the text box above the slide bar. The actual
frequency range depends on the effective signal transmission power and can be derived as
follows: …same q, different calculation here, though…
 Minimum frequency (in kHz): 20 + 0.5*Effective power (in W)
 Maximum frequency (in kHz): 700 – 0.5*Effective power (in W)
▪ The bottom slide bar provides finer adjustment of the frequency by up to 500Hz on either side
of the currently set center frequency.
CAUTION: These settings must be consistent across the system. the RX frequency at Either end
must match the TX frequency at the other.
7.1.4 PLC Mode panel

The signal is transmitted using QAM modulation. The transmission and reception bands can be either
separated or superimposed. The settings under PLC mode are as follows:
▪ R.F. Mode: The operator selects a QAM modulation scheme with transmission and reception
bands either separated or superimposed. If “superimposed” is selected, the Rx (reception)
center frequency settings are grayed out and are no longer editable (since the Rx and Tx center
frequencies are the same in this mode).
▪ PLC dialog: For internal synchronization, a PLC link needs one system to be defined as
MASTER, the other as the SLAVE. The selection of MASTER and SLAVE is an arbitrary choice;
technically, the only difference is in the placement of the FSK maintenance channel. The Tx
maintenance channel is on the right side (upper frequencies) of the Tx transmit channel for the
system master.
Gridcom T390 42 HMI

7.1.5 Show HF
In the Configuration Window, click SHOW HF to display a graphical view of the currently allocated HF
bandwidth. The display updates immediately for changes in the layout. Additionally, any unintentional
overlaps (i.e. for allocations other than in superimposed mode) are highlighted in red as shown in Figure
25:
Figure 25: Overlap warning
NOTE: There is no option to select an AMPX Amplifier Unit (for 80W power) on this screen.
Rather, it is an option during amplifier configuration: to include an AMPX unit in the
configuration, check AMPX Available in the R.F. Stage pane of the AMP Configuration
Window, as shown in Figure 26:
Figure 26: Add AMPX Amplifier to the configuration
7.2 Misc and Alarm configuration

Select the Misc and Alarm tab to display the following pane:
Gridcom T390 43 HMI

Figure 27: Amplifier Misc and Alarm configuration
The system monitors several parameters and raises an alarm to alert the operator if they move out of
bounds.
Depending on the Processing Unit configuration, some of these alarms are mapped to three types of
alarm:
Alarm1 and Alarm2: These correspond to two relays on an external connection, allowing
the command of external devices such as sound alarms.
Lock condition: If an alarm is mapped to this condition, raising that alarm
automatically halts the system.
All alarms raised are stored for later analysis.
7.2.1 AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Alarm panel

Some parameters relating to Automated Gain Control are monitored by the system. Their limits can be
configured by the operator:
▪ AGC level: this level should stay within two limits (low and high). A high-level threshold is set so
that an alarm is raised if the AGC level rises above it. Similarly, a low-level threshold is set so
that an alarm is raised if the AGC level falls below it. The high and low thresholds are adjustable
by the operator, with the following constraints:
 AGC high-level threshold is set between -20dB and 48dB in 1dB steps, the default value
being 32dB.
 AGC low-level threshold is set between -21dB and 47dB in 1dB steps, the default value
being -16dB.
These two values must be consistent, i.e. the high-level threshold must be greater than the low-level
threshold.
▪ Mask Delay is used to mask the alarm for a given time. The alarms on high-level and low-level
threshold are not issued until after the delay expires. The Mask Delay is set between 1s and 10s
in 1s steps, the default value being 5s.
Gridcom T390 44 HMI

Adjustment of these parameters is performed using the corresponding slide bars, the actual value being
displayed in the adjacent text boxes.
7.2.2 Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) Alarm panel

A minimum SNR is necessary to maintain proper operation of the system. An SNR level threshold is
defined and an alarm is raised if the SNR falls below this level.
The SNR level threshold can be defined in this panel using the relevant slide bar. Its value must be
between 6dB and 90dB and can be adjusted in 1dB steps, the default value being 6dB. The actual value
is displayed in the adjacent text box.
NOTE: When the SNR measured by the PLc is less than the SNR threshold configured by user,
the front panel LED SNR starts blinking, and event is reported in the event file.
7.2.3 Gain Alarm panel

The gain alarm enable is ticked on automatically when “AMPX available”, under “RF stage”
configuration, is on.
It’s a limitation of TX power to avoid transmission saturation for 80w configuration.
7.2.4 Enable Amplifier panel

The Enable Amplifier checkbox is used for Amplifier commissioning.
The procedure is as follows:
▪ Uncheck Enable Amplifier and apply changes
▪ Shut down the system and configure the hardware filters
▪ Restart the system and go back to the configuration tab
▪ Set up filter frequencies in the RF Stage tab
▪ Click Enable Amplifier
▪ Apply changes
7.3 Advanced configuration
Figure 28: Amplifier Advanced
Gridcom T390 45 HMI

7.3.1 FSK level
This parameter is the level of the FSK supervision channel (120 Hz width) relative to the PEP output
level of the amplifier. It is fixed to -22 dB (i.e. 22 dB below the PEP output power), which is suitable for
almost every application.
For example, if the output power selected is 40W with an 80% limitation, this produces 32W, which is
+45 dBm. An FSK level of -22dB means the FSK signal will be at a level of 45-22 = +23 dBm.
Click Restore Default to restore default values on the screen, but note that these values must still be
applied. To apply the configuration click Apply.
7.3.2 Ratios
This panel displays the power sharing set for the digital band and analogue band.
By default, the repartition is:
Digital Bandwidth
Digital Channel Ratio =
Total Bandwidth
Analog Bandwidth
Analog Channel Ratio =
Total Bandwidth
Additionally, when the system supports a TPI sharing digital band with the QAM, the ratio between the
QAM and the guard of the TPI are also configurable. The default repartition 80% / 20% is suitable for
most applications.
7.3.3 SNR computation for digital and analogue band

The SNR is computed as the ratio between power measured in the FSK band in reception and the
power measured in an unoccupied band.
The SNR is computed by default by a narrow filtering at the edges of the QAM band (70Hz): This is the
Inband SNR.
Gridcom T390 46 HMI

FSK
Noise
Measurement
QAM BW
TPx BAND
Fc
USER BAND
Figure 29: Inband SNR computation

Note that there are three major limitations with this measurement:
▪ In the case of a narrow QAM band (4 or 8kHz), the narrow filtering is computed in a band too
close to the QAM. The noise offset is quite high and the SNR measurement is not sufficiently
sensitive.
▪ Measurement in a 70 kHz band is not as representative as a wide band of 1740 Hz for a reliable
noise measurement. An impulsive noise peak at this frequency could disturb the measurement
of the 70Hz filter.
▪ In the case of superimposed mode, the local FSK is set on the noise measurement band. An
alternative band must be allocated.
This measurement is recommended for:
▪ Separated Mode (8kHz,16khz)
▪ Adjacent Mode with TPx
This measurement is not recommended for:

▪ Separated mode (4kHz)
▪ Superimposed Mode
Adjacent Mode without TPX
Gridcom T390 47 HMI

Lower band Edge upper band Edge
n
a
rr
o
w
b Wide band
a Filter
n
d
fil
t
TPx BAND
e
r QAM BW
Fc
USER BAND
Figure 30: Signal spectra and noise measurement
In order to deal with the limitations stated above, the operator is given the options for specifying the
noise measurement band: inband or outband mesure, narrow/wide band filter and side of the measure
and distance of the measure to the edge of the useful signal.
Inband/outband option
▪ Inband is the default option
▪ Outband
In that case, the noise will be measured in a band allocated to the equipment (the interband, for
example).
Narrow/wide band filter

▪ A narrow band filter of 70Hz, easy to allocate but not so representative of the real noise level
▪ A wide band filter of 1740Hz, not so easy to allocate but more representative of the real noise in
the user band
Measure side
The operator must also choose whether to allocate the band on the same side as the FSK or on the
opposite side.
CAUTION: A wrong choice could jeopardise the start of the system. Noise measurement is critical
for correct equipment operation.
In summary,
▪ For a Master system, in reception, the FSK is on lower side of the QAM by default:
Gridcom T390 48 HMI

 Choosing the opposite side from the FSK selects the upper frequencies.
 Choosing the same side as the FSK selects the lower frequencies
▪ For a Slave system, in reception, FSK is on the upper side of the QAM by default:
 Choosing the opposite side from the FSK selects the lower frequencies.
 Choosing the same side as the FSK selects the upper frequencies
For superimposed configuration the option is only “Opposite side of RX FSK”.
Band allocation
The last option is the band allocation, which is the distance from the band edge to the noise band
centre frequency.
1, 2 or 3 kHz is a good choice.
▪ If you chose a nearer distance, the measure could be disturbed by the useful signal itself.
▪ 0 must not be chosen in case digital or mixte.
▪ If you chose a too far distance, the measure could be distorted by the RX filter.
▪ Distance must not be more than 8kHz in case digital 16kHz and mixte 12kHz.
Gridcom T390 49 HMI

8. PRCS tab
The Processing Unit Standard (PRCS) supports a range of adjustable settings for handling various site-
related parameters or other customer-driven configurations. Some of the parameters are set during the
manufacturing stage, some at integration time (for example, if they depend on other units in the target
T390 system), while some have to be set at installation and service start-up time.
This chapter describes the process of setting parameters, in the relevant operating mode, and identifies
the recommended or mandatory steps for performing the configuration.
8.1 Software configuration – digital mode

The Configuration Window displays a range of selectable tabs, each of which displays a group of related
parameters in a pane.
Figure 31: PRCS Configuration Window
The tabs available on the PRCS Configuration Window are as follows:

Menu Tab Where described Menu Tab Where described
Basic Access 8.1.1 Ring generator 8.1.8
Encoder 8.1.2 Data1 to Data4 8.1.4
Speech1 to Speech3
Misc(ellaneous) 8.1.3 8.1.9
(digital)
Speech1 to Speech3
User Alarm 8.1.6 8.2.1
(analogue)
TP 8.1.7 MTU1 to MTU4 8.2.4
Gridcom T390 50 HMI

The bottom right of the window displays a front view of the PRCS. According to which tab is selected,
and therefore which pane is displayed in the main window, the relevant interface is circled on the front
view picture, as in Figure 32 .
Figure 32: Highlighted interface
8.1.1 Basic Access
Figure 33: Configuration Window: Basic Access

This pane is for configuration of the high speed channel (V11), which the PRCS unit offers as an option.
The associated connector is highlighted in the PRCS front view picture.
Under the panel heading “Channel Activation”, there are two editable settings:
8.1.1.1 Enable Channel

Checking Enable Channel activates the high speed channel, which is disabled by default.
8.1.1.2 V11 clock

The clock source is selected from the three options by clicking one of the radio buttons:
Internal: The clock signal is generated by the PRCS unit
On master: The clock signal is provided by the device connected to the V11 connector
on the PLC master.
On slave: The clock signal is provided by the device connected to the V11 connector
on the PLC slave
Gridcom T390 51 HMI

8.1.1.3 Channel speed
The channel speed is set either by making a selection from a pull-down list in the lower of the two
boxes, or by typing a speed in the upper box. First click one of the radio buttons to select the entry
method. The default value is 64 kbit/s.
A typed-in speed must be consistent with the maximum bandwidth capacity of the selected encoder
mode (see section 8.1.2, Encoder for details).
8.1.2 Encoder
The Encoder pane is where settings are made for modulation mode and data rates. Click Encoder to
open the Encoder pane in the Configuration Window, as in Figure 34:
Figure 34: Configuration Window: Encoder pane

For Normal Mode, select a QAM or TCM setting from the pull-down list, as in Figure 35.
Figure 35: Encoder configuration

Fallback option is described in section 8.1.10: Fallback option.
8.1.3 Misc
The Misc pane is for configuring the miscellaneous parameters that relate to signal quality and module
interface choices.
Gridcom T390 52 HMI

Figure 36: Configuration Window: Misc pane
8.1.3.1 BER Alarm Threshold

When the BER rises above the threshold defined here, the signal is in degraded mode and the relevant
alarm is raised. This threshold, i.e. the acceptable BER (bit error ratio) range for the digital signal, is set
in this panel using the slide bar control. The current threshold value is displayed as a power of 10 in the
adjacent text box, and is adjustable from 10-9 to 10-1, in steps of 1 for the power of 10.
8.1.3.2 Modules panel

This panel enables any or all of the three interfaces LAN2LAN, SNMP, and IRIG-B, provided that the
relevant keys are purchased and installed (KEY-L2L, KEY-SNMP, and KEY-IRIGB).
Selecting LAN2LAN or SNMP makes available the associated parameter setting panel(s).
8.1.3.3 LAN2LAN
This interface allows network connection between computers, using PLC equipment and IP addressing.
Click Enable Channel to make the interface available and to open the panel for LAN2LAN settings. If
Fallback is required, then also click Fallback Available.
Channel and Fallback speeds can now be set in the adjacent settings panel.
8.1.3.4 SNMP
Enabling SNMP allows the configuration of the SNMP Trap Server. SNMP is an application layer
protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices, It enables
network administration to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan
for network growth. Up to 10 Traps can be defined.
Note that the LAN to LAN function is the medium highway, while SNMP is the carrier.
8.1.3.5 IRIG-B
Enabling the IRIG-B input interface allows the synchronization of the PRCS unit real time clock with an
external time generator device, such as a GPS clock device.
Derived data rates are displayed in the bandwidth usage banner, at the foot of the window.
Gridcom T390 53 HMI

8.1.4 Data
Various combinations of data equipment (DTE or DCE) can be connected to a T390 system.
With the exception of Splitting mode (in the channel Activation panel), the discussion that follows
applies equally to any of the Data tabs (Data1, Data2, Data3, Data4): the overall process of
configuration is identical for all four Data tabs.
Figure 37: Configuration Window: Data1 pane
8.1.5 Channel Activation panel

Click Enable Channel to make the Data channel available in the system (disabled by default).
If Use lock condition is enabled, the channel will be deactivated automatically when transmission
conditions are beyond the user-defined thresholds. The threshold values are configured on the User
Alarm pane. Use lock condition is disabled by default.
Use the Service number pull-down box to assign the same service number (from 0 to 15) at both ends
of the PLC link. The Auto selection allocates service numbers automatically and is the recommended
setting.
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM) facilities, when access is
required to remote and/or local RTU devices.
The options are as follows:
None Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel
Multi Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, with two RS232 inputs and only one band used
on HF, shared by the two RS232 data.
Single Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication with one RS232 input. This is a “pass-through”
mode.
Note that PTM channels are assigned as adjacent pairs, with the following implications:
▪ The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for Data1
and Data3.
▪ If Splitting mode|Single is selected for Data1 or Data3, then either Data2 or Data4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).
Gridcom T390 54 HMI

▪ Selecting Splitting mode|Multi for Data1 or Data3 automatically enables Data2 or Data4,
respectively.
8.1.5.1 Channel Speed

Select the channel speed (default 2400 bits/s) from the pull-down list. Note that the same speed must
be set at both ends of the connection. The available speeds, in bits/s, are 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800 and 38400. The “Fine tuning” is to adjust the speed of Modem more
accurately.
8.1.5.2 Comm Mode

The PLC is always in a DCE mode.
8.1.5.3 Transfer Type (Asynchronous)

For the PRCS unit, the transfer type can only be “Asynchronous”.
The following parameters can be set on the Asynchronous panel, and they must be compatible with the
settings of equipment connected to the relevant T390 data channel connector:
Data bit: Defines the number of data bits in a frame. It must be an integer between 1
and 9, the default is 9.
Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits per frame. The value must 1 or 2. The default is 1.
Parity bit: Defines the number of parity bits per frame. It must be 0 or 1. The default is 0.
HW Flow CTS/RTS management. Disabled by default.
Control
DSR/DTR DSR/DTR management. By default DTR forced/DSR Ignored
The HMI globally checks that the settings are compatible with the bandwidth usage: channel activation
and associated parameters are used to derive the necessary bandwidth for each channel and a check is
made against the total available bandwidth. The check is performed for every change in any of Channel
activation: Enable and Channel Speed.
The total bandwidth in use is displayed on the bandwidth usage banner.
8.1.6 User Alarm

External alarms (e.g. sound alarms, large flashing light, etc.) can be connected to the PRCS unit to
rapidly alert the operators of (potentially) blocking transmission or system problems.
A lock condition can be specified so that a specific problem puts the system in lock mode (all channels
configured as “locked in case of bad line” are disabled when that condition arises). The last column,
Trigger, sets which alarms will trigger the data recorder (must be set up with the Event trigger option).
Gridcom T390 55 HMI

Figure 38: Configuration Window: User Alarm
The User Alarm panel also supports setting the mapping between the alarms/lock condition and the
system events. For some of these events, it is possible to detect them remotely (i.e. to detect events on
a T390 system across the power line). The following table lists the possible events and describes this
mapping:
Available
Event name Short description Associated LED
remotely?
Maintenance phase NO System maintenance state “Remote/Local Maintenance”

LED on the Amplifier Unit
TX Power Warning NO Signal power lower than “Tx power” LED on the
transmission power threshold Amplifier Unit
TX Power Critical NO Signal power critical error “Tx power” LED on the
TX IS SHUTDOWN Amplifier Unit
AGC High RX level YES AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Not Applicable
exceeds high level threshold
AGC Low RX level YES AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Not Applicable
falls under low level threshold
Loss of TDM YES Loss of the TDM Not Applicable
synchronization synchronization: this is related
to the synchronization on the
incoming signal from the line
Safety presence YES Logical OR of all “Safety Not Applicable
presence” configured checks.
Two such checks are available:
one for the high speed channel
(V11), the other for the optional
external teleprotection.
Amplifier SNR under YES The transmitted signal’s SNR “SNR Alarm” LED on the
threshold falls under the threshold Amplifier Unit
BER NO The digital signal’s BER exceeds Not Applicable
Gridcom T390 56 HMI

Available
Event name Short description Associated LED
remotely?
the configured acceptable value
Config error NO Bad Config code. This is related Not Applicable

to the firmware downloaded
from the PC to the PLC system
Hardware error NO A hardware internal error has “Internal Error” LED on every
occurred in any of the T390 Unit.
system’s units.
Fallback activated NO The system has entered fallback “Fallback mode” LED on the
mode Processing Unit
TPX command too YES Duration command over the Not Applicable
long threshold
TPX Error YES When External TP is in Error “TPX Error” LED on the
Processing Unit
TPX Active YES When External TP is Active “TPX Active” LED on the
Processing Unit
TPX Safety YES When External TP is Connected TPX Safety” LED on the
Processing Unit
Temperature YES Amplifier internal temperature Not Applicable
has reached a threshold
Analog Channel 1 NO Channel 1 is currently being Not Applicable
Equalization equalized
Analog Channel 2 NO Channel 2 is currently being Not Applicable
Equalization equalized
Analog TX power too NO Analog channels TX power is Not Applicable
high over a preset threshold
Analogue TX power NO Analog channels TX power is in Not Applicable
error error
Table 4: Events mapping to external alarms and lock condition
8.1.7 TP (Setttings for external analogue teleprotection)

When an external Teleprotection is connected to the PRCS, the relevant parameters are configured in
this pane, as described below.
Gridcom T390 57 HMI

Figure 39: Configuration Window: TP
8.1.7.1 TP Deactivated
This radio button is checked if no TPX has been configured in Hardware Configuration window.
8.1.7.2 TPX
This radio button is checked if an external Teleprotection has been configured in Hardware
Configuration window. With TPX enabled, the parameter setting panels become available:
8.1.7.3 Input Gain

Use the slide bar to set the PLC Gain, which is the relative gain in the PLC of the TPX channel. The
absolute reference of this gain is given for PLC gain=0, Boost mode disabled. For this configuration, a
single tone at the PLC input with a level of 0dBm gives a tone at 46dBm on the R.F. line.
Note that some option buttons may be unavailable if the boost is 6dB or 12dB.
8.1.7.4 Boost Mode

The command sent by the teleprotection can be boosted to reduce the risk of losing the signal,
although the default state is disabled. The available settings are:
Disabled: no boost 6dB: boost the signal by 6dB 12dB: boost the signal by 12dB
8.1.7.5 TPX over speech

With this option selected, the TPX works in external mode, using the first speech signalling tone as
guard. The TPX must be calibrated in order to use the T390 internal signalling tone correctly.
8.1.7.6 Guard Level

If TPX is not over speech (not silent TP), the guard AF level is adjustable. If the TPX is over speech (silent
TP) and if there is a speech with a signalling in the frequency range [300-3800Hz], the level of this
signalling is adjustable. Guard level RF is calibrated thanks to the guard level AF. Choose a value for the
guard AF level and see the corresponding guard RF level value.
The power is shared between the data and the TPX channel. The guard level calibration also implies a
power decrease of the data channel.
Gridcom T390 58 HMI

NOTE: If the TP sends a trip command, it is automatically assigned full power, at the expense
of other transmissions.
Figure 40: INPUT level configuration release 6
CAUTION: Keep in mind that in guard mode, the more power you use for TPX, the less power is left
for the DATA channel. An excessively high guard will degrade data performance.
In most cases, a guard level up to PEP -18 dBm is recommended.
8.1.7.7 Max TP output level

This tuning is not required for PLC configuration; its function is the calibration of the teleprotection
command level. By applying a level at the Max TP output level, the command R.F. level can be adjusted.
8.1.7.8 Safety Presence

When Safety Presence is enabled, an alarm is raised if the external TP appears disconnected to the
PRCS unit. This function is enabled by default.
The safety presence alarm is useful when used with teleprotection with a specific output alarm when
off.
8.1.7.9 Output Gain

Use the slide bar to set Output Gain, which is the relative gain in the PLC of the TPX channel at the
output.
The absolute reference of this gain is given for Input Gain=0. For this configuration, a single tone at PEP
implies a level of 0dBm at the TP input.
Gridcom T390 59 HMI

8.1.7.10 Available power
This part shows the available power associated to channel supporting the TPX.
8.1.7.11 Selective cutting
8.1.7.11.1 Short description

The selective cutting dialog box allows to select the services that are cut when a TP command is active
thus allocating more power to it. This selection is available for the TPX and for each TPI.
This window is called from the TPX tab of the PRCS. Click on selective cutting the following windows
appears:
Figure 41: Selective Cutting window
When it is called by one of them, the parts of the window concerning the other TPs are disabled.
The checkboxes corresponding to channels or services not enabled on the system are inactive.
8.1.7.11.2 Rules
The following rules have to be respected:
1. It is possible to cut services on any channel.
2. 2 TPs cannot cut the same service.
3. It is not possible to cut a complete channel where there is another TP.
Gridcom T390 60 HMI

8.1.7.11.3 Services automatically selected
For the normal application:
Case TPI over QAM: the QAM is automatically selected.
Case TPI over Speech: the speech on which is the TPI is automatically selected.
Case TPX over Speech: the Speech at lower frequency is automatically selected.
For these 3 cases, it is not possible to uncheck services automatically selected. The corresponding
checkboxes are displayed inactive.
Case TPI IN BAND (or TPX not over Speech): if the TP is alone in the channel (no services selected for
another TP), all the services available in the channel are selected.
8.1.8 Ringing Generator
Figure 42: Configuration Window: Ring generator

The Ring Generator provides the ring signal for speech channels (this does not apply to the
maintenance handset).
8.1.8.1 Frequency
Click one of the radio buttons to select a frequency of 16.7 Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, or 50 Hz.
NOTE: With PRCS-B, the frequency is not configurable and is set to 25Hz.
8.1.8.2 Signal shape

The ringing signal consists of alternating periods of ring tone and silence. Use the two slide bars to set
the two periods:
Signal ringing period: Adjustable between 1s and 4s. Default value: 2s.
Silent period: Adjustable between 1s and 4s. Default value: 1s.
Gridcom T390 61 HMI

NOTE: With PRCS-B, the ringing and silent periods are not configurable and are set to 1s for
ringing period and 4s for silent period.
8.1.9 Speech Configuration in digital mode

Speech channels are implemented as an optional bundle of three speech channels (identified as
Channel A, Channel B, Channel C) plus one maintenance handset plug. Several combinations of
equipment (such as PABX, phone) can be connected to the T390 system.
Channels B and C are functionally identical and are independent from the maintenance handset, while
channel A does not have FXO and shares the FXS with the maintenance handset.
Figure 43: Configuration window, speech
8.1.9.1 Channel Activation panel

Select Enable Channel to enable the Speech channel.
If Use lock condition is enabled, the channel is automatically deactivated when the transmission
conditions become too degraded. This is controlled by the PRCS unit. The criteria on which the PRCS
unit decides that the lock condition has been reached is defined in section 8.1.6, User Alarm. The option
is disabled by default.
Use the Service number pull-down box to assign the same service number (from 0 to 15) at both ends
of the PLC link. The Auto selection allocates service numbers automatically and is the recommended
setting.
8.1.9.2 Maintenance Handset panel

Maintenance handset is only available on speech1.
Select Active to enable the maintenance handset. Note that the maintenance channel has priority over
Channel A, meaning that when call in progress comes from remote maintenance handset then the
speech 1 services will be stopped immediately until the maintenance handset is taken off hook.
Maintenance handset is disabled by default except when phone or FXS is selected. It this case, the
maintenance handset is forced at “active”. Note that in digital mode the T390 system buzzes to indicate
an incoming call on the maintenance handset (in analog mode, the handset rings).
8.1.9.3 Misc panel

Select Echo canceller to suppress echo on the channel. Enabled by default.
Gridcom T390 62 HMI

8.1.9.4 Channel Properties panel
This panel sets the input and output speech levels:
Input Level: Sets speech input level, adjustable between –30dBm and +7dBm
Output Level: Sets speech output level, adjustable between –30dBm and +7dBm
8.1.9.5 Speech Compression panel

Select the speech compression mode from the pull-down list. This setting must be identical at both
ends of the channel. This is set in accordance with the capabilities of the PABX line to which the channel
is connected. The available compression modes are as follows:
▪ Vocoder 2400 bit/s
8.1.9.6 Interfacing panel

Channels A, B and C can be used in any of the three configuration modes: Phone/Phone, PABX/Phone,
and Transit. Click a radio button to select the speech channel mode:
▪ Phone (for hotline mode) – the default : 2W
▪ Line Extension (for PABX/subscriber mode, FXO/FXS) : 2W
▪ Transit : 4W
If Line Extension is enabled, then click FXO or FXS, to select the Foreign Exchange role:
▪ For connection to a PABX, the setting must be FXO (available only on B and C)
▪ For connection is to a phone, the setting must be FXS
The HMI globally checks that the settings are compatible with the bandwidth usage (both for normal
and fallback mode): channel activation and associated parameters are used to derive the necessary
bandwidth for each channel and a check is made against the total available bandwidth. The check is
performed for every change in any of Channel activation: Enable, and Speech Compression. The total
bandwidth in use is displayed on the bandwidth usage banner.
8.1.10 Fallback option

If Fallback mode is an available option (requires KEY-FALLBACK), you can configure the fallback mode
on PLC.
In encoder tab click Allow fallback mode to enable it.
Gridcom T390 63 HMI

Select the Quality of Service, ie the maximal BER you wish. Is the line is too noisy and cannot support
this quality, then the PLC will automatically switch to another encoder that can ensure this maximum
BER. The recommended quality is 1e-5, which is suitable in most cases.
Choose the delay to return in normal mode, between 30s and 600s.
Then click on Fallback configuration to open the Fallback configuration window.
Figure 44: Fallback configuration
In this window, check the needed Fallback encoders. As a recommendation, preferably let a gap
between two encoders, for instance, choose QAM 64, QAM 16 and QAM 4.
Select the needed services for each encoders, and their speed in case V11 and Lan2lan.
8.2 Analog configuration: Speech and MTU

This section describes the configuration of the speech channels in analogue modes (including
“telegraph” options in analogue mode), and configuration of the analogue MTU options.
8.2.1 Speech/Telegraph configuration in analog mode

This section describes Speech/Telegraph configuration of the PRCS unit in Analogue mode. The
connectors used are the same as in digital mode.
Gridcom T390 64 HMI

Figure 45: Speech/Telegraph configuration in analog mode
8.2.1.1 Frequency repartition

It is possible to get 3 speeches on a channel, several rules have been chosen.
If the analog bandwidth of the current unit is “2.5kHz” or “4kHz”, then only one speech with signalling
can be set on the band.
For example, if user selects “speech1”, channel type: “speech”, then it is possible to choose “telegraph”
in “speech2” and “speech3” but not “speech”.
▪ If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “5kHz”, it is possible to set 2 speeches with signaling
on the band.
▪ If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “8kHz”, it is possible to set 3 speeches with signaling
on the band.
▪ If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “2kHz”, it is not possible to set speeches with
signaling on the band”, only telegraphs are authorized.
When the first speech is selected, band 1 is 300-2000, band 2 is 300-2200, band 3 is 300-2400, band 4 is
300-3400.
If user select a second speech, band 1 is 2580-4280, band 2 is 2680-4580, band 3 is 2880-4980, band 4 is
4020-4120.
Furthermore, the second speech selected has the same bandwidth as first one. Except if the first one is
band 4. In that case, band 1 to 4 are available.
If user selects a third speech, band 1 is 4860-6560, band 2 is 5060-6960 and band 3 is 5460-7560. The
third speech has the same bandwidth as the 2 first ones.
A summary is given in Table 5.
Gridcom T390 65 HMI

Beginning End Bandwidth Band name Speech selected
300 2000 1700 Band 1 1st
300 2200 1900 Band 2 1st
300 2400 2100 Band 3 1st
300 3400 3100 Band 4 1st
2580 4280 1700 Band 1 2nd
2680 4580 1900 Band 2 2nd
2880 4980 2100 Band 3 2nd
4020 5720 1700 Band 1 2nd in case first b4
4020 7120 3100 Band 4 2nd
4860 6560 1700 Band 1 3rd
5060 6960 1900 Band 2 3rd
5460 7560 2100 Band 3 3rd
Table 5 : possible speeches
Possible bands for signallings are:

Beginning End
2160 2280
2260 2380
2280 2400
2460 2580
3600 3720
4440 4560
4640 4760
5040 5160
5880 6000
6040 6160
6240 6360
6720 6840
Gridcom T390 66 HMI

7020 7140
7320 7440
7620 7740
Table 6 : Possible SignallingS
8.2.1.2 Default speeches

The default speeches are:
Analog bw Tx and Rx filter bandwidth

2k No speech
2.5 2100
4k 3100
5k 3100
8k 3100
Table 7: default Speeches
8.2.1.3 Analog band display

During configuration, click Show analogue band to display the current band allocation:
Figure 46: Show Analog Band button

The display shows all currently configured channels (speech, telegraph, and MTU).
8.2.1.4 Note on the Maintenance Handset

As with digital mode, the maintenance handset is only available on the first speech channel. Note,
however, that in analogue mode the handset rings to indicate an incoming call on the maintenance
handset, while in digital mode, the T390 system buzzes.
Gridcom T390 67 HMI

8.2.1.5 Channel type panel
Figure 47: Speech channel: type

Select the channel type from the pull-down list:
OFF: The channel is disabled
SPEECH: Speech channel
TELEGRAPH: Telegraph channel
8.2.1.6 Levels panel
Figure 48: Speech channel levels

Sets input and output levels for either channel type from -30 to + 7 dBm, in steps of 0.1 dBm.
NOTE: Input and output levels are not applied to handset. Even if input and output levels for
speech 1 are different from 0 dBm, the input and output levels applied to handset is
0dBm.
NOTE: If input or output levels of speech 1 are different from 0dBm, there is a short
interruption of around 1s of all speeches at unhook and hang up of handset.
Gridcom T390 68 HMI

8.2.2 Configure Speech channel
Figure 49: Configuration Window: Speech

The configurable parameters are as follows:
8.2.2.1 Band Allocation

Click FULLBAND, Band1, Band2, or Band3 to select the required bandwidth.
8.2.2.2 Signaling
Select a value for the signalling channel from the pull-down list.
There is a graphical representation of the speech channel on the right side of the panel.
8.2.2.3 Reverse Mode

Click Reverse Mode to swap the FSK frequencies for bit detection. If enabled, this mode must be
activated on both sides.
Gridcom T390 69 HMI

8.2.2.4 Basic panel
Figure 50: Speech configuration: Basic panel

The two parameters in the Basic panel are:
Cable equalizer: Enable/disable cable equalizer for this channel. The cable equalizer can
be set to one of eight values ranging from 1 db to 15 dB.
Interfacing: Same as for digital channels.
8.2.2.5 Advanced panel
Figure 51: Speech configuration: advanced

The three parameters in the advanced panel are:
▪ Compressor Expander: Set to ON, OFF, or Driven by X Wire (external wire)
▪ Limiter: Set to ON or OFF. Always chose ON, except for testing
▪ Maintenance handset: Set ON or OFF, but only available for Speech1
NOTE: The aim of compressor expander is to expand the increase the signal in HF in order to
be more resistant to noise.
Gridcom T390 70 HMI

-22 -18 -14 -10 -6 -2
0
-5 HF level (dB)
-10
-15 without comp/ex
-20 with comp/ex
-25
-30
-35
BF level (dB)
8.2.2.6 Ring Generator panel

Settings are the same as in digital mode (section 8.1.8).
8.2.2.7 Possible modes for analog speeches

The possible modes are given below:
Phone speech 1 Line Extension speech 1 Transit speech 1 (default)
Phone speech 2&3 Line Extension FXS speech 2&3 Line Extension FXO
speech 2&3
Gridcom T390 71 HMI

Transit speech 2&3 (default) Ring generator speech 1&2&3
(default)
Advanced with phone interface Advanced without phone Advanced with speech 2&3
speech1 interface speech1 (default) (default)
8.2.3 Configure Telegraph channel

The only required settings for Telegraph, apart from levels, are bandwidth and band shifting.
They can be configured from predefined values, or in expert mode (custom band allocation):
Figure 52: Telegraph configuration
Gridcom T390 72 HMI

8.2.3.1 Predefined band allocation
Figure 53: Telegraph pre-defined bands

The available bands are:
▪ Full band
▪ 1200 Bds
▪ 600 Bds
▪ ITU-R38A and ITU-R38B
▪ Over speech band
▪ Expert mode: custom band allocation
Figure 54: Telegraph custom bands

In this mode, there are two possibilities.
Click on filtering and all parameters can be customized:
Local center Freq Input signal center frequency.
Line center Freq Transmission signal center frequency. This is the center frequency of the
signal in the LF band (4 or 2.5Khz).
Remote center Freq Remote signal center frequency. This is the center frequency of remote
input/output signal
Filtering Local Local signal filtering width
Filtering Remote Remote signal filtering width
Gridcom T390 73 HMI

8.2.4 MTU configuration (analog mode)
Figure 55: Configuration Window: MTU channels

The MTU uses an FSK channel to transmit information.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
8.2.4.1 Channel Activation panel

Click Enable Channel to make the MTU channel available in the system (disabled by default).
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint facilities, when access is required
to remote and/or local RTU devices.
Figure 56: Splitting mode selection

The options, shown above in Figure 56, are as follows:
None Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel

Multi Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, with two RS232 inputs and only one band
used on HF, shared by the two RS232 data.
Single Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication with one RS232 input. This is a “pass-
through” mode.
Note that PTM channels are assigned as adjacent pairs, with the following implications:
Gridcom T390 74 HMI

▪ The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for MTU1
and MTU3.
▪ If Splitting mode|Single is selected for MTU1 or MTU3, then either MTU2 or MTU4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).
▪ Selecting Splitting mode|Multi for MTU1 or MTU3 automatically enables MTU2 or MTU4,
respectively.
8.2.4.2 Channel speed panel

Select channel speed from the pull-down list. The options (bit/s) are 200, 300, 600 and 1200.
8.2.4.3 Comm mode and Transfer Data Type panels

The Comm mode and Transfer data type are the same as for digital channels. See the previous
discussions for more details.
8.2.4.4 Frequency Shift panel

Choose the channel position in the band. The result can be seen by clicking SHOW ANALOG BAND.
8.2.4.5 Reverse mode

Click Reverse Mode to reverse the FSK working mode.
8.2.5 Frequency gap between services

If services are closer than 100Hz, hatches appear on the analog band representation in HMI. It does not
mean that services won’t work correctly, it is only a warning.
Figure 57: Hatches in Analog band
8.3 Note on speech channels modes

Speech channels are supplied as a module with three speech channels (implemented as three RJ45
connectors), together with one reference voltage connector for E & M wires, and one maintenance
handset (service phone) channel (implemented as one RJ11 connector).
The available modes for speech channels connection are detailed below:
Gridcom T390 75 HMI

8.3.1 Phone / Phone Connection (Hot Line)
Phone Phone
or Fax or Fax
2 wires 2 wires
PLC PLC
A 2-wire phone is connected to each side of the T390 speech channel. When the phone is taken
off-hook on one side of the line, the phone at the other end rings. If the other end is already off-
hook, a busy tone is sent back.
Channel A Channel B Channel C
Figure 58: Speech access
8.3.2 Incoming call alerts

For phones connected to speech 1 to 3, the phone rings to indicate an incoming call. For phone
connected to maintenance handset connector, the phone does not ring, but the PLC system buzzes.
8.3.3 PABX / Phone Connection

Seen as a phone from the PABX point of view
Phone
or Fax
2 wires 2 wires
PABX PLC PLC
FXO FXS
In this mode:
▪ The T390 channels on both sides must be set in 2-wire mode.
▪ The T390 channel connected to the PABX must be set as FXO (Foreign Exchange Office).
▪ The T390 channel connected to the phone must be set as FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber).
▪ Number dialling is done in DTMF mode
Gridcom T390 76 HMI

NOTE: Only channels B and C support the FXO configuration.
CAUTION: On FXS side, phones are either actual phones or fax. No other device (e.g. modem) can
be connected.
8.3.4 Transit Connection

2 wires 2 wires
4 wires 4 wires
Auto Auto
PABX PLC PLC PABX
Line per channel
In this mode, the PLC channels can act towards the PABX either as 2-wire or 4-wire (or automatic
mode). This allows support for several handsets at each end of a PLC system, and thus allows several
concurrent communications (with a maximum of one line per speech channel).
All speech channels (A, B, and C) support this configuration.
CAUTION: When on the same unit, the maintenance handset and the channel A are linked. This
means that it is not possible to use the maintenance handset and the channel A at the same time. To
keep the emergency functionality of the maintenance handset, if the maintenance handset is taken
off hook while channel A is active, the channel A communication is immediately cut.
Gridcom T390 77 HMI

9. TPI tab
9.1 TPI HMI Hardware Configuration
To starts, select File|Configuraton or click the configuration icon.
From the right panel of the Hardware Configuration Window, select the total bandwidth, the PRCS
mode and PRCS analog bandwidth if needed.
Figure 59: The Hardware Configuration window

To begin software configuration, click Next. The hardware configuration screen is minimized and the
Amplifier pane of the software configuration screen is displayed.
This section describes the process of setting parameters, and identifies the recommended or
mandatory steps for performing the TPI software configuration. The discussion that follows assumes
some familiarity with the T390 Human-Machine Interface (HMI), with which the configuration is carried
out. Note that many of the operations involved in configuring a T390 system require you to be logged
on with a certain level of privilege (assigned using the Access Manager application).
9.2 Power configuration

If the amplifier configuration screen is not already displayed, click on the amplifier icon in the Units
from PLC panel.
Click the Advanced tab to display the screen shown in Figure 60, which includes a display of the overall
power distribution for the system:
Gridcom T390 78 HMI

Figure 60: Amplifier Configuration Advanced panel
9.2.1 Default values

By default, the ratio allocated to to each channel (digital channel, analog channel) is given by:
channel_ratio = channel bandwidth / total bandwidth
For example, with QAM (8 kHz) + Band 1 (4kHz), the default values are:
▪ Channel ratio (QAM) = 8 / (8+4) = 66.7%
▪ Channel ratio(band1) = 4 / (8+4) = 33.3%
NOTE: We recommend tou use the default power repartition
9.2.2 TPX power

The system allows two teleprotections units, as follows:
▪ A TPX single external teleprotection unit (DIP, for example)
▪ A single TPI unit, and no TPX external teleprotection
▪ A TPX DIP unit and a single TPI unit
▪ Two TPI units
Power for the TPI unit(s) is configured under the Advanced Tab of the AMP configuration screen (see
previous section).
External teleprotection (TPX) power is configured under the TP tab of the PRCS configuration screen,
as shown in Figure 61.
Gridcom T390 79 HMI

Figure 61: TPX configuration (PRCS)
To configure power for external teleprotection, proceed as follows:

▪ In hardware window, check “TPX”.
▪ On the PRCS configuration screen, click TP.
▪ Choose first if a Boost is needed for the TPX commands (6 or 12 dB) in the Boost mode panel.
▪ Set the Input Gain with the + and - buttons in the Input Gain Panel. For this use the
following rules :
 In the Guard Level panel of the INPUT zone, input the level of the Guard frequency (dBm)
generated by the external TP if any using the slide bars (or else tick the check box Use
guard send by PLC – In this case, the signalling of the telephone channel will be used as
the guard frequency for the TPX).
 In the Max TP Output Level panel of the INPUT zone, input the level of the command
frequency(ies) (dBm) generated by the external TP. This may be different from the guard
level.
 Tune the Input Gain with the + and - buttons to obtain the required values in the
Guard RF Level and RF Command Level bars at the bottom of the TP panel.
NOTE: Max TP Output Level, Guard Level, Guard RF Level and RF Command Level data are
not sent to the PLC, they are only a guide to help the tuning of the input gain.
Therefore, when reading back the configuration from the PLC, they will be reset to the
default value. The Max TP Output Level and Guard Level should be programmed on
the TPX equipment.
▪ Set the Output Gain with the + and - buttons in the Output Gain Panel. For this use the
following rules :
 In the RF Level panel of the OUPUT zone, input the RF level of the Guard or Commands
tones.
Gridcom T390 80 HMI

 Set the Output Gain with the + and - buttons to obtain the required values in AF for
the given tone (information Panel of the OUTPUT zone).
NOTE: The RF Level data is not sent to the PLC, it is only a guide to help the tuning of the
output gain. Therefore, when reading back the configuration from the PLC, this will be
reset to the default value.
▪ On the Available Power panel, click the check boxes for the bands that will be cut during
command transmission. The selection includes automatically the TPX sending band (band 1 is
automatically selected, but selecting the other bands as well guarantees maximum power for
TPX command transmission).
NOTE: Guard level is limited by power allocated to band 1 in tab Amp/advanced. Command
level is limited by power allocated to bands cut by TPX during command transmission.
NOTE: It is not possible to cut a band occupied by TPI.
NOTE: The TPX settings must be consistent with those for the DIP.
9.3 TPI configuration menu

When power configuration is complete, click the Teleprotection icon in the Units from PLC panel and
then select a TPI unit. The TPI configuration screen is displayed, with the Main tab selected, as shown in
Figure 62:
Figure 62: TPI Main tab
Gridcom T390 81 HMI

The TPI configuration screen has the four menu options (tabs): Main, Communication Path, Input and
Output commands. Their functions are described below.
9.4 Main screen

On the TPI configuration screen, click Main to display the screen shown in Figure 62.
Logical Address
Applicable only in case of digital communication path activated. Enter a logical address for the TPI unit,
in the range 0 to 124. The local and remote TPI units must use the same logical address.
Input MAX
The number of inputs available in the system. It depends on the hardware configuration detected on
the equipment. By this value is set to 8 and cannot be changed.
Output MAX
The number of outputs available in the system. It depends on the hardware configuration detected on
the equipment. By this value is set to 14 and cannot be changed.
Interfaces available
This panel lists the interfaces available in the system. It depends on the communication interface
detected on the equipment when configuration is on line.
As default the available interface is “Analogue on TPI” allowing the transfer of Teleprotection
command through the T390.
On offline configuration the following choices appear:
▪ C37.94: This interface cover all the SFP optical interface module that can be plug into the TPI:
Please make sure to use the appropriate SFP to the type of fiber used and distance to be
covered.
▪ G703-1 / G703-6 or V11 are daughter boards that can be implemented on TPI.
9.5 Communication path

Click the Communication path tab to display the screen shown in Figure 63:
Figure 63: TPI Communication path
The table displayed in communication path window allows selecting the paths and commands to use.
Gridcom T390 82 HMI

The first column of the table contains the index of commands. The interfaces are displayed in 2
following columns. First one is dedicated to Digital path, second one is dedicated to Analogue path.
Operator column is fixed with no choice, at the reception side it will be acknowledged the first
command received.
9.5.1 Defining communication paths

9.5.1.1 Digital path
By clicking on lines of column “C3794”, you can select 2, 4 or 8 commands. By default, you can only
select 2 or 4 commands. In order to tick 8 commands, you have to select “8 commands” in the tab with
digital path, which can be OPTICAL, V11, G703-1, G703-6 (see section 9.8 for more details).
9.5.1.2 Analog path case dual tone

Select dual tone in the menu in analog on TPI column to choose the dual tone mode as shown in Figure
64.
Figure 64: Dual tone choice

By clicking on lines of column “Analog on TPI”, you can select 4 or 6 commands. By default, you can
only select 4 commands. In order to tick 6 commands, you have to select “6 commands” in tab “Analog
on TPI” (see section 9.6 for more details).
NOTE: If no command is selected in C3794 path, it is deactivated. If no command is selected in

Analogue path, it is deactivated.
NOTE: If the key “set-reset” is installed and if you have selected “1 set-reset in tab “Analogue
on TPI”, you can only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 4 (refer to set/reset explanation later
in the manual).
on TPI”, you can only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 5.
on TPI”, you can only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 5.
Gridcom T390 83 HMI

NOTE: If a command is used on both interfaces all the other commands must be on both
interfaces. If this rule is not respected, an error message will appears when leaving the
window.
9.5.1.3 Analog path case mixed tone

Select “2PT + 2DT” in the menu in analog on TPI column to choose the mode 2+2 and “3PT + 1DT” to
select the mode 3+1, as shown in the figure above.
Figure 65: 2PT+2DT choice
In the mixed mode, it is not possible to unselect commands as in dual tone. The commands 1 to 4 are
selected by default.
9.5.2 Operator
Only “OR” choice.
9.6 Analog, case dual tone

The analogue transmission system is an implementation of the “dual tone” principle:
Figure 66: Dual tone frequencies sharing

F8 is the Guard frequency, and each of the available commands is represented by a combination of two
of the frequencies F1 to F7.
The combination depends on the number of commands: 4commands, 6 commands, particular case of 2
set/reset and particular case of 3 set/reset.
NOTE: The guard frequency F8 is not transmitted in case of silent teleprotection.
In the other cases, external signals (QAM or signalling) are used as guard.
Gridcom T390 84 HMI

In the case TP in band, user can choose the TPI location. We call FcentralTPI the central frequency of
the TPI.
In case TP over speech, FcentralTPI is the center of the speech band.
In case TP over QAM separate, FcentralTPI is FcentralQAM+1000Hz.
Frequencies Location
F1 FcentralTPI +/- 700Hz
F5 FcentralTPI -/+ 100Hz
TABLE 8: Frequencies location depending of configuration
In case of TPI over QAM, in superimposed mode with 16 khz bandwidth the frequencies location is:
F1 Fcentral ± 6300Hz
Table 9: TP OVER SUPERIMPOSED 16 KHZ FREQUENCIES LOCATION
In case of TPI over QAM, in superimposed mode with 8 khz bandwidth the frequencies location is:
Gridcom T390 85 HMI

Table 10: TP OVER SUPERIMPOSED 8 KHZ FREQUENCIES LOCATION
9.6.1 Case 4 commands

Relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.
Input command Frequency coding
Command #1 F1+F3
Command #2 F2+F4
Command #3 F1+F4
Command #4 F2+F5
Command #1+2 F1+F5
Command #1+3 F3+F5
Command #1+4 F2+F6
Command #2+3 F1+F6
Command # 2+4 F3+F6
Command #3+4 F4+F6
Command #1+2+3+4 F5+F7
Command #1+2+3 F1+F7
Guard F8 or QAM
TABLE 11: Dual tone frequency coding
Gridcom T390 86 HMI

9.6.2 Case 6 commands Mode A
In the particular case of 6 commands, 7 frequencies are not enough to transmit all command
combinations. Hence we apply the priority rules given in the following table.
Injected command Transmitted command

A B C D E F A B A+B C D E F C+F D+F E+F
x x
x x
x x x
x x
X x x
X X x
x x x x
x x
x x x
X X x
X x x x
X x x
X x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
X x
X X x
X X x
x x x x
X X X
X X x x
X X X x
x x x x x
x x x
X X x x
X X X x
Gridcom T390 87 HMI

X X x x x
x X x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x x
X x
X x x
x x x
X x x x
X X x
X X x x
x x x x
X x x x x
X X X
X X x x
X X X x
x x x x x
x x x x
X X X x x
x X X X x
X X x x X x
X x x
x X x x
X X X x
X X X X x
X X X X
X X X x x
x x X X x
X X x x x x
X X X X
X X X x x
Gridcom T390 88 HMI

X X X X x
x x x x X x
X X X X X
X X X X x x
X X X X X x
x X x x x X x
TABLE 12: priority rules for case 6 commands (Mode A)
In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.
Command #1 F1+F3
Command #2 F2+F4
Command #1+2 F1+F4
Command #3 F2+F5
Command #4 F1+F5
Command #5 F1+F6
Command # 6 F4+F6
Command #3+6 F3+F5
Command #4+6 F3+F6
Command #5+6 F2+F6
Guard F8 or QAM
TABLE 13: Dual TONES frequency coding case 6 commands (Mode A)
9.6.3 Case 6 commands Mode B

In the particular case of 6 commands, 7 frequencies are not enough to transmit all command
combinations. Hence we apply the priority rules given in the following table.
Injected Commands Transmitted commandS

A B C D E F A B C D E F E+F
Gridcom T390 89 HMI

x x
x x
x x x
x x
X x X
X X x
x x x x
x x
x x x
X X x
X x x x
X x x
X x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
X x
X X x
X X x
x x x x
X X x
X X x x
X X X x
x x x x x
x x x
X X x x
X X X x
X X x x x
x X x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x x
X x
Gridcom T390 90 HMI

X x x
x x x
X x x x
X X x
X X x x
x x x x
X x x x x
X X x
X X x x
X X X x
x x x x x
x x x x
X X X x x
x X X X x
X X x x X x
X x x
x X x x
X X X x
X X X X x
X X X x
X X X x x
x x X X x
X X x x x x
X X X x
X X X x x
X X X X x
x x x x X x
X X X X x
X X X X x x
X X X X X x
x X x x x X x
TABLE 14: priority rules for case 6 commands (Mode B)
Gridcom T390 91 HMI

In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given in Table 15:
The rule is to avoid the use of F7 if possible and to keep the combination where the gap between the
two tones is maximum.
Command #1 F2+F6
Command #2 F3+F6
Command #3 F1+F4
Command #4 F2+F5
Command #5 F1+F5
Command #6 F1+F6
Command # 5+6 F4+F6
Guard F8 or QAM
Table 15: Dual tone frequency coding case 6 commands (Mode B)
9.6.4 Case 2 set/reset

In the particular case of 2 set/reset S1-R1 and S2-R2 and one command 3, we apply the priority rules
given in the following table.
S R S R S1&R S2&R E&R1&R S1&S S1&R2& R1&S2& S1&S2& R1&R
E
1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 E E E 2
1 x x
2 x x
3 x x
4 x x
5 x x
6 x x x
7 x x x
8 x x x
9 x x x
1
x x x
0
1
x x x
1
1
x x x
2
1 x x x
Gridcom T390 92 HMI

3
1
x x x x
4
1
x x x x
5
1
x x x x
6
17 x x x x
Table 16 : Priority rules for case 2 set/reset
Set#1 + Set#2 F2+F6
Set#1 + Set#2 + cmd E F3+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 F1+F4
Reset#1 + Reset#2+cmd E F2+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 F1+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 + cmdE F1+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 F4+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 +cmd E F3+F5
Guard F8 or QAM
Table 17: Dual tone frequency coding case 2 set/reset
9.6.5 Case 3 set/reset

In the particular case of 3 set/reset S1-R1, S2-R2 and S3-R3, we apply the priority rules given in the
following table.
S1&R2 S2&R1 S3&R1 S1&S2 S1&S3 S2&S3 S1&S2 R1&R2
S1 R1 S2 R2 S3 R3
&R3 &R3 &R2 &R3 &R2 &R1 &S3 &R3
1 x x
2 x x
3 x x
4 x x
5 x x
Gridcom T390 93 HMI

6 x x
7 x x x
8 x x x
9 x x x
10 x x x
11 x x x
12 x x x
13 x x x
14 x x x
15 x x x
16 x x x
17 x x x
18 x x x
19 x x x x
20 x x x x
21 x x x x
22 x x x x
23 x x x x
24 x x x x
25 x x x x
26 x x x x
TABLE 18: Priority rules for case 3 set/reset
Set#1 + Reset#2 + Reset#3 F2+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 + Reset#3 F3+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 + Set#3 F1+F4
Set#1 + Set#2 + Reset#3 F2+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 + Set#3 F1+F5
Reset#1 + Set#2 + Set#3 F1+F6
Set#1 + Set#2 + Set#3 F4+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 + Reset#3 F3+F5
Guard F8 or QAM
TABLE 19: Dual tone frequency coding case 3 set/reset

Gridcom T390 94 HMI
By clicking on tab “Analogue on TPI”, configure the analogue path.
9.6.6 Analog Interface TX window

Click the “Analogue on TPI” tab of Communication path window to display the screen shown in Figure
67.
Figure 67: Analogue interface TX
9.6.6.1 Overlay mode

Choose the location where the Teleprotection command has to be transmitted:
▪ TP over QAM
▪ TP over speech
▪ TP In band
Gridcom T390 95 HMI

9.6.6.2 Command mode
If the key set/reset is installed, you can choose “4 commands”, “6 commands”, “1set/reset”, “2
set/reset”, or “3 set/reset”.
The specific function set/reset is to avoid interrupting data transmission during command sending from
set pulse up to reset pulse.
CTx
TPS TPS
C R
D0656ENa
CTx (SET/RESET)
D0657ENa
LINK STATUS
t
D0658ENa
Figure 68: Set/reset function
C: INPUT COMMAND
CTx: Tx COMMAND TPS (SET/RESET)
R: COMMAND RESTITUTION
Together with an input C a Set/Reset CTx is sent by local TP to remote TP (Set=cmd1 & Reset=cmd2) on
line.
On remote TP a command R is receiving after Set acknowledged.
After Set acknowledged CTx may released allowing services transmission.
Gridcom T390 96 HMI

In standard mode after Reset acknowledged R may released.
If link down 2 Reset of 20sec are sending up to keep R on remote TP.
If the key set/reset is not installed, you can only choose 4 or 6 commands. If you select “1set/reset”, “2
set/reset”, or “3 set/reset”, an error message will appears when applying configuration.
NOTE: When closing the “Analogue Interface” window by clicking “OK” and returning to
“Communication path” window, don't forget to select commands .(section 6.4)
If you select “1 set/reset”, “2 set/reset” or “3 set/reset”, click on the ellipsis on the right of command
mode. The screen displayed in Figure 69 will appear. You can choose the set and reset transmission
duration using the slider.
Figure 69: Set/reset transmission duration
9.6.6.3 Overlay Analog channel

You can choose in this menu the LF band where to set the TPI. The choice depends on signalling
method.
▪ Case TP in band
If you have chosen “TP in Band”, then you can choose to set the TPI over the band 1 or over the band 2.
▪ Case TP over speech
If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if only one speech with signalling is defined on PRCS, you
cannot choose the band, the TPI band is automatically allocated to the band where the speech is
configured.
If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if no speech is defined on PRCS or speech without signalling,
then an error message will appear when you will close the window.
You must configure a signalling to use the mode “TP over speech”.
If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if several speeches with signalling are configured, then you
can choose on which one the TPI is.
Gridcom T390 97 HMI

Figure 70: Choice of the speech
Note that the TP TX BAND center is automatically set to the speech center frequency selected and
cannot be modified. The TP range is displayed accordingly (850Hz on each side of the center
frequency).
▪ Case TP over QAM, mode 1: QAM under 16kHz separate

If you have chosen the overlay mode “TP over QAM”, you cannot choose the band, the TPI
band is automatically the QAM band.
▪ Case TP over QAM, mode 2: QAM 8kHz in case superimposed, QAM 16kHz in case
superimposed and QAM over 16kHz and
If you’re in this mode, the TP analog window is different and as following:
Gridcom T390 98 HMI

Figure 71: Guard ratio, case TP over QAM mode 2
The guard ratio represents the ratio of the QAM power you are allowing to the TP guard. You have got
this value in dB in the second red circle. This value is updated in the amplifier window as we can see in
the following window:
Gridcom T390 99 HMI

Figure 72: AMP/Advanced QAM ratio
9.6.6.4 TP TX band
In case TP in Band , it is possible to choose the place of the TPI in the band using slide bar. Do not forget
to check that the local TP Tx band is consistent with TP Rx band of remote equipment.
9.6.6.5 Channel Cutting

In order to increase the power available for TP tones, it is possible to cut bands not used by TP. The
band used by TPI and selected in “Overlay Analogue Channel” is automatically cut.
For example,
If PEP is 40 W, if you have chosen in Amp / Advanced:
▪ QAM ratio 50%
▪ Band 1 ratio 20 %
▪ Band 2 ratio 30 %
If the TPI is on QAM, and if you have chosen for cut bands “QAM band” and “band 1”, then:
▪ The guard available power is:
Guard available power = 39.3 dBm
▪ The command available power is:
Command available power = 42.2dBm
9.6.6.6 Transmission Levels panel

Transmission levels are the signal levels assigned to each command frequency and to the guard.
To set the levels, use the slide bar adjacent to each of the parameters.
Gridcom T390 100 HMI

9.6.6.7 Maximum Transmission Time
It is possible to limit the transmission time of commands to x ms (x between 0 and 5s) if the maximum
transmission time checkbox is checked.
When the checkbox is unchecked, the transmission time is not limited. The commands are sent as long
as the corresponding inputs are activated.
The alarm corresponding to the “Maximum Transmission Time” is MAJOR.
CAUTION: If set/reset is used, the “activE” checkbox must be unchecked.
9.6.7 Analog Interface RX window

Click on the tab “RX” to display the screen shown in Figure 73.
Figure 73: Analogue interface RX
9.6.7.1 TP Rx band Panel

The Rx band panel shows the TPI band.
9.6.7.2 Unblocking panel
Figure 74: Unblocking

The Unblocking occurs if no command is received and if the guard level measured through an internal
digital filter falls below a threshold Unblocking level and remains there for at least the time specified in
Unblocking Delay. The duration of Unblocking is Unblocking duration
▪ Unblocking level: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation threshold in the range -50
to -10 dB under Pep.
▪ Unblocking Delay: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation delay. The value range is
from 0 to 200 ms.
▪ Unblocking Duration: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking duration in the range 0 to 5000
ms.
NOTE: Uncheck Unblocking alarm if you don’t wish to use it.
9.6.7.3 Alarms
Figure 75: Alarms

SNR Alarm
The SNR is defined by:
Smaller level of received tones (guard excluded) - measured noise level on 4 kHz + 3dB.
The SNR Alarm occurs if the SNR measured through an internal digital filter falls below a threshold SNR
Low limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR Low limit Delay.
The SNR Alarm is removed if the SNR comes back over a threshold SNR High limit level and remains
there for at least the time specified in SNR High limit Delay.
▪ SNR Low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation threshold in the range -
10 to 40 dB.
▪ SNR Low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation delay. The value range
is from 0 to 5s.
▪ SNR High limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation threshold in the range
-10 to 40 dB.
▪ SNR High limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation delay. The value
range is from 0 to 5s.

Loss of Signal Alarm
The Loss of signal Alarm occurs if the Pilot of the PLC (fsk signal) level measured through an internal
digital filter falls below a threshold Loss of signal low limit level and remains there for at least the time
specified in Loss of signal low limit Delay.
The Loss of signal Alarm is removed if the Pilot of the PLC (fsk signal) level comes back over a threshold
Loss of signal high limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in Loss of signal high limit
Delay.
▪ Loss of signal low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm activation
threshold in the range -50 to 0 dB.
▪ Loss of signal low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm activation delay.
The value range is from 0 to 5s.
▪ Loss of signal high limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm deactivation
threshold in the range -50 to 0 dB.
▪ Loss of signal high limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm deactivation
delay. The value range is from 0 to 5s.
9.6.7.4 Reception levels Panel

Use this panel to set the reception level of each frequency, between -60 and +60dB.
9.7 Analog, case mixed mode

The analog transmission system is an implementation of either a dual tone principle or a single tone
principle depending on the mode (2+2 or 3+1) and on the protection scheme of the transmitted
command (permissive tripping or direct tripping).
F8 is the guard frequency, and each of the available command is represented by a combination of one
or two of the frequencies F1 to F6. F7 and F8 are dedicated to the loop test.
The frequencies of F1 to F7 depend on the chosen speech, as explained in next section.

The relation between commands and frequencies is given in sections 9.7.2 and 9.7.3.
9.7.1 Frequencies
9.7.1.1 Speech 300-3400Hz
This should be the preferred mode.
300 Hz 3400 Hz
650 Hz 1050 Hz 1450 Hz 1850 Hz 2250 Hz 2650 Hz 3050 Hz
400 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 76: Command Frequencies 300 - 3400 Hz

9.7.1.2 Speech 300-2400Hz
In the case of a speech 300-2400 Hz, the frequencies become:
300 Hz 2400 Hz
750 Hz 950 Hz 1150 Hz 1350 Hz 1550 Hz 1750 Hz 1950 Hz
200 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 77: Command frequencies 300 - 2400 Hz
9.7.1.3 Speech 300-2200Hz

300 Hz 2200 Hz
650 Hz 850 Hz 1050 Hz 1250 Hz 1450 Hz 1650 Hz 1850 Hz
200 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 78: command frequencies 300 - 2200 Hz
9.7.1.4 Speech 300-2000Hz

300 Hz 2000 Hz
550 Hz 750 Hz 950 Hz 1150 Hz 1350 Hz 1550 Hz 1750 Hz
200 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 79: Command FREQUENCIES 300-2000 Hz
As the TPIC is always set on a telephone channel, the guard frequency (F8) will be the signaling selected
for the phone. When no signaling is selected, the guard frequency will be selected in the following list.
(The preferred frequency for each channel is shown in blue).
Command Channel
A (300-3400 Hz) B (300-2400 Hz) C (300-2200 Hz) D (300-2000 Hz)
3660 3660 3660 3660
Guard
2520 2520 2520

frequency 2320 2320
2220
Table 20: Guard Frequencies
9.7.2 Command coding

The TPIC works in 2 modes:
▪ 4 commands: 2+2, that is a mode with 2 permissive commands and 2 direct tripping commands
with priority on tripping.
▪ 4 commands: 3+1, that is a mode with 3 permissive commands and 1 tripping commands with
priority on tripping.
The permissive commands are sent on single tone. Tripping commands are sent on dual tone.
9.7.2.1 Relation between injected and transmitted commands

Tripping commands have always priority over permissive commands. That means that if both
permissive and tripping inputs are activated, the direct trip command will be sent first and during a
fixed duration. Then, after, the permissive command will be sent. See figures below.

PRIORITY SCHEME FOR DIRECT TRIPPING
OVER PERMISSIVE
CASE 1
Input Commands
Permissive
Direct Tripping
OR OPTION 2
Transmitted
Commands
Transmit PT Transmit DT Transmit PT
Tmin (Direct Tripping)

From 15 ms to 500 ms
CASE 2
Permissive
Input Commands
Direct Tripping
Commands
Transmited
Transmit DT Transmit PT

From 15 ms to 500 ms
Figure 80 - Priority scheme direct / Permissive
The delay Tmin for the minimum transmission time of a direct tripping command will be set by IHM.
The minimum value for this delay will be constrained by the minimum time for the receiver to
acknowledge a direct trip command. On the other side, at the output command relay can be set to a
minimum duration from 0 ms to 2500 ms.

What happens when permissive input goes inactive again and direct tripping input stays active? The
following diagram describes these situations.
CASE 1
Input Commands
Permissive
Direct Tripping
OR OPTION 2
Transmitted
Commands
Transmit PT Transmit DT Transmit PT Transmit DT
CASE 2
Permissive
Input Commands
Direct Tripping
Commands
Transmited
Transmit DT
Figure 81 - End of permissive before end of direct tripping
9.7.2.2 Mode 2+2 : injected and transmitted commands

Commands 1 and 2 are permissive commands.
Commands 3 and 4 are direct tripping commands.
The link between injected command and transmitted commands is given in following table.

Uncoded single tone Coded dual tone
1 2 3 4 A B A+B C D C+D
x x
x x
x x x
x x
x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
Table 21 : Relation between injected / transmitted commands - Mode 2+2
9.7.2.3 Mode 3+1

Commands 1, 2 and 3 are permissive commands.
Commands 4 is a direct tripping command.
The link between injected command and transmitted commands is given in the following table.
Permissive DT Uncoded coded
1 2 3 4 A B C D E
x x
x x
x x
x x

x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
Table 22 : Relation between injected / transmitted commands - mode 3+1
The relationship between the received commands and the output is the following:
Received Cmds Output Commands

1 2 3 4
A x
B x
C x
D x x x
E x
Table 23: relation between received commands & outputs - Mode 3+1
9.7.3 Relation between commands and frequencies

The relation between transmitted commands and frequencies depends on the mode, 2+2 or 3+1. Tables
are given in next sections.
9.7.3.1 Mode 2+2

cmd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
A x
B x
A+B x

C x x
D x x
C+D x x
Test x x
Guard x
Table 24 : Relation between commands and frequencies, mode 2+2
9.7.3.2 Mode 3+1

cmd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
A x
B x
C x
D x
E x x
Test x x
Guard x
Table 25 : Relation between commands and frequencies, mode 3+1
9.7.4 Analog Interface TX window

Click on “Analog on TPI” tab of Communication path window to display the screen shown in Figure 82.

Figure 82: Analog interface TX, case mixed tone
9.7.4.1 Overlay mode

The overlay mode “TP over speech” is automatically selected and is not modifiable.
9.7.4.2 Overlay analog channel

The channel is automatically selected as the channel of PRCS (channel 1 by default) and is not
modifiable.
9.7.4.3 Speech
The speech that has been activated in PRCS is automatically selected and is not modifiable.
9.7.4.4 Guard frequency

If no signalling has been configured in the PRCS / speech tab, the menu “Guard frequency” is visible and
offers the user to choose the guard frequency in a list given in Table 20.
If a signalling has been configured, then this menu is not visible and the guard frequency is the
frequency of the signalling.

9.7.4.5 Available power
The command and guard available powers depend on the estimated output power EOP defined in
window AMP/ RF stage.
Command or guard available power = 10 log 10 (EOP * 1000 ) * 10 Pfsk / 20
Where Pfsk is the FSK level under Pep and is by default -22dB under Pep.
9.7.4.6 Channel cutting

This option is not available in mixed mode.
9.7.4.7 Loop test

This panel is only visible on the Master unit.
This is a new feature for the TPIC. It gives information about the ability of the TPIC to send or receive a
TP command. Particularly, when in silent mode, the guard is transmitted by another circuit than the
TPIC transmitter, the test allows to verify the good working of the transmitter of the TPI.
Note that the loop test is only made on the Analogue path.
The test is programmed by HMI to be:
▪ Deactivated
▪ Activated periodic Hourly.
▪ Activated periodic Daily
When the loop test is activated hourly or daily, it is possible to select the schedule in the loop test time
field.
It is furthermore possible to send a loop test in one shot from maintenance tab; the result of the last
loop test is displayed in Measure window. Refer to Maintenance and Measures Installation User guide
for further information.
The alarm in case of a loop test failure can be selected as minor or major.
9.7.4.8 Maximum transmission time

The maximal transmission time is tuneable between 100ms and 2.5s.
9.7.4.9 Tmin DT command

The minimal duration of a direct tripping command is tuneable between 15ms and 500ms.
9.7.4.10 Transmission level

Transmission levels are the signal levels assigned to each command frequency and to the guard.
To set the levels, use the slide bar adjacent to each of the parameters.
The range is from -20dBr to 0dBr for single tones, -20dBr to -3dBr for dual tones, -33dBr to -9dBr for the
loop tets tone and -30dBr to -6dBr for the guard.
0dBr is defined as Pep-0.5dB.

9.7.4.11 Recommended transmission level
9.7.5 Analog interface RX window

Click on the tab “RX” to display the screen shown in Figure 83.

Figure 83: Analog interface Rx
9.7.5.1 TP Rx band Panel

The Rx band panel reminds the TP bandwidth and the TP mode.
9.7.5.2 Unblocking panel
Figure 84: Unblocking
The Unblocking scheme is used to improve the performances of permissive tripping schemes by issuing
command in case of high attenuation.
The unblocking command, when programmed, will last for “Duration” when the guard tone is under a
“level” threshold during a “delay” duration.
▪ Unblocking level: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation threshold in the range -50
to -10 dB under Pep.

▪ Unblocking Delay: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation delay. The value range is
from 1 to 200 ms.
▪ Unblocking Duration: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking duration in the range 10ms to 5s.
9.7.5.3 Alarms
Figure 85: Alarms

SNR Alarm
The SNR is defined by the norm iec 60834-1.
The SNR Alarm occurs if the SNR measured through an internal digital filter falls below a threshold SNR
Low limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR Low limit Delay.
The SNR Alarm is removed if the SNR comes back over a threshold SNR High limit level and remains
there for at least the time specified in SNR High limit Delay.
▪ SNR Low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation threshold in the range -
10 to 15 dB.
▪ SNR Low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation delay. The value range
is from 0.5s to 10s.
▪ SNR High limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation threshold in the range
-10 to 15 dB. The high limit level cannot be lower than the low limit.
▪ SNR High limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation delay. The value
range is from 0.5s to 10s.
Loss of Signal Alarm

The Loss of signal Alarm occurs if the Signal level measured through an internal digital filter falls below
a threshold Loss of signal low limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in Loss of signal
low limit Delay.
The Loss of signal Alarm is removed if the Signal level comes back over a threshold Loss of signal high
limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in Loss of signal high limit Delay.
▪ Loss of signal low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm activation
threshold in the range -30 to -3 dB.
▪ Loss of signal low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm activation delay.
The value range is from 0.5s to 10s.
▪ Loss of signal high limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm deactivation
threshold in the range -30 to -3 dB. The high limit level cannot be lower than the low limit.

▪ Loss of signal high limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm deactivation
delay. The value range is from 0.5s to 10s.
9.7.5.4 Reception levels Panel

Use this panel to set the reception level of each frequency; the range is the same as in Tx panel.
9.8 Digital
To configure the digital interface, click on button “C3794” in Window “Communication path” The screen
shown in Figure 86 is displayed.
Figure 86: Digital interface
General parameters are configured as follows.

Communication module
Choose the path among the digital interfaces present on the system. The default digital path is
OPTICAL.
If you choose interface V11, the windows extends as shown in Figure 87.

Figure 87: Digital interface V11
Number of commands
Use the menu to select 2, 4 or 8 commands. When closing the “Digital Interface” window and returning
to “Communication path” window, do not forget to selects the commands (section 9.5,). The default
value is 4 commands.
Source clock
Click the appropriate radio button to select External or Internal clock. The default value is “external”.
Clock Speed
Select the clock speed in the menu.
In OPTICAL, the available speeds are 64, 128 and 256 kbps (default value 64kbps).
In case V11, the available speeds are 32, 64, 128 and 256kbps (default value 32kbps).
In case G703-1, the available speed is 64kbps.
In case G703-6, the available speed is 2000kbps.
Transfer time alarm threshold
The alarm is set when propagation time exceeds the user-defined threshold. The default value is 20 ms.
BER alarms
Select BER minor alarm threshold among 4 values: 10-6, 10-5, 10-4, 10-3. The default value is 10-5.
Select BER major alarm threshold among 3 values: 10-3, 10-2, 10-1. The default value is 10-3.
Communication mode (only available with V11 interface)
Click the appropriate radio button to select data received on external or internal clock. The default
value is “data received on external clock”.

9.9 Input commands
Click the Input Commands tab to display the screen shown in Figure 88 in case “dual tone mode” and in
Figure 89 in case “mixed mode”
Figure 88: TPI inputs screen case dual tone
For each command, select the protection scheme, corresponding input(s), operator, Holding delay and
Validation delay. Details on each parameter is given in the following.
Figure 89: TPI inputs screen case mixed tone

9.9.1 Protection scheme
9.9.1.1 Case dual tone
With left mouse button, select the protection scheme. The protection scheme can be “type 1”, “type 2”,
“type 3” or “type 4”, corresponding respectively to blocking, permissive, direct tripping fast and direct
tripping slow.
If the key “set/reset” is installed, and if you have selected “1 set/reset” in Analogue interface/Tx, then
CMD#1 is set#1 and CMD#2 is reset#1. The protection scheme of CMD#2 is automatically the same as
the CMD#1. You can choose freely “type 1”, “type 2”, “type 3”, “type 4” for CMD#3 and CMD#4.
CMD#1 is set#1, CMD#2 is reset#1, CMD#3 is set#2, CMD#4 is reset#2. The protection schemes of all
commands, even CMD#5 are automatically the same.
CMD#1 is set#1, CMD#2 is reset#1, CMD#3 is set#2, CMD#4 is reset#2, CMD#5 is set#3, CMD#6 is
reset#3. The protection schemes of all commands, are automatically the same.
9.9.1.2 Case mixed tone

In the mixed tone mode, the protection scheme is already chosen in window communication path.
▪ If 2+2 has been selected, then, commands 1 and 2 are permissive trippings, and commands 3
and 4 are direct trippings.
▪ If 3+1 has been selected, then, command 1, 2 and 3 are permissive trippings, and command 4 is
a direct tripping.
9.9.1.3 Inputs
For each command, select with left mouse button the inputs used to send the command. If you want an
inverted input, select with right mouse button instead of left mouse button.
Figure 90: INV input
WARNING: Inverted input choice is a transmit command within lack of input voltage. During power
supply down the alarm major is happening and transmit command stop.
9.9.2 Operator
Select the operator to apply to inputs to validate the sending of a command. The operator can be OR,
AND, or XOR.

Default value is OR.
Figure 91: Operator choices
For example, if you select for command 1 IN1 and IN2 with operator AND and for command 2 IN1 and
IN2 with operator OR, then If IN1 is active, only command 2 is sent and if IN1 and IN2 are active,
commands 1 and 2 are sent.
Operator Holding Validation
IN 8
IN 6
IN 4
IN 2
IN 1
IN 3
IN 5
IN 7
delay (ms) delay (ms)
CMD1 Type 1 X X AND 0 0

CMD2 Type 2 X X OR 0 0
Figure 92: Operator example
9.9.3 Holding delay

The holding delay (from 0 to 500ms) is the command holding duration. In the case “mixed tone”, the
minimal value of the holding delay for a direct tripping is 15ms.
Command
Transmitted
command
Input Holding
delay
D0659ENa
Figure 93: Input holding delay
9.9.4 Validation delay

This option is only available in case “dual tone”.

The validation delay (from 0 to 25ms) is the minimum duration of the command to be valid.
Command
Transmitted
command
Input Validation Input Validation

Holding Delay
Delay Delay
D0660ENa
Figure 94: Input validation delay
9.9.5 Start (Ext Blk)

This option is only available in case dual tone.
It is possible to allow the reception of a command only if a particular input is active using the start
function. This output contact can be used as a safety presence contact from protection.
9.9.6 Filter
The filter delay (from 0 to 100ms) allows avoiding glitches. Input is considered as valid only if it is active
during at least the filter delay.

Command
Transmitted
command
Input Input
Filter delay Filter delay
D0661ENa
Figure 95: Input filter
CAUTION: Verify that all commands set on an input are checked in window “communication path”.
Otherwise, when input is activated, these commands will be sent and will be ignored at
reception.
9.10 Output commands

Click the Output command tab to display the screen shown in Figure 96:

Figure 96: TPI outputs screen
For each reception command, select the protection scheme, holding delay and validation delay.
For each relay, select the corresponding RX command(s), TX commands(s), Unblocking, operator, start,
alarms. Details on each parameter are given in the following.
9.10.1 Reception Commands

In dual tone mode, it is possible to associate Rx commands to one or more of the NO/NC outputs relays
and on one or more of the NC relays if no other Alarm or Unblocking has already affected to these
relays.
In mixed tone mode, the commands 1 to 4 are automatically linked to relays NO/NC 1 to 8 as follows:
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4

Relay 1 X
Relay 2 X
Relay 3 X
Relay 4 X
Relay 5 X
Relay 6 X
Relay 7 X
Relay 8 X

Table 26: Link between commands and output relays, mixed tone mode
9.10.2 Transmission Commands

In dual tone mode, it is possible to associate Tx commands to one or more of the 8 NO/NC outputs
relays and on one or more of the 6 NC relays if no other Alarm or Unblocking has already affected to
these relays.
In mixed tone mode, it is possible to associate Tx commands to one or more of the 6 NC relays if no
other Alarm or Unblocking has already affected to these relays.
9.10.3 Protection scheme

9.10.3.1 Case dual tone
Choose with right mouse button the protection scheme of Rx commands. The protection scheme can
be “type 1”, “type 2”, “type 3”, “type 4” corresponding respectively to blocking, permissive, direct
tripping fast and direct tripping slow.
CMD#1 is set#1 and CMD#2 is reset#1. The protection scheme of CMD#2 is automatically the same as
the CMD#1. You can choose freely “type 1”, “type 2”, “type 3”, “type 4” for CMD#3 and CMD#4.
CMD#1 is set#1, CMD#2 is reset#1, CMD#3 is set#2, CMD#4 is reset#2. The protection schemes of all
commands, even CMD#5 are automatically the same.
CMD#1 is set#1, CMD#2 is reset#1, CMD#3 is set#2, CMD#4 is reset#2, CMD#5 is set#3, CMD#6 is
reset#3. The protection schemes of all commands, are automatically the same.
Please refer to section 9.11 to see warning about protection scheme.
9.10.3.2 Case mixed tone

In the mixed tone mode, the protection scheme is already chosen in window communication path.
▪ If 2+2 has been selected, then, commands 1 and 2 are permissive trippings, and commands 3
and 4 are direct trippings.
▪ If 3+1 has been selected, then, command 1, 2 and 3 are permissive trippings, and command 4 is
a direct tripping.
9.10.4 Operator
For each relay, choose the operator with left mouse button. You can choose “AND” or “OR”. The
operator works for the whole line.

9.10.5 Holding Delay
Holding delay (from 0 to 100ms) is the command holding duration at reception.
Command
Received
command
Output
Holding delay
D0662ENa
Figure 97: Output holding delay
9.10.6 Validation delay

This option is only available in dual tone mode. The behaviour of validation delay is illustrated in Figure
98.
Detected
command
Received
command
Validation delay Validation delay

D0663ENa
Figure 98: Validation delay

CAUTION: The validation delay (from 0 to 200ms) is taken into account only by analogue path.
9.10.7 Unblocking
In dual tone mode, the Unblocking can be set on one or more relays (NO or NO/NC), if no alarm and no
start is already set on the same relay.
In case mixed tone mode, the Unblocking can be set on one or more NO/NC relays if no alarm are set on
the same relay.
9.10.8 Start (External Blocking)

9.10.8.1 Definition
The Start option allows command restitution only if a particular input is activated.
9.10.8.2 Principle scheme
CRX
TPS TPS
START R
D0664ENa

START
CRX
t (mSec)
START
CRX
t (mSec)
D0665ENa
Figure 99: Start (external blocking) function
CRX: RX command from remote TP

R: command output
START: active input
9.10.8.3 Configuration
In input configuration window
Select one input as « start », IN 3 for example.
Output commands window

Choose a relay, RELAY 4 for example.
On the corresponding row, check both a received command (CMD 2 for example) and then « Start ».
The operator is automatically set to « AND ».
Correspondence between Relay 4 and IN3 and received command CMD2 :
IN 3
AND RELAY 4
CMD 2
Truth table for Relay 4

START (IN 3) CRX (CMD2) R (RELAY 4)
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
TABLE 27: Start truth table
9.10.9 Events/Alarms
Four alarms can be relayed to outputs: Major, Minor, User1 and User 2.
Four alarms can be relayed to outputs: Major, Minor, User1 and User 2.
In dual tone mode, it is possible to associate Alarms to one or more of the 6 NC relays if no other
Command or Unblocking has already affected to these relays.
In mixed tone mode, it is possible to associate Alarms to one or more of the NC relays 1 to 4 if no other
Command or Unblocking has already affected to these relays.
Major and AL1 are the same but the delay to output relays can be different.
Minor and AL2 are the same but the delay to output relays can be different.
9.10.9.1 Logic of Alarms

We can select one of the two types of logic for each relay associated to alarms.
AH = active high
All relays are currently driven by positive logic. This is correct for NO contacts (generally dedicated to
commands), refer to logic diagram here below;
Logic Command of the relay

(AH - Active High )
Switched off
State of the Alarm Inactive Active Inactive
(Inactive)
State of NO contact Open Open Closed Open
State of NC contact Closed Closed Open Closed
AL = active low

This state (AH) is not properly operate for alarm indication.
In this case we need a NC contact with active alarm state equal to the state when TPI is switched off.
D0671ENa
9.10.9.2 Events entries

For memory, the platform offers up to 3072 entries.
Each entry provides a chronological counter, timestamp (1ms accuracy), severity, code of event and
additional (optional) comment.
In flash Event name

Y Command RX Command [1….8] received START / END duration= YY:XX
Y Command TX Command [1….8] transmitted START / END duration= YY:XX
Y Command input Relay [1….14] input START / END duration= YY:XX
Y Command output Relay [1….14] output START / END duration= YY:XX
Y Maintenance Enter, Equalization
Y Maintenance Exit
Y Maintenance Forcing Inputs
Y Maintenance Forcing outputs
Y Maintenance Reset counters
TABLE 28: Events table

Figure 100: Events extract
Figure 101: Alarms extract
9.10.10 State on alarm

For each output relay, you can choose the state of relay when a alarm occurs by clicking with the right
mouse button.
In mixte mode, the “state on alarm” of a relay can only be trigged by major alarms.
In dual tone mode, the “state on alarm” of a relay can be trigged by either major alarms or by
unblocking if unblocking is set simultaneously with one or more commands on this relay.
The states of relay in major alarm can be:

▪ “Idle”: the relay is automatically open
▪ “Set”: the relay is automatically closed

▪ “Memory”: the relay is maintained in the state it had before the alarm occurred
▪ “Transparent”: the alarm has no influence on relay state
The icons related to the different states are represented in Table 17.
Idle Set Memory Transparent
TABLE 29: Relay states on alarm
Idle Alarm Cmd Output

0 0 0
1 0 0
0 1 1
1 1 0
Set Alarm Cmd Output

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Transparent Alarm Cmd Output

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 1
Memory Alarm Cmd n-1 Cmd n Output

0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
TABLE 30: Truth tables
CAUTION: Verify that all commands set on a relay are checked in window communication path.
NOTE: If nothing is set on a relay, the “state on alarm” of this relay is forced to “idle”
NOTE: The “state on alarm” of relays where alarms are connected are forced to “transparent”
NOTE: The “state on alarm” of relays where only unblocking is connected are forced to
“transparent”
9.11 Warning about protection scheme in analog path

In the analogue path, if only one command is received, the protection scheme applied is the protection
scheme given to this command by user in window TPI/Output commands of HMI.
If a combination of commands is received, the protection scheme applied is the most secure of received
commands.
For example, if protection scheme allowed to commands 1 to 3 are the protection given in the table
below:
Command number Protection scheme
CMD1 Type 3
CMD2 Type 2
CMD3 Type 1
As type 1 < type 2 < Type 3, the applied protection schemes are the following:
combination Protection scheme
CMD1 Type 3
CMD2 Type 2
CMD3 Type 1

CMD1& CMD2 Type 3
CMD1& CMD3 Type 3
CMD2& CMD3 Type 2
CMD1& CMD2&CMD3 Type 3

Gridcom T390
Maintenance and Measures
Version: 9.0
T390/EN Maintenance
CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 5
2. Monitoring LEDS ............................................................................................. 6
2.1 Amplifier Unit........................................................................................................................6
2.1.1 Amplifier power supply indicators................................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 AMP Extension Unit (AMPX) connections....................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Application and system LED indicators ........................................................................................... 7
2.1.3.1 Ethernet activity (orange) ............................................................................................................ 8
2.1.3.2 Ethernet link (green) .................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.3.3 System indicators ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.1.3.4 Line fault...................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.3.5 User SNR alarm............................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.3.6 Remote maintenance .................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.3.7 Local maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3.8 TX power alarm ........................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3.9 1/4................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.3.10 1/2 ............................................................................................................................................ 10
2.1.3.11 Full ........................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Extended Amplifier Unit ..................................................................................................... 10
2.2.1 Power supply indicators................................................................................................................ 10
2.2.2 System Led Indicators .................................................................................................................. 10
2.3 Processing Unit ................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.1 Power Supply LEDs........................................................................................................................11
2.3.1.1 Main LED ....................................................................................................................................11
2.3.1.2 Aux LED ......................................................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Functional LED details .................................................................................................................. 12
2.3.2.1 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Activity ..................................................................................................... 12
2.3.2.2 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Link .......................................................................................................... 12
2.3.2.3 Internal Error and System OK .................................................................................................... 12
2.3.2.4 User Alarm: AL1& AL2 ................................................................................................................13
2.3.2.5 FallBack Mode ............................................................................................................................13
2.3.2.6 Normal Mode .............................................................................................................................13
2.3.2.7 IRIG B Synchro ............................................................................................................................13
2.3.2.8 Serv local ....................................................................................................................................13
2.3.2.9 TP – Error .................................................................................................................................. 14
2.3.2.10 TP – online ............................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.2.11 TP – active................................................................................................................................ 15
2.4 Internal Teleprotection Unit................................................................................................ 15
2.4.1 Internal Error and System OK ....................................................................................................... 15
2.4.2 Alarm LEDs .................................................................................................................................. 16
3. Monitoring Messages .................................................................................... 17

3.1 Event logging ...................................................................................................................... 17
Gridcom T390 1 Maintenance

3.2 History Logging................................................................................................................... 18
4. Tests and measurements .............................................................................. 19

4.1 The Line tab ........................................................................................................................ 19
4.2 The BER tab ........................................................................................................................ 20
4.3 The Constellation tab (QAM) .............................................................................................. 21
4.4 The Data Recorder tab ........................................................................................................ 22
4.5 Alarm Status ....................................................................................................................... 23
4.6 System Diagnosis Status ....................................................................................................24
4.7 Spectrum Analyser .............................................................................................................. 25
4.8 TPI ......................................................................................................................................26
4.8.1 Input ............................................................................................................................................. 27
4.8.2 Output ......................................................................................................................................... 27
4.8.3 Counters ....................................................................................................................................... 28
4.8.4 Analog.......................................................................................................................................... 29
4.8.5 Digital........................................................................................................................................... 29
4.8.6 Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 30
5. Maintenance Menu ....................................................................................... 33

5.1 Digital Equalization tab ....................................................................................................... 33
5.2 Auto Gain Control tab ......................................................................................................... 34
5.3 Analog equalization tab ...................................................................................................... 35
5.4 Multitones tab..................................................................................................................... 37
5.5 Processing tab ..................................................................................................................... 38
5.6 Loopback tab ...................................................................................................................... 39
5.7 Misc tab ...............................................................................................................................40
5.8 TPI tab.................................................................................................................................40
5.8.1 Input commands ........................................................................................................................... 41
5.8.2 Outputs commands ...................................................................................................................... 42
5.8.3 Counters ....................................................................................................................................... 44
5.8.4 Loop test ...................................................................................................................................... 44
6. HF Power Measurement Method .................................................................. 46

6.1 Theoretical configuration ....................................................................................................46
6.1.1 Band sharing ................................................................................................................................. 46
6.1.1.1 Maintenance channel ................................................................................................................. 46
6.1.1.2 Signal channel ........................................................................................................................... 46
6.1.1.3 Synchronisation phase ............................................................................................................... 47
6.1.2 Setting up ..................................................................................................................................... 47
6.1.3 Application ................................................................................................................................... 48
6.2 On-line measurements .......................................................................................................49
7. Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................ 50

7.1 Scope .................................................................................................................................. 50
7.2 Firmware release identification ........................................................................................... 50
7.2.1 Objectives ..................................................................................................................................... 50

7.2.2 Bundles......................................................................................................................................... 50
7.2.3 HMI version................................................................................................................................... 51
7.2.4 Hardware, kernel and bundle versions .......................................................................................... 51
7.2.5 MSU, VSU, TIO versions ............................................................................................................... 52
7.3 Firmware Upgrade/Update .................................................................................................. 53
7.3.1 Objective ...................................................................................................................................... 53
7.3.2 Passwords & permissions .............................................................................................................. 53
7.3.3 Upgrading a T390: Basic procedure ............................................................................................... 54
7.3.4 Upgrading a T390: Complete procedure ....................................................................................... 54
7.3.4.1 Kernel upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 56
7.3.4.2 Applicative upgrade ....................................................................................................................57
7.3.4.3 MSU,VSU and TIO boards upgrade ............................................................................................ 59
7.3.5 Upgrade failures............................................................................................................................ 60
7.3.5.1 Warning about applicative upgrade............................................................................................ 60
7.3.5.2 Warning about board upgrade ................................................................................................... 60
7.3.6 Replacing a unit (spare)................................................................................................................. 61
7.4 Extended Packages unlocking: Key System ........................................................................ 61
7.4.1 How to get the already installed keys on the system..................................................................... 61
7.4.2 How to obtain the keys ................................................................................................................. 62
7.4.3 Key installation procedure ............................................................................................................ 63
7.5 Appendix : Firmware window description ...........................................................................64
7.6 Appendix: Erasing User parameters .................................................................................... 65
8. Data Retrieving for assistance ....................................................................... 68

8.1 LED’s behaviour in working equipment ...............................................................................68
8.1.1 Startup Sequence Digital Mode .................................................................................................... 68
8.1.1.1 Step 1 : system recognition ........................................................................................................ 68
8.1.1.2 Step 2 : Amplifier synchronization ............................................................................................. 68
8.1.1.3 Step 3 : TDM synchronization .................................................................................................... 68
8.1.1.4 Synchronization state ................................................................................................................ 69
8.1.2 Startup Sequence Analog Mode ................................................................................................... 69
8.1.2.1 Step 1 : system recognition ........................................................................................................ 69
8.1.2.2 Step 2 : Amplifier synchronization ............................................................................................. 69
8.1.2.3 Step 3 : PRCS synchronization ................................................................................................... 70
8.1.2.4 Synchronization state ................................................................................................................ 70
8.2 Classical issues .................................................................................................................... 70
8.3 Problem Report ................................................................................................................... 71
8.3.1 Data Retrieving procedure ............................................................................................................. 71
8.3.2 Problem report document .............................................................................................................73

1. Introduction
The T390 offers several features to monitor the system and proceed to maintenance operations.
In this document we describe:
▪ In chapter 2 LEDS signification of each unit.
▪ In chapter 3 monitoring messages accessible by HMI.
▪ In chapter 4 the measures done by PLC and displayed in HMI.
▪ In chapter 5 the maintenance operations that can be done through HMI
▪ Chapter 6 is dedicated to explanation of the HF power measurement method.
▪ Chapter 7 deals with the firmware upgrade
▪ Chapter 8 details the procedure to follow when system does not run correctly to collect all data
of the system and call for assistance.

2. Monitoring LEDS
2.1 Amplifier Unit
2.1.1 Amplifier power supply indicators
Figure 1 shows the LED indicators on the power supply panel:
Power LED Logic LED
Power Supply
Connector
Figure 1: Power supply indicators and connector

The LEDs above the power supply connector indicate the status of power supply connection and
detection. They function as follows:
LED Status Description
Power ON 40VDC Power Supply OK after Logic ON
Logic + 5 VDC OK
2.1.2 AMP Extension Unit (AMPX) connections

Figure 2 shows the AMPX amplifier connections (for supporting 80W power output).

Figure 2: AMP extension to AMPX Connections
The LED indicators on the AMP extension unit panel function as follows:
System OK Acknowledgement of AMPX
Enabled In service
2.1.3 Application and system LED indicators
Figure 3: Amplifier functional LED indicator panel schematic view

The following sections describe the functions of the LED indicators (for more information, refer to
chapter Data retrieving for assistance).
2.1.3.1 Ethernet activity (orange)

Indicates activity on the receive side of the Ethernet link (RJ45 plug).
ON blinking Rx activity
OFF No Rx Activity (no connection)
2.1.3.2 Ethernet link (green)

The LED indicates whether an Ethernet device (typically a maintenance PC) is connected through the
Ethernet link (RJ45 plug).
ON Connected to a device
OFF No carrier
2.1.3.3 System indicators

These LEDs display as follows to indicate the system status:
System OK (green) Internal Error (red) Description
OFF ON Internal unit error
ON FAST BLINKING Internal configuration error
OFF SLOW BLINKING Waiting for configuration
FAST BLINKING N/A Bit stream transfer with HMI in progress (Events,
QAM diagram, Recorder ...)
ON OFF System is running and waiting for line
synchronization
2.1.3.4 Line fault

The LED is ON (steady) or flashing to indicate line faults.
Status Description
ON Line Fault (not connected to HV line, or signal out of range)
Flash Bad line (not enough to assure data transmission)
OFF Line OK

2.1.3.5 User SNR alarm
LED is ON (steady) or flashing to indicate SNR status.
Status Description
ON Alarm threshold reached
Flash Warning
OFF Within the user-defined limits
2.1.3.6 Remote maintenance

LED shows status of maintenance mode (remote connection).
Status Description
ON Maintenance in progress (connected with the remote PLC)
Flash Maintenance error
OFF Maintenance off
2.1.3.7 Local maintenance

LED shows status of maintenance mode (local connection).
Status Description
ON Local Maintenance in progress (the amplifier should be connected to a dummy
load, NOT the HF Line)
Flash Maintenance error
OFF Maintenance off
2.1.3.8 TX power alarm

Indicates that Tx power is beyond/within user-defined limits.
Status Description
ON Outside the user-defined limits
OFF Within the user-defined limits
2.1.3.9 1/4
Works with the other LEDs in this group to indicate Tx power status
Status Description
ON Power is a quarter of full power
Slow blinking Power is less than 1/4 of full power
OFF Power is more than 1/4 of full power

2.1.3.10 1/2
Status Description
ON Power is half full power
Flash Power is between 1/4 and 1/2 of full power
OFF Power is less than or equal to 1/4 or more than 1/2 of available power
2.1.3.11 Full
Status Description
ON Power is at maximum
Flash Power is between half and full power
OFF Power is less than or equal to half full power
2.2 Extended Amplifier Unit

2.2.1 Power supply indicators
The power supply indicators are the same as those of amplifier unit (section2.1.1).
2.2.2 System Led Indicators
Figure 4: AMPX System LEDs

These LEDs indicate the system status.
System Ok AMP acknowledgement
Enabled In service

2.3 Processing Unit
2.3.1 Power Supply LEDs
Figure 5: Power supply connector and indicators
2.3.1.1 Main LED

Indicates the status of power supply connection and detection
LED Status Meaning
ON Power supply OK
OFF Power supply not OK or no Power Supply
2.3.1.2 Aux LED

OFF Reserved for future application

2.3.2 Functional LED details
Figure 6: Unit chain connectors and the LED panels

The following tables describe the function of each of the LEDs. For more information on LEDs
behaviour in working equipment, refer to section 8 Data Retrieving for assistance.
2.3.2.1 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Activity

The LED indicates activity (or the lack of it) on the Ethernet.
ON Rx activity
OFF No Rx activity
2.3.2.2 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Link

Indicates whether an Ethernet device (e.g. maintenance PC) is connected (at RJ45 plug).
ON Device connected
OFF No carrier
2.3.2.3 Internal Error and System OK

The status of these two LEDs in combination indicates the overall system status.
System OK Internal Error Description (see HMI section for more details)
OFF ON Internal Unit error

FAST N/A Bit stream transfer with HMI in progress (events, QAM
BLINKING diagram, recorder, etc.)
ON OFF System is running and waiting for line synchronization
2.3.2.4 User Alarm: AL1& AL2

Indicates the status of user-defined alarms.
Status Description
ON Relay 1, 1 of both contacts closed
OFF Relay 2 , 1 of both contacts open
2.3.2.5 FallBack Mode

This LED indicates when fallback is active (only if KEY-FALLBACK is installed).
Status Description
ON Fall Back mode activated
OFF Normal mode or TDM is off
2.3.2.6 Normal Mode

Indicates the operational status of digital transmissions (always off in analog mode).
Status Description
ON Normal mode activated / Services are running
Flash (slow) Waiting for QAM signal
Flash (Fast) Waiting for TDM synchronization (searching for marker)
OFF TDM OFF
2.3.2.7 IRIG B Synchro

Indicates the operational status of the IRIG-B interface (KEY-IRIGB must be installed)
Status Description
ON Full synchronization with PLC
OFF No IRIG B Signal
2.3.2.8 Serv local

Indicates the status of local services
Case analog

Status Description
Flash (slow) At least one channel has failed
Flash (Fast) At least one channel is locked
OFF All services are off
Case digital
Status Description
ON Services are running
Flash (slow) System has failed
Case mixte
Status Description
Flash (fast) Services are running
Flash (slow) System has failed
NOTE: Flash fast : led ON 33%, Led OFF 66%

Flash slow : led ON 50%, Led OFF 50%
2.3.2.9 TP – Error
Indicates the operational status of external teleprotection.
Status Description
ON Error on TPX
Flash (Fast) Safety presence
OFF No error
2.3.2.10 TP – online
Indicates the availability of the external teleprotection.
Status Description
ON TPX enabled and running
Flash (slow) TPX enabled but not running
OFF TPX not activated

2.3.2.11 TP – active
Indicates whether external teleprotection is active.
Status Description
ON TPX BLE active
OFF BLE off
2.4 Internal Teleprotection Unit
Figure 7: LEDs front panel
The front panel LEDs are shown in Figure 76 and described in the tables that follow.
LED Description
Int. Error See Section 8.9.1
Syst. OK See Section 8.9.1
On Line Communication synchronised
Maint. Future use only
Tx Cmd Yellow indicates command is sent
Rx Cmd Yellow indicates command is received
On (yellow) only if both analogue and digital path are
Backup
configured
Events On (yellow) if new event is available since last event download
TABLE 1: Signalling LEDs
2.4.1 Internal Error and System OK

The status of these two LEDs in combination indicates the overall system status.

System OK Internal Error LED
Description (see HMI section for more details)
LED status status
OFF ON Internal Unit error or LVDS cable connection faulty
FAST N/A Communication with HMI in progress (events, recorder, etc.)
BLINKING
ON OFF System operating
TABLE 2: Signalling LEDs
2.4.2 Alarm LEDs

LED Description
Major On Red and fix for local major alarm
Minor On Red and fix for local minor alarm
Major On Red and slow blinking for remote major alarm
Minor On Red and slow blinking for remote minor alarm
Major On Red and fast blinking for local and remote major alarm
Minor On Red and fast blinking for local and remote minor alarm
Alarm User 1 On Red for Alarm User 1
Alarm User 2 On Red for Alarm User 2
TABLE 3: Alarm LEDs Complete alarm condition
The complete list of possible alarms on the TPI with their gravity is given in section 4.8.6.

3. Monitoring Messages
3.1 Event logging
The PLC supports event recording. It can store in flash a series of event records that describe system
activity.
This list of events can be retrieved on the PC by the HMI and stored in a file.
The related operations are performed during normal operation phase.
Event logging is accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|Show Events, which leads to
the following window:
Figure 8: Events window

Events are listed in the following format:
▪ Chrono: event incremental counter – the icon indicates the gravity of the event
▪ Gravity: event gravity (only for Warning/Error events)
▪ Date: event date and time
▪ ID: an internal identifier
▪ Comment: additional information about the event
▪ Description: describes the event
The events are stored on a per-unit basis: the unit is selected from the top left panel and the uploaded
events are displayed in the lower pane.
Events are uploaded in either of two ways:

▪ Directly from T390 Unit, by clicking Retrieve from PLC or by double clicking on a unit in the list.
This can be done only in connected mode. The Retrieve from PLC button is inactive in
disconnected mode.
▪ From a file stored on the PC, by clicking Load. This can be done in both connected and
disconnected mode.
In order to load events from a file, they must first have been saved. This is achieved by clicking Save,
once some events have been uploaded and displayed in the event window.
Progress of all of the above operations can be monitored with the progress bar at the foot of the
window.
Note that only major events are visible from customer HMI. The totallity of recorded events can be
loaded, even in customer HMI with the data collection feature, described in section 8.
3.2 History Logging

In addition to non-volatile events, the PLC support also a bench of volatile events, named histories,
used for support by the operation support team.
The histories are not visible with customer HMI, but are recorder and can be loaded even with customer
HMI by the mean of the data collection feature described in section 8 if needed.

4. Tests and measurements
It is possible to make various tests and measurements on the PLC system. These tests and
measurements can only be performed if the T390 system is in maintenance (TEST) mode. Driving the
PLC through the HMI ensures this condition.
Note that the PC running the HMI must be connected directly to the system under test; the operations
involved cannot be performed remotely through the Power Line link.
This functionality is accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|Measures. The window
shown in Figure 9 is displayed.
Various tests and measurements are available, as follows:
▪ Line measurements: SNR, AGC, TX PEP
▪ Digital measurements: BER, QAM (Constellation)
▪ Data recorder
▪ System diagnostics
▪ Alarms
▪ Spectrum analyzer
▪ TPI (if a TPI is present in the system)
4.1 The Line tab

To sum up, the line tab displays mainly the line measures done by PLC.
Figure 9: Main system line measurements

Click Refresh to redraw the display. If Auto-Refresh is checked, the display is automatically redrawn at
regular intervals.
TX Power (analog)
The PEP value in dBm is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
SNR Panel

The SNR value in dB is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
The signal is assumed to be the Rx FSK signal (70Hz band), meaning that for all configurations, the
measurement is always the same. The noise is assumed to be the mirrored 70Hz beside the QAM
channel. For superimposed band mode, the noise is measured outside the band, assuming that an
interband of 8kHz is left beside the channel. The SNR measured within the PLC HMI is intended to be
used only for information purpose and fallback condition switching.
Reference signal, Noise and Rx Signal
As explained above, the reference level is the level of the expected pilot of the PLC measured in a 70Hz
band around the pilot central frequency.Measure is done after the AGC, and is expected to be around
20dBr. This value is only a reference, and does not have a physical meaning. The AGC is adjusted in
order to always have this level around 20 dBr.
Noise measure is also done behing the AGC and is the measure of the received signal in a band non-
used by the PLC. The SNR is hence the difference between the reference level (expected to be 20) and
the noise level.
The RX signal is the measure of the whole incoming signal in dB, and has no relationship with the
reference signal.
AGC Operation
The AGC value in dB is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box. The vertical bars identify the
thresholds (AGC high-level threshold and AGC low-level threshold) that have been defined for the
Amplifier Unit.
There are two AGCs: one digital, one analogue.
Temperature (Additional Panel)
The temperature of the system in degrees Celsius.
4.2 The BER tab

The BER tab gives information on the quality of the digital signal through standardized measures.

Figure 10: Main system BER measurements
Windowed BER
The Windowed BER measurement is controlled from this panel: editing the value in the corresponding
text box configures the measurement duration (in seconds). Click Start to send signals for the
configured duration and calculate the Windowed BER.
The Windowed BER value is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
BER G821
The G821 Status window shows the global status of G821:
OK: no errors/slippages/skipped bits or sync loss have occurred.
WARNING: No error has occurred, but there are slippages and/or skipped bits and/or sync loss.
Otherwise, the current BER is displayed in this panel.
The right hand side of the tab contains all G821 compliant statistics.
Click Refresh to resend a signal with the configured settings and refresh the results.
If Auto-Refresh is checked, the display is refreshed at regular intervals.
4.3 The Constellation tab (QAM)

The constellation tab displays the received points of the constellation, before nearest neighbour
decision.
The better is the line quality, the more accurate should the points be.

Figure 11: QAM 16 constellation diagram
The maximum number of printed points is chosen in the corresponding editable text box.
Click Clear to clear the display.
Click Refresh to start a set of measurements.
Click Save to save results.
Click Close to close the pane display.
4.4 The Data Recorder tab

The data recorder tab is mainly used for support. It displays some internal values of the system.

Figure 12: Main system data recorder
Up to three traces can be displayed on each graph. To hide a trace, deselect the corresponding color on
the left panel.
The trace width is 5000 points, with a maximum resolution of 1pt/s, giving a display limit of 83 minutes
recording.
The trigger option can be used to schedule recording by event (see User Alarm configuration tab), Date,
or Normal. In normal mode, the trigger option is not used.
Unchecking Continuous causes the measurement to stop after filling the point buffer.
To save measurements click Save to file. To read them offline click Load from file.
Amplifier graphs
▪ Signal to Noise graphs, showing the signal measurement (red) and the in-band (green) and out-
band (blue) noise measurement.
▪ Analog AGC (red) measurement, when A/D converter saturated digital AGC (green) is operated,
and Rx power measurement (blue).
▪ Temperature (red) measured on B01 amplifier card, Tx power (green) measured after Tx HF
filter on line, and analog Tx power (blue) measurement concerning analog services and/or
teleprotection signal.
PRC graphs
▪ DAGC measurement error variation (red) and DAGC gain.
▪ BER error curve (red), BER skip curve (green) and BER synchro curve (blue).
4.5 Alarm Status

An alarm status list is displayed. These alarms corespond with the status of the LEDs present on each
unit.
Note that some remote alarms can also be monitored.

Figure 13: Main system alarm status
4.6 System Diagnosis Status

The system diagnosis status tab displays status information of the equipment.
Medium training panel concerns only the Amplifier state diagnosis. When both amplifiers of the link are
synchonised, the medium training state is Running. It means in particular that both amplifier can
communicate through the FSK pilot channel.
QAM training panel concerns only the Processing synchronization when the system is configured as
digital (or mixte). This panel does not concern at all the analog path.
When the QMa training state is Running that means that the configured data are exchanged through
the digital channel (QAM or TCM).
The unit status panel gives status information on the selcted unit. It is particularly usefull to identify
which unit of a system is in default.

Figure 14: Main system diagnosis status
4.7 Spectrum Analyser

The HMI provides a spectrum analyser that can display a bandwidth of N kHz inside the T390 Rx band,
N depending on the digital bandwidth.
For digital bandwidth ≤ 16kHz, N=25.6.
For digital bandwidth = 32kHz, N=51.2.
For digital bandwidth = 40kHz, N=64.
For digital bandwidth = 48kHz, N=80.
For digital bandwidth = 50kHz, N=81.92.

Figure 15: Spectrum analyzer
The following options are available from the spectrum analyzer:
ON/OFF: Enable or disable the spectrum analyser.
Sweep Time: Window sweep time duration in seconds.
Measure Duration: Duration of a single point measure in seconds.
Center Frequency: Measurement window center frequency in kHz.
Frequency Span: Window width in kHz.
Auto: Automatically adapts the window to fit the measured signal.
4.8 TPI
The TPI tab allows checking the state of following parameters:
Input commands
This subtab gives the current status of inputs.
Output commands
This subtab gives the current status of output relays.
Counters
This subtab gives the number of Tx and Rx commands since the last reinitialization
Analog

This subtab gives the current measured level of each tone of the teleprotection (including the guard)
Digital
This subtab gives the the instantaneous BER, measured on 1E6 bits and the propagation delay in ms
Alarms
This subtab gives the current status of all TPi alarms.
Figure 16: Input Commands screen
Select one of the TPI measures tabs to open the relevant display.
4.8.1 Input
Click Input Commands tab to see the input configuration and status displayed in Figure 16. In this
window, the relation between inputs and commands is reminded.
Furthermore, the active inputs status is displayed on the first line.
Keep in mind that the status is the status of the optoelectronics input (not the associated logic)
In case of inverted input, the command is inactive when the status is red.
4.8.2 Output
Click on Output Commands tab to see the relay configuration and status displayed in Figure 17. In this
window, the relation between relays and commands is reminded. Furthermore, the triggered outputs
are highlighted in Red.

Figure 17: Output command status
4.8.3 Counters
Click on Tab “counters” to display the screen shown in Figure 18.
Figure 18: Counter values
In this window are displayed the number of RX commands and the number of Tx commands since the
last reset of counters.
Capacity of each counter is up to 65535.

4.8.4 Analog
Click on Tab “Analog” to display the screen shown in Figure 19. Reception levels of 8 tones are
displayed. If you are in mode “TP over speech”, the 8th tone level is the level of the speech signalling.
NOTE: If the level of a tone is less than -45dB, it is displayed as -45dB.
Furthermore, in the case 2PT+2DT and 3PT+1DT, the result of last loop test is given. See section 5.8.4
for more information on the loop test.
Figure 19: Tone level measurement
4.8.5 Digital
Two measures are available in case of digital path configured:
▪ The instantaneous BER, measured on 1E6 bits
▪ The propagation delay in ms
Figure 20: DIGITAL MEASURE TAB
If no digital TPI settled the following window will appear:

Figure 21: DIGITAL MEASURE not used
4.8.6 Alarms
Click on Tab “Alarms” to display the screen shown in Figure 22.
Figure 22: Alarm state

The possible alarms are given in the following table.
Alarm type Alarm icon
Fatal
Major
Minor
Info
Table 4: Alarm possible states

The list of possible alarms is given hereafter.
Alarms Description Path

Configuration error Incoherency between HMI and TPI possibilities Both paths
Hardware error Incoherency between HMI and TPI hardware Both paths
LVDS link lost LVDS connection faulty Both paths
Synchronization failed No communication between both TPI Digital path only
Remote alarm minor Minor alarm from remote equipment Digital path only
Remote alarm major Major alarm from remote equipment Digital path only
BER minor BER measured value below low threshold Digital path only
BER major BER measured value below high threshold Digital path only
Loss of guard Guard is lost and no command is detected Analog path only
The detected command does not correspond to Analog path only
Forbidden command
any valid command
Communication between local and remote TPI is Both paths
Communication alarm
ok
Maintenance mode TPI under HMI maintenance Both paths
Events New events appeared since last consultation Both paths
Available only when
Fallback PLC entered under fallback function
both paths are active
Tx command activated Command is sent Both paths
Rx command activated Command is received Both paths
Propagation time between local and remote TPI Digital path only
Propagation time
is too long
USER.Unblocking Unblocking operation occurred Analog path only
USER.SNR SNR alarm ON Analog path only

Alarms Description Path
USER.Signal loss Received signal is too too low Analog path only
Max transmission time Tx command is too long Analog path only
Loop test Loop test failed Analog path only
Major alarm Alarm major ON Both paths
Minor alarm Alarm minor ON Both paths
User 1 (AL1) Alarm user 1 ON Both paths
User 2 (AL2) Alarm user 2 ON Both paths
Table 5 : TPI alarm list

5. Maintenance Menu
The HMI can drive the PLC in order to make some tests on the line, such as line response to tone
signals, signal generation test, system reboot, or shutdown.These tests can only be performed if the
T390 system is in maintenance (TEST) mode. Driving the PLC through the HMI ensures this condition.
Note that the PC running the HMI must be connected directly to the system under test; the operations
involved cannot be performed remotely through the Power Line link.
This functionality is accessed through the main menu by selecting PLC|Maintenance, which displays a
pane with seven available tabs:
▪ System Security Management
▪ System equalization
▪ Multitones
▪ Processing
▪ Loopback
▪ Misc
▪ TPI (if a TPI is present in the system)
5.1 Digital Equalization tab
Figure 23: Digital equalization

The PLC system has a line equalizer able to make a continuous line adaptation in terms of attenuation
and phase, on the entire programmed band.

CAUTION: The equalizer starts automatically, without user intervention. However, “pre-
equalization” is MANDATORY, in order to force the start conditions of the algorithm.
This pre-equalization is set in the maintenance module equalizer. This module notes the line condition
when launched and stops when good equalization is reached. Those values are stored in flash for the
next run.
Up to six slots are available to store different line conditions. Easy switching between them is achieved
by defining the start up index.
5.2 Auto Gain Control tab
Figure 24: Auto gain control

The AGC optimization is used to store the initial Gain for AGC algorithm allowing a faster restart. Click
Refresh value to retrieve current values, then check the Enabled box, and click Apply and Save to save
the parameters. In case of signal loss, the AGC will start with this value.
NOTE: Wait for complete synchronization of the link to get true values for AGC.

5.3 Analog equalization tab
Figure 25: Maintenance: analog equalization

This functionality is used to equalize speech or telegraph analog channel, only, configured in the T390
system.
It can be enabled by selecting Analog Channel 1 in the following radio button:
Figure 26: Maintenance: enable analog channel equalizer
Then click Apply on PLC to apply the changes on PLC.

Click Save in flash to permanently save the equalization parameters in flash so that they will be
automatically applied on the next reboot.
Channel equalization procedure:
Manual equalization
If the line de-equalization is known (by using an external spectrum analyzer or the one provided in the
measures pane), it is possible manually to apply a gain correction per frequency using the manual
equalization panel:

Figure 27: Maintenance: analog channel equalizer - manual
Once the equalization values have been selected, click Apply to send them to the PLC.
Automatic equalization
Click Start to initiate the automatic equalization process.
The equalization steps are displayed in the panel on the right until the end of the process:
Figure 28: Maintenance: analog channel equalizer – measurement in progress
Figure 29: Maintenance: analog channel equalizer – equalization OK

Remember to apply changes by clicking Apply on PLC. Clicking Save in flash writes the equalization
parameters permanently in flash so that they will be automatically applied on next reboot.

5.4 Multitones tab
Figure 30: Maintenance: Multitones

Two modes are available:
▪ Single Tone: the user can select in the table on the right of the pane up to four tones to be sent.
▪ Multi Tones: the tone characteristics are pre-defined and not editable by the user. The system
selects automatically 8 predefined tones equally reparted in the band.
This maintenance mode can be applied either on the Local or Remote side.
When the link is NOT synchronized only the offline maintenance is accessible, and allows sending tones
from the local unit to the line. This can be used for instance to adjust rejection.
When the link is synchronized only the online maintenance is accessible, and allows sending tones from
the remote side to the local one.
CAUTION: In single tone mode, the full power of the amplifier is available (no limitation is
provided). So be very careful when using this module and start with low levels
such as -20dB.

5.5 Processing tab
Figure 31: Maintenance: processing

This is used to send digital signals for line testing purposes.
Depending on the selected check box in the Selection panel, the signals are generated either locally or
remotely, or else the feature is disabled.
Two types of signal can be generated:
▪ Pseudo Noise: PNG 511 bits are sent to the line.
▪ Fixed Symbol : the symbol consists of one 8-bit character and is indicated in hexadecimal
notation in the corresponding text box.
▪ LAN to LAN: full gross bit rate is assigned to the LAN to LAN feature.
The choice of maintenance mode is made by clicking the relevant Switch button.

5.6 Loopback tab
Figure 32: Maintenance: loopback

It is possible to apply a loopback on all digital and analog channels using this tab.
The loopback mode must be selected by right clicking on a channel and selecting the required option:
Figure 33: Maintenance: loopback selection

5.7 Misc tab
Figure 34: System maintenance tab

This tab offers two basic functions: Reboot System and Shutdown System. Both options allow a
controlled shutdown of the PLC system, saving all parameters or pending events.
Always use one of these options rather than the hardware power switch.
5.8 TPI tab

If you are granted, it is possible to force inputs and outputs and to reinitialize the TPI command
counters. On the HMI Maintenance icon, click Input Commands tab to display the screen shown in
Figure 35:

Figure 35: Maintenance screen
Select one of the TPI maintenance tabs to open the relevant display.
5.8.1 Input commands

Click on Tab “Input commands” to display the screen shown in Figure 35.
In the window, the correspondence between commands and inputs is reminded.
In order to send commands on HF line, check boxes on the left of command numbers and click button
“Force”.
The warning window displayed in Figure 36 will appear. Click yes to send selected commands online.
Click “no” to abort.

Figure 36: input forcing warning
5.8.2 Outputs commands

Click on Tab “Output commands” to display the screen shown in Figure 37.

Figure 37: Maintenance output commands
In the window, the correspondence between commands and outputs is reminded.

In order to activate output relays, check boxes on the left of relay and click button “Force”.
The warning window displayed in Figure 38 will appear. Click yes to activate selected relays. Click “no”
to abort.
Figure 38: Output forcing warning
In the case where one (or more) set/reset is configured, there is a button “clear cmds” next the “force”
button. To send manually a “reset” at reception, check the reset box below the considered column and
click on button “clear cmds”.

The warning window displayed in Figure 39 will appear. Click yes to activate selected commands. Click
no to abort.
Figure 39: Reset commands warning
5.8.3 Counters
The reset of the counters can be performed in the tab Reinitialization displayed in Figure 40.
Figure 40: Counter reset
5.8.4 Loop test

The loop test is only available in case “mixed mode” (2PT+2DT or 3PT+1DT).
The loop test tab is only available on the master side. Click on the tab to display the screen shown in
Figure 41
Figure 41: Maintenance Loop test
The loop test can be initiated by clicking on button “Start loop test”.
The master unit sends then a message test MT1 to Slave during 200ms. The Slave answers with a
message test MT2 during 200ms. When this message is received by Master, it answers with another
message test, MT3 during 200ms.

The time transmission measured by Master is displayed in the panel “Last loop test result”. It is equal to
the time between the sending of message MT1 and the reception of MT2 divided by 2.
On the slave side, the time transmission measured is equal to the time between the sending of message
MT2 and the reception of MT3 divided by 2.
The time measured includes not only the transmission time of the PLC, but also the response time of
the filters, the decision making on the Test message reception, anf the different latencies inside the
microprocessors (note that the loop test is not a first priority task). Therefore, the value given is neither
the transmission time of the link nor the nominal transmission time of the teleprotection.
The typical value measured on an artificial resistive load with a well-tuned PLC link is 50ms.
If the MT2 message is not received after too long time, the master retransmits a second time the
message MT1. If the message MT2 is neither received, the master transmits a third time the MT1
message. If the message MT2 is still not received, the status of the loop test is “failed”.
By default, the last loop test result is displayed.

If the last loop test was successful, the status is “passed”, else it is “failed”.
If no loop test has been executed since the last reboot, the time propagation result is empty and the
loop test status is “Never executed”.
Note : The last loop test result can also be visualized in the window
Measure/TPI/analog (see section 4.8.4).

6. HF Power Measurement Method
This document describes the methods to be applied in order to perfectly control the power output to
the line by the T390.
It is intended for all personnel who may have to install PLCs:
▪ Field engineers
▪ Customers who have to set up their own system
This document is divided into two distinct sections:
▪ System configuration and theoretical overview
▪ On-line metering
6.1 Theoretical configuration

6.1.1 Band sharing
The R.F. frequency band sharing for the T390 is as follows:
Interbande (si besoin)

Canal de
Canal de
maintenance
maintenance
TX
RX
QAM Rx QAM Tx
8kHz or 16 kHz 8kHz or 16 kHz
6.1.1.1 Maintenance channel

The maintenance channel is a 120Hz-wide FSK channel.
Since it does not contain any scrambler it can be considered as a signal.
The reference tone (idle) is located:
▪ at 7910Hz of the band's central frequency for a 16kHz application
▪ at 3970Hz of the band's central frequency for an 8kHz application
Its level is 22dB below the PEP power of the system. This is our calibration level for the output power.
6.1.1.2 Signal channel

The signal channel is a QAM modulation.
Because of the scrambler, the spectrum may be considered as totally white prior to filtering.

The following consequence ensues:
The spectrum is flat and highest between the centre of the band and 0.4xBW.
This will make it possible to measure the power at the centre of the band only. The maximum power
over the remainder of the band will be equal to this measurement.
10
-10
-20 0.4BW
-30
-40
-50
Fc
-60
-70
-80
-90
6.1.1.3 Synchronisation phase

During training, upon start-up or after a loss of synchronism, power transmissions go through the
following stages:
Separated Mode Superimposed Mode
Master Slave Master Slave
Synchronisation FSK transmission Mute FSK transmission Mute
Amplification FSK transmission FSK transmission FSK transmission FSK transmission
FSK +QAM FSK +QAM FSK +QAM FSK
Synchronisation “ “ FSK FSK +QAM

Processing “ “ FSK +QAM FSK +QAM
Sync. complete Sync. complete Sync. complete Sync. complete
NOTE: QAM and FSK magnitudes are similar during the training phase and normal
operation.
NOTE: Faders applied during start-up avoid spectrum expansion during training phases.
6.1.2 Setting up
The power can be set up in the Configuration window of the Amplifier rack.

The following principles must be taken into account:
▪ The power to be considered is the PEP power. With regard to QAM, as a result of the encoder's
statistics, the ratio between the PEP power and the mean QAM power is equal to 6dB.
▪ The FSK power is set by default 22dB below the PEP power.
Furthermore, an estimation of the QAM power is provided in the Advanced tab.
Power calculations are always performed more easily when using the dBm unit system.
Reminder: P(dBm)= 10xlog (P(W)x1000)
E.g.: 10W=40dBm
As a first approach, it can be assumed that the QAM power is shared over the whole bandwidth.
As a result, to calculate roughly the power per kHz, simply apply the following formula:
Pk = Pmean – X
Where Pk, power over 1kHz
Pmean, mean power of the QAM over the whole bandwidth
X depends on the bandwidth: 9dB for 8kHz
12dB for 16kHz
6.1.3 Application
Where strict power limitation rules must be observed, it may be useful to use the following rules to
ensure that the configuration is adequate.
▪ 1. The output power should be limited to 0.25W/kHz over the whole bandwidth
▪ 2. The power of one signal should be less than 0.1W
With regard to FSK, if a signal is limited to 0.1W=20dBm it can be assumed that the PEP's maximum
value is 20+22=42dBm (i.e. 17W approx.) in order to comply with rule #2

For the first rule, it can be assumed that:
Pmean total ≤ Pmean QAM + Pmean FSK
The QAM mean power is given in the Advanced panel.
The FSK mean power is equal to PEP - 22dB.
6.2 On-line measurements

On-line measurements should be done without disturbing the systems operation.
Systems should be synchronised before the QAM signal is transmitted.
It is thus impossible to measure the powers output on the line if the systems are not connected to one
another.
Therefore, we recommend that the measuring device be connected in parallel to the line (e.g. using a
Tee).
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended to use a high-impedance attenuator, considering the high
power levels.
The figure below shows how to avoid disturbing the impedance whilst creating a 40dB attenuation.
PLC
Sous test Ligne
10 k 100
Voltmètre
Haute impédance
The use of a selective voltmeter to measure the voltages is based on the following two assumptions:
▪ The line impedance is close to the required nominal impedance (e.g. 75Ohms)
▪ A selective voltmeter can significantly measure this type of signal
Regarding the second assumption above, experiments have demonstrated consistency between the
measurements when using:
▪ A 3100Hz or 1700Hz selective voltmeter
▪ A 1Hz spectrum analyser
▪ An RMS voltmeter through a filter
The use of a selective voltmeter is the easiest method. It makes it possible to measure the level of the
service channel's line as well as the "mean" QAM level at the centre of the band.

7. Firmware Upgrade
7.1 Scope
This section handles about the T390 firmware upgrade that could occur during several situations as
commissioning or system replacement.
Section 7.2 firstly explained how to identify current release installed on the equipment.
Section 7.3 details the upgrade procedure.
If needed it is also possible to extend installed package by addition of locked features, as explained in
section 7.4.
The 2 latest sections are appendices dealing with the Firmware window description (section 7.5) and
erasing parameters (section 7.6).
7.2 Firmware release identification

7.2.1 Objectives
The objective of this chapter is to provide a way to completely identify a T390 system by its hardware
and firmware.
This identification procedure is very important in order to be able to successfully upgrade the firmware
to new product releases.
7.2.2 Bundles
A major release of the software is delivered in bundles (software packages) that include:
▪ HMI: PC based software to configure the equipment
▪ Kernel: Operating system of T390 products
▪ Applicative: one for each unit
▪ Board (MSU, VSU and TIO)
▪ FPGA bitstreams and DSP programs: according to unit
The bundle is versioned and numbered as follow:
Release X.Y.Z [build number]
▪ X is the major version
▪ Y is the minor version
▪ Z is optional to identify an intermediate minor version
▪ [Build number] is the build revision.
Major version is incremented on deep product change as hardware changes.
Minor version is incremented on bug fixes or small features.
Build revision is incremented on HMI update or documentation updates.
Each bundle is shipped on a CDROM, and last up-to-date bundle is delivered with the equipment in the
box.

New minor version or build revision are sent on demand (product update).
New major version should be ordered (product upgrade).
If you need to retrieve the bundle installed on your equipment, get it on the SAT document or
determine it from the firmware’s loaded on the product as described here after.
7.2.3 HMI version

Go to « Help/About» in the HMI menu to have a view of the HMI version:
Figure 42: HMI version identification
7.2.4 Hardware, kernel and bundle versions
Information on kernel and bundle version of each unit are given in PLC info window.
The Hardware version is given in same above figure under the field “Part Number”. The last 2 digits of
the part number indicate the hardware version.

Figure 43: Kernel and bundle version identification
CAUTION: The kernel and bundle revision must be checked on all units by clicking on each
of them in the list. They must be the same on all units.
7.2.5 MSU, VSU, TIO versions

The needed version of each board is given in the Release Note provided in the CD and also available
from HMI.
It is possible to get version of the MSU and VSU boards of one equipment by HMI, in Firmware upgrade
window by clicking on “PRCS” in the type area.
It is possible to get version of the TIO board of one equipment by HMI, in Firmware upgrade window by
clicking on “TPI” in the type area.

Figure 44: MSU and VSU identification
7.3 Firmware Upgrade/Update

7.3.1 Objective
The objective of this chapter is to describe how to proceed to load a new bundle on the equipment
(update or upgrade of the Firmware).
CAUTION: Instal the complete bundle (HMI + Kernel + Firmware). Partial update may cause
the system to fail or to not work properly
Section 7.3.2 is dedicated to passwords. If only kernels and applicatives have to be updated follow the
procedure given in section 7.3.3 (preferred procedure). If boards need also to be updated, follow the
general procedure (expert mode) described in section 7.3.4.
7.3.2 Passwords & permissions

To be able to upgrade a system from HMI, you must have the level3 privilege. Contact your responsible
to get the right login level.
A password also protects all upgrade scripts. Contact your responsible to get it.

7.3.3 Upgrading a T390: Basic procedure
If you only need to upgrade the kernels and applicatives on your equipment, follow the procedure given
in this section, else refer to general procedure.
1. CONNECT TO THE EQUIPMENT USING THE HMI
2. OPEN THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE WINDOW
3. ENTER SCRIPTPASSWORD
4. CLICK ON DEFAULT BUTTON
5. CLICK ON YES IN THE INFORMATION POPUP
6. THE SYSTEM WILL REBOOT AUTOMATICALLY
7. YOU CAN NOW CONFIGURE THE EQUIPMENT
Figure 45: BASIC UPGRADE
7.3.4 Upgrading a T390: Complete procedure

If you need to upgrade kernels, applicatives and boards, please follow the procedure.

1. KERNEL UPGRADE
2. REBOOT
3. APPLICATIVE UPGRADE
4. REBOOT
5. VSU UPGRADE (if needed)
6. REBOOT
7. TIO UPGRADE (if needed)
8. REBOOT
9. MSU UPGRADE (if needed)
10. PLC POWER OFF
11. PLC CONFIGURATION
Figure 46: General procedure

7.3.4.1 Kernel upgrade
3. ENTER SCRIPT PASSWORD
4. OPEN THE KERNEL SCRIPT

T390_S10_KERIMG FOR AMP+PRCS
OR
T390_S110_KERIMG FOR AMP+PRCS+TPI
5. START THE UPDATE BY CLICKING ON « START »
6. REBOOT ONLY WHEN THE MESSAGE

« Script successful »
IS DISPLAYED
Figure 47: Kernel upgrade procedure
The scripts to upgrade kernels are available in the directory \Kernel_upgrade. The Kernel of each unit
must be updated. Note that several kernel upgrades can be done together.
List of provided scripts is given hereafter.

Script Name Use
T390_S10_KERIMG Upgrade kernel of PRCS and AMP
T390_S110_KERIMG Upgrade kernel of PRCS, AMP and TPI
T390_AMP_KERIMG Upgrade kernel of AMP only
T390_PRCE_KERIMG Upgrade kernel of PRCS only
T390_TP_V3_KERIMG Upgrade kernel of TPI only
7.3.4.2 Applicative upgrade
4. OPEN THE APPLICATIVE SCRIPT

T390_S10_APP FOR AMP+PRCS
OR
T390_S110_APP FOR AMP+PRCS+TPI

IS DISPLAYED
Figure 48: Applicative upgrade procedure
The scripts to upgrade applicatives are available in the directory \Applicative_upgrade. The Kernel of
each unit must be updated. Note that several applicatives upgrades can be done together.

List of provided scripts is given hereafter.
Script Name Use

T390_S10_APP Upgrade applicative of PRCS and AMP
T390_S110_APP Upgrade applicative of PRCS, AMP and TPI
T390_AMP_VSU_APP Upgrade applicative of AMP only
T390_PRCE_APP Upgrade applicative of PRCS only
T390_TPI_APP Upgrade applicative of TPI only

7.3.4.3 MSU,VSU and TIO boards upgrade
4. OPEN THE MSU/VSU/TIO BOARD SCRIPT

IS DISPLAYED
7. IN CASE MSU, SWITCH OFF THE PRCS
Figure 49: MSU/VSU/TIO upgrade procedure
The scripts to upgrade boards are available in the directory \board_upgrade.

List of provided scripts is given hereafter. Note that The TIO script must not be applied if your system
does not have TPI
Folder Script Name Use

T390_MSU T390_MSU_BRD Upgrade MSU
T390_VSU T390_VSU_BRD_VSU Upgrade VSU
T391_TIO T391_PPC_BRD Upgrade TIO

7.3.5 Upgrade failures
7.3.5.1 Warning about applicative upgrade
When upgrading the applicative, the following message may appear: “Init order failure. Continue
anyway?”
Figure 50: Init Order failure

In that case, click yes to continue.
7.3.5.2 Warning about board upgrade

The upgrade of boards, and particularly MSU board may fail. If the upgrade fails DO NOT REBOOT OR
SHUTDOWN THE EQUIPMENT, this could be irreversible.
If a message of failure appears, re-do the operation of upgrade.
Figure 51: Board upgrade failure
Figure 52: Board upgrade failure
In both cases, click OK and re-do the upgrade procedure.

7.3.6 Replacing a unit (spare)
Follow this procedure to update your spare unit with current PRODUCT RELEASE:
1 - PLUG THE NEW UNIT TO THE SYSTEM
2 -UPGRADE KERNEL OF THE NEW UNIT
3 - REBOOT THE PLC
4 - UPGRADE APPLICATIVE OF THE NEW

UNIT
5 - REBOOT
6 - RECONFIGURE THE FIRMWARE
Figure 53: Spare replacement
CAUTION: Take care to maintain the same product release and firmware option on the
entire system. A non-homogeneity may be not detected by the HMI and causes
some crash of the system.
7.4 Extended Packages unlocking: Key System

7.4.1 How to get the already installed keys on the system
Go to « Help/About » in the HMI menu, and then click on the « Show keys » button.

Figure 54: Installed keys view
7.4.2 How to obtain the keys

When the equipment has been ordered, the keys were installed on the equipment and nothing should
be done unless you would like to add some options on your system or you need to reinstall completely
the system.
To reinstall the firmware on your system, use the procedure described in the above chapters, and then
install the unlocking file delivered with your equipment (CDROM or USB key).
To add a new option (new key), you have to get first the serial number of your units and make a request
to sales department to obtain a unlocking file.
Go to the « Tools/Key activation request » and click on the « Create request file » button. This feature
will create a request file on the disk that you have to send to Sales department with your order.
After receiving the unlocking file, follow the next procedure to install it on your system.
NOTE: An unlocking file is strictly associated with your equipment. The unlocking file
cannot be used neither for another equipment, nor for a modified equipment.
That is to say, if you add or remove some units of your system, you have to
request for a new unlocking file.
Figure 55: Key request procedure

7.4.3 Key installation procedure
Go to the « Tools/Send script », localize the unlocking file for your equipment and press OK
1 -CONNECT TO THE EQUIPMENT USING

THE HMI WITH A LEVEL 3 LOGIN
2 - OPEN THE SEND SCRIPT MENU
3 - LOCALIZE and OPEN THE UNLOCKING

FILE
4 - VERIFY THE INSTALLED KEYS
Figure 56: KEY ACTIVATION PROCEDURE

7.5 Appendix : Firmware window description
Figure 57: Firmware upgrade window

Items descriptions:
1. Default: launch upgrade of kernel and applicatives delivered in the same package as the
HMI.
2. Open Script: opens a window to choose the script of the firmware to be downloaded on
the T390.
3. Script Password: the user must enter in this box the password associated with the script.
4. Script: once the transfer has been initiated (“Start“ button), this frame contains the result
of the analysis of the script
Script Name: name of the files opened
Analysis: number of firmware to be upgraded found into the script
Key: presence and installation of one or more keys
Verifying Script: status of the script consistency check
5. Transfers: once the transfer has been initiated (“Start” button), this frame contains the
status of the transfer progress
Init: status of init order sending
Download: firmware that is currently downloaded
Flashing: status of firmware storing (in the flash memory of the T390)
Verifying Transfer: status of the transfer integrity check
Close: status of close order sending
6. Start: starts the transfer (only available once a script if loaded using the “open” button)
7. Reboot: reboots the T390. A reboot is required after any firmware upgrade.
8. Close: closes the firmware upgrade window

9. Units: This panel contains a list of the units that compose the connected T390. Each unit
has its own set of firmware. When clicking on a unit, the list of its firmware is shown is the
following panels (9-10-11)
10. Xilinx (and DSP) area: list of the xilinx and DSP files used by the selected unit:
Name: name of the xilinx file
Real size: size of the file before compression
Comp size: size of the file after compression
Comp: type of compression used for the file
CRC: cyclic redundancy code of the file
Info: type of file (XILINX or DSP)
Start: tells if the file is set to be programmed at T390 startup
Loaded: tells if the file is currently running on the T390
Flashing date: date corresponding to the file download on the T390
NOTE: The xilinx area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the “Erase button”
11. Program area: list of the PowerPC files used by the selected unit
Name: name of the file
Real size: size of the file before compression
Comp size: size of the file after compression
Comp: type of compression used for the file
CRC: cyclic redundancy code of the file
Start: tells if the file is set to be programmed at T390 start-up
Flashing date: date corresponding to the file download on the T390
NOTE: The program area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the “Erase
button”
12. User parameters area: list of the unit parameters. These parameters are changed by
using the HMI Firmware Configuration.
NOTE: The program area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the “Erase
button”
7.6 Appendix: Erasing User parameters

In some situations, it can be useful to erase the system parameters to come back to a default
configuration.
Therefore, before this operation save the current configuration to load it at the end of the
procedure.
Procedure:
Step 1; select Firmware upgrade window and unit

Step 2; select parameters
Step 3; tick on Erase
Step 4; confirmation message
Step 5; empty area

8. Data Retrieving for assistance
This section is a guide to retrieve data and information in case of technical problem with the T390
equipment. These data will be valuable for the assistance engineer to focus and repair the problem. It
should be accompanied with an exhaustive description of the issue.
In this section, we first describe a correct behaviour of the equipment, in order you can check which
step of the synchronization is not achieved.
Then some classical problems are described, with their possible corrections.
Finally, if the problem can’t be solved easily and assistance is required, the procedure to recover all
information of the system is given.
8.1 LED’s behaviour in working equipment

We describe in this part the LED’s behaviour in working equipment.
8.1.1 Startup Sequence Digital Mode

8.1.1.1 Step 1 : system recognition
▪ After powering on the units, all the Leds of all the units will be ON during about 5 seconds, then
they will all be OFF during 2 seconds.
▪ Then the red Leds "Internal Error" of the units will blink quickly until all the units have been
recognized.
▪ Then the "Internal errors" Leds will go OFF, and the "System OK" green Leds on all the units will
be ON (fix).
▪ The green Led indicating the Power on the amplifier unit is now ON (fix) [1/4 or 1/2 or Full]. The
led is blinking if the PeP limiter is not 100% in the configuration.
▪ The green Led Mode / Normal is now blinking fast on the PRCS unit.
8.1.1.2 Step 2 : Amplifier synchronization

First, the "Line Fault" unit Led (Red) is ON (fix), and the "SNR Alarm" Led (Yellow) is blinking slowly,
then:
▪ The Line Fault Led must switch OFF (SNR Alarm always blinking)
▪ The SNR Alarm must go OFF after a variable delay (up to 15 seconds)
The amplifier is synchronized, and the AGC has reached a good level
8.1.1.3 Step 3 : TDM synchronization

During this phase, the green Led "Mode / Normal" on the PRCS unit is always blinking fast.
When it stops blinking and go to a fix green, the equipment is fully synchronized.

8.1.1.4 Synchronization state
On AMP unit:
LED State
System OK Fix Green
TX power / (1/4 or 1/2 or Full) Fix Green
Power Supply / Logic Fix Green
Power Supply / Power Fix green
All others Off
On PRCS unit
LED State
System OK Fix Green
Mode / Normal Fix Green
Power Supply / Main Fix Green
All others Off
8.1.2 Startup Sequence Analog Mode

8.1.2.1 Step 1 : system recognition
▪ After powering on the units, all the Leds of all the units will be ON during about 5 seconds, then
they will all be OFF during 2 seconds.
▪ Then the red Leds "Internal Error" of the units will blink quickly until all the units have been
recognized.
▪ Then the "Internal errors" Leds will go OFF, and the "System OK" green Leds on all the units will
be ON (fix).
▪ The green Led indicating the Power on the amplifier unit is now ON (fix) [1/4 or 1/2 or Full]. The
led is blinking if the PeP limiter is not 100% in the configuration.
▪ The green Led Mode / Serv Local is now blinking fast on the PRCS unit.
8.1.2.2 Step 2 : Amplifier synchronization

First, the "Line Fault" unit Led (Red) is ON (fix), and the "SNR Alarm" Led (Yellow) is blinking slowly,
then :
▪ The Line Fault Led must switch OFF (SNR Alarm always blinking)
▪ The SNR Alarm must go OFF after a variable delay (up to 15 seconds)
The amplifier is synchronized, and the AGC has reached a good level

8.1.2.3 Step 3 : PRCS synchronization
During this phase, the green Led "Mode / Serv Local" on the PRCS unit is always blinking fast.
When it stops blinking and go to a fix green, the equipment is fully synchronized.
8.1.2.4 Synchronization state

On AMP unit
LED State
System OK Fix Green
TX power / (1/4 or 1/2 or Full) Fix Green
Power Supply / Logic Fix Green
Power Supply / Power Fix green
All others Off
On PRCS unit
LED State
System OK Fix Green
Mode / Serv Local Fix Green
Power Supply / Main Fix Green
All others Off
LED status
• Switch on the system
• Wait for about one minute
• Check the LED status
8.2 Classical issues
Symptom Check
TPx error led ON Check if there is a TPx connected and if there is a
TPx configuration in the HMI
Internal error led is red and local or normal led Check the carrier center TX and RX frequencies
after a couple of minutes is blinking with HMI, check if both PLC got the same
configuration, and in any case, apply again the
same configuration to the two PLC

Symptom Check
Line fault, and no signal from remote unit is Check all the wire connections
visible on the Amplifier “HF Adjustments and test
points” -right point-
Line fault Go in window “Maintenance”/ “Auto Gain
If line fault is on, whereas signal from remote unit Control” in “AGC stored value”, check “enabled”
is visible on the Amplifier “HF Adjustments and and decrease the AGC init value: “7” is a good
test points” -right point- and if the medium value in case of low attenuation line. Then push
training is not “running”, but “Wait for carrier” or “apply and save”. Reboot.
“bad”
8.3 Problem Report

If your equipment does not work properly and you need assistance, please and recover the data of the
system by following the procedure 8.3.1 and join the document given in section 8.3.2.
Send both information, accompanied with a description of the problem as exhaustive as possible to the
support team.
8.3.1 Data Retrieving procedure

In HMI, go in PLC | Data Collection
▪ The following window will open

▪ Click Run and wait for the complete saving of the system parameters. This operation can take
several minutes and should not be interrupted
▪ By default, the data are saved in the folder Config. Make a zip and join it to the support team.

8.3.2 Problem report document
Amplifier Unit
Type of shining
LED Colour (RED/GREEN/YELLOW)
(OFF/Fixed/blinking/fast Blinking)
Internal Error
System OK
Activity
Link
Line Fault
SNR Alarm
Remote
Local
Tx Power Alarm
TX power:
10W,20W,40W or full, ½,
¼,
Processing Unit
Type of shining
LED Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW)
(OFF/Fixed/blinking/fast Blinking)
Internal Error
System OK
Activity
Link
Fallback Mode
User Alarm 1
User Alarm 2
IRIGB
Maint-Call
Serv 1
Serv 2
Serv 3


Manial Del Equipo de Comunicaciones OPLAT GRIDCOM T390

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manial Del Equipo de Comunicaciones OPLAT GRIDCOM T390

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gridcom T390

Human Machine Interface

2. Definitions and standards ............................................................................... 4

Gridcom T390 1 Introduction

1.1 Safety Section

1.2 General Presentation

1.5 Human machine Interface

1.6 Maintenance and Measure

Gridcom T390 3 Introduction

2.2 List of acronyms and abbreviations

Gridcom T390 4 Introduction

Table 1: Acronyms and abbreviations

Gridcom T390 5 Introduction

Table 2: Applicable Standards

Gridcom T390 6 Introduction

Gridcom T390 1 Safety

Gridcom T390 3 Safety

Gridcom T390 4 Safety

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

Gridcom T390 5 Safety

Gridcom T390 6 Safety

Gridcom T390 7 Safety

Gridcom T390 8 Safety

Gridcom T390 9 Safety

6.1 Circuit breaker

6.2 Protective class

6.3 Installation category

Gridcom T390 10 Safety

2. Feature list .................................................................................................... 11

3. Transmission medium ................................................................................... 16

Gridcom T390 1 General Presentation

4. Digital services .............................................................................................. 22

5. Analogue services ......................................................................................... 29

6. External Teleprotection service ..................................................................... 33

7. Integrated teleprotection functional description........................................... 35

Gridcom T390 2 General Presentation

8. Integrated Teleprotection functionalities ...................................................... 43

9. System Security and supervision features ..................................................... 50

10. Mechanical issues - Design .......................................................................... 51

Gridcom T390 3 General Presentation

1.3 System Modularity

Gridcom T390 5 General Presentation

1.4 Hardware description

Gridcom T390 6 General Presentation

TABLE 1: Available unit list

1.5 Config table: Functions description

1.5.1 Mode full analog

Gridcom T390 7 General Presentation

1.5.3 Mode mixte with bandwidth ≤ 16kHz

Gridcom T390 8 General Presentation

1.5.5 Mode mixte with bandwidth > 16kHz

1.6 Release Content

1.6.1 Firmware Packages

Gridcom T390 9 General Presentation

1.6.2 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI)

Gridcom T390 10 General Presentation

Ability to operate in a wide 20 to 700kHz, depending on the bandwidth

2.2 Digital or Mixed mode feature list

Gridcom T390 11 General Presentation

Smart Fallback Adapt bitrate to line condition

2.3 Analogue mode feature list

2.4 External Teleprotection support

Gridcom T390 12 General Presentation

Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (Earth)